Pro Engineer 3.20 tutorial

PTC Global Services

FFuunnddaammeennttaallss ooff DDeessiiggnnRelease 2001

T781-320-04

For University Use Only - Commercial Use Prohibited -

CopyrightFundamentals of Design

Copyright © 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

This Fundamentals of Design Training Guide may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or reduced to anyform, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted or publicly performed by any means,electronic or otherwise, unless Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) consents in writing in advance.

User and training documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC) is subject to the copyright laws of theUnited States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement that restricts copying, disclosure, and use ofsuch documentation. PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of thisdocumentation if provided on software media, but only for internal/personal use and in accordance with the licenseagreement under which the applicable software is licensed. Any copy made shall include the PTC copyright notice andany other proprietary notice provided by PTC. This documentation may not be disclosed, transferred, modified, orreduced to any form, including electronic media, or transmitted or made publicly available by any means without theprior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes.

Information described herein is furnished for general information only, is subject to change without notice, and shouldnot be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors orinaccuracies that may appear in this document.

The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement, contains valuable trade secrets andproprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries.UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES ANDCRIMINAL PROSECUTION.

Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary: Advanced Surface Design, CADDS,CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN,Info*Engine, InPart, MEDUSA, Optegra, Parametric Technology, Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER,Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK, Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PTC, PT/Products, Windchill, and the InPart logo.

Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary

3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, BOMBOT, CDRS, CounterPart, CV, CVact, CVaec,CVdesign, CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION, DVS,DVSAFEWORK, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, e-Series, Expert Machinist, Expert Toolmaker,Flexible Engineering, ICEM, Import Data Doctor, Information for Innovation, i-Series, ISSM, MEDEA, ModelCHECK,NC Builder, Nitidus, PARTBOT, PartSpeak, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING,Pro/CDT, Pro/CMM, Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER, Pro/DESKTOP,Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE, Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST,Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG, Pro/INTERFACE, Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY,Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View, Pro/MOLDESIGN,Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK,Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL, Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM,Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR, Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER,Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY, Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT,Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING, Product Structure Navigator,PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap, The Product Development Company, Virtual Design Environment,Windchill e-Catalog, Windchill e-Series, Windchill ProjectLink, CV-Computervision logo, DIVISION logo, andICEM logo.


CopyrightThird-Party Trademarks

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks ofMicrosoft Corporation. Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.Adobe is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems. Metaphase is a registered trademark of Metaphase Technology Inc.Baan is a registered trademark of Baan Company. Unigraphics is a registered trademark of EDS Corp. I-DEAS is aregistered trademark of SDRC. SolidWorks is a registered trademark of Solidworks Corp. Matrix One is a trademark ofMatrix One Software. SHERPA is a registered trademark of Inso Corp. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk,Inc. CADAM and CATIA are registered trademarks of Dassault Systems. Helix is a trademark of Microcadam, Inc. IRIXis a registered trademark of Silicon Graphics, Inc. PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software, Inc.Rational Rose 2000E, is copyrighted software of Rational Software Corporation. RetrievalWare is copyrighted softwareof Excalibur Technologies Corporation. VisualCafé is copyrighted software of WebGain, Inc. VisTools library iscopyrighted software of Visual Kinematics, Inc. (VKI) containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI.HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of, and is copyrighted by, Tech Soft America, Inc. All otherbrand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND

This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software, pursuant toFAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and are provided to the Government under a limitedcommercial license only. For procurements predating the above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by theGovernment is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data andComputer Software Clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights atFAR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Parametric Technology Corporation, 140 Kendrick Street, Needham, Massachusetts 02494 USA© 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation. Unpublished – all rights reserved under the copyright laws of the UnitedStates.

PRINTING HISTORYDocument No. Date Description

T781-320-01 06/26/01 Initial Printing of Fundamentals of Design for Release 2001

T781-320-02 08/22/01 Revisions to Fundamentals of Design for Release 2001



Order Number DT-781-320-EN

Printed in U.S.A


PTC Telephone and Fax Numbers

Education Services Registration in North America

Tel: (888) 782-3773

Fax: (781) 370-5553

Technical Support (Monday - Friday)

Tel: (800) 477-6435 (U.S.)

(781) 370-5332 or (781) 370-5523 (outside U.S.)

Fax: (781) 370-5650

License Management

Tel: (800) 216-8945 (U.S.)

(781) 370-5559 (outside U.S.)

Fax: (781) 370-5795

Contracts

Tel: (800) 791-9966 (U.S.)

(781) 370-5700 (outside U.S.)

In addition, you can access the PTC Web site at www.ptc.com. Our Web sitecontains the latest training schedules, registration information, directions to trainingfacilities, and course descriptions. You can also find general information aboutPTC, Pro/ENGINEER, Consulting Services, Customer Support, andPro/PARTNERS.


Precision LearningTHE PRECISION LEARNING METHODOLOGYPTC Global Services is dedicated to continually providing the student with an effective,comprehensive learning experience. Toward this goal, PTC developed Precision Learning,which matches the right training to the right people at the right time using the right method.

Precision Learning is based on a three stage Learn—Assess—Improve methodology.

Stage 1: LEARN

The student attends a PTC training course, including any:

• Instructor-led training course at a PTC training center.

• On-site training course.

• Customized training course.

• Web-based training (WBT) course.

Stage 2: ASSESS

The impact of a training course is assessed using the Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator.�� !��"��


Precision LearningStage 3: IMPROVE

The Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator findings enable customers to identify areas for improvement.The training wizard will direct customers to the appropriate class based on their jobresponsibilities.

Customers have access to a range of resources that include:

• Internal and external user groups• PTC technical support resources• Web-based courses and lessons

CONTINUOUS IMPROVEMENTThe Precision Learning methodology provides a continuous cycle of knowledge expansion andimprovement.


Precision LearningPRECISION LEARNING IN THE CLASSROOMThe Learn—Assess—Improve Precision Learning methodology is also implemented in selected PTCinstructor-led courses. Throughout the class, students will take Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator assessments to evaluatetheir own comprehension. The group results are also used to identify areas for the instructor to review with theclass as a whole. At the end of the class, each student will complete an Education Circuit form. This EducationCircuit is the student’s action plan, identifying topics for improvement, as well as the steps to take in order toenhance the skills in those areas.

The following pages provide a sample Education Circuit action plan, and a blank action plan.Instructions for using the Education Circuit action plan will be discussed in the course.


Precision LearningEDUCATION CIRCUIT EXAMPLEThe following is an example of a student’s Education Circuit at the end of the Introduction toPro/ENGINEER training class.

Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator Exam ResultsAfter reviewing the results of the Evaluator exams for this course, the following lists thequestions I answered incorrectly and need to research further:

Question Improve ActionWeak and strong dimensions Practice creating simple features with the desired

dimensioning scheme.Web Lesson Dimensioning Scheme

Draft Features See colleague at work for advice and product examples.Configuration file options Consult company user group for guidelines.

Class Evaluation Form TopicsAfter reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation form, the following lists the topics Ineed to research further:

Objective Improve ActionSetting up the default view of a part Practice on simple parts using different sketching planes

and reference planes.Creating sweeps Web Lesson Swept FormsResolve Mode Create some simple models and make them fail.Resolve Mode Web lesson Resolve Mode

Future CoursesAfter reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the following lists the coursesrecommended to improve my skills and enhance my job performance:

Next Courses Next CoursesFundamentals of DesignDesigning with Surfaces


Precision LearningPro/FICIENCY Evaluator Exam ResultsAfter reviewing the results of the Evaluator exams for this course, the following lists thequestions I answered incorrectly and need to research further:

Question Improve Action

Class Evaluation Form TopicsAfter reviewing the questions on the class Evaluation form, the following lists the topics Ineed to research further:

Objective Improve Action

Future CoursesAfter reviewing the Role Based Training guidelines, the following lists the coursesrecommended to improve my skills and enhance my job performance:

Next Courses Next Courses


Training AgendaFundamentals of DesignDay 1

Advanced Sketching and Geometry

Drafts and Rounds

Creating Advanced Geometry

Surface Creation and Style Features

Day 2

Family Tables and Inheritance

Advanced Part Tools and Patterns

Local Groups and User-Defined Features

Advanced Assembly Tools

Day 3

Simplified Representations and Shrinkwrap

Top-Down Design and Layouts

Designing with Skeletons

Skeletons with Mapped Geometry

Day 4

Managing References

Project Part I: Design Intent

Project Part II: Skeleton Design

Project Part III: Creating Final Assembly

Day 5

Project Part IV: Completing Final Assembly

Resolving Failures

Pro/PROGRAM

Mechanism and Design Animation

Creating Photorealistic Images


Table of ContentsFundamentals of Design

Advanced Sketching and Geometry 1-1DEFINING ADVANCED GEOMETRY SKETCHING ...................................................1-2

Creating an Axis Normal to the Sketching Plane............................................................... 1-2

Sketching Conic Entities.................................................................................................... 1-2

Creating Elliptical Fillets ................................................................................................... 1-5

Creating Splines ................................................................................................................. 1-6

Replacing Sketched Entities............................................................................................... 1-7

Replacing Dimensions ....................................................................................................... 1-8

Inserting and Modifying Sketcher Text ............................................................................. 1-8

LABORATORY PRACTICAL........................................................................................1-10

EXERCISE 1: Working with Splines............................................................................... 1-11

EXERCISE 2: Advanced Sketch and Text Functionality ................................................ 1-17

EXERCISE 3: Creating the Go Cart Mirror Housing ...................................................... 1-24

OPTIONAL EXERCISE ..................................................................................................1-31

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Importing External Spline Data........................................... 1-31

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................1-35

Drafts and Rounds 2-1CREATING DRAFTS........................................................................................................2-2

Guidelines for Using Drafts ............................................................................................... 2-2

Defining a Draft Feature .................................................................................................... 2-3

Creating Neutral Plane Drafts ............................................................................................ 2-4

Creating Neutral Curve Drafts ........................................................................................... 2-5

CREATING ROUNDS.......................................................................................................2-6

Defining Simple Rounds.................................................................................................... 2-6

Selecting Round Feature References.................................................................................. 2-7

Creating Advanced Rounds................................................................................................ 2-9

Creating Round Sets......................................................................................................... 2-10

DEVELOPING GEOMETRY WITH ROUNDS .............................................................2-12


EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Plane Drafts.................................................................. 2-13

EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Rounds ..................................................................... 2-21


EXERCISE 3: Creating Intent Chains..............................................................................2-32

OPTIONAL EXERCISES................................................................................................ 2-39

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Curve Drafts ............................................2-39

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Drafts ...................................................2-44

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating Simple and Advanced Rounds ..............................2-49

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 2-54

Creating Advanced Geometry 3-1CREATING SWEPT BLENDS ......................................................................................... 3-2

Creating Spines...................................................................................................................3-2

Using Swept Blends ...........................................................................................................3-3

CREATING VARIABLE SECTION SWEEPS ................................................................ 3-3

Creating Normal-to-Original Spines ..................................................................................3-3

Defining Shapes with Additional Trajectories ...................................................................3-4

Using Variable Section Sweeps..........................................................................................3-7

Orienting Cross-Sections....................................................................................................3-8

CREATING HELICAL SWEEPS ..................................................................................... 3-9

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ....................................................................................... 3-13

EXERCISE 1: Using Swept Blends .................................................................................3-13

EXERCISE 2: Creating Variable Section Sweep Reference Curves................................3-22

OPTIONAL EXERCISE.................................................................................................. 3-30

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Controlling Cuts with Datum Graph Features .....................3-30

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 3-31

Surface Creation and Style Feature 4-1USING SURFACES IN MODEL DESIGN ...................................................................... 4-2

Advantages of Using Surfaces............................................................................................4-2

DEFINING SURFACE OPTIONS .................................................................................... 4-2

Working in Part Mode........................................................................................................4-2

Open Ends versus Capped Ends .........................................................................................4-4

Creating Merged Surfaces ..................................................................................................4-4

CREATING SOLID FEATURES...................................................................................... 4-5

DEFINING ISDX............................................................................................................... 4-5

Using the Style Feature ......................................................................................................4-6

Parallel Modeling ...............................................................................................................4-7

USING ISDX ..................................................................................................................... 4-8

Creating 2-D and 3-D Curves.............................................................................................4-8

Creating Curves on Surfaces ..............................................................................................4-9

Creating Styling Models...................................................................................................4-10

Creating Freeform Surfaces..............................................................................................4-10


Creating Blends and Transitions ...................................................................................... 4-11

Using Style Surfaces in Engineering Models................................................................... 4-12


EXERCISE 1: Creating Cuts Using Surfaces .................................................................. 4-14

EXERCISE 2: Applying Variable Section Sweeps.......................................................... 4-21

EXERCISE 3: Creating Style Surfaces............................................................................ 4-30


OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Flashlight ................................................... 4-39

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................4-45

Family Tables and Inheritance Features 5-1USING FAMILY TABLES................................................................................................5-2

Family Table Structure....................................................................................................... 5-3

CREATING FAMILY TABLES........................................................................................5-4

Creating the Generic Model ............................................................................................... 5-4

Creating the Table.............................................................................................................. 5-5

MODIFYING FAMILY TABLES .....................................................................................5-8

DEFINING FAMILY TABLE OPTIONS........................................................................5-12

DEFINING INHERITANCE FEATURES.......................................................................5-12

Using Inheritance Features............................................................................................... 5-13

Capabilities ...................................................................................................................... 5-13

Creating Inheritance Features .......................................................................................... 5-13


EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Family Tables .................................................................... 5-17

EXERCISE 2: Using Inheritance Features....................................................................... 5-24

EXERCISE 3: Inheritance Feature in New Models ......................................................... 5-27


OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Family Tables ...................................... 5-29

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................5-34

Advanced Part Tools and Patterns 6-1ADVANCED COMPONENT OPERATIONS ..................................................................6-2

Creating Part Intersections ................................................................................................. 6-2

Merging and Cutting Out Parts .......................................................................................... 6-2

Creating Mirrored Parts ..................................................................................................... 6-3

Creating Assembly-Level Features .................................................................................... 6-4

USING PATTERNING ......................................................................................................6-6

Creating Dimension Patterns.............................................................................................. 6-7

Creating Pattern Tables...................................................................................................... 6-7

Creating Patterns in Assembly Mode............................................................................... 6-11



EXERCISE 1: Mirroring the Knuckle Part ......................................................................6-13

EXERCISE 2: Creating Assembly Features.....................................................................6-16

EXERCISE 3: Creating Pattern Tables ............................................................................6-19

EXERCISE 4: Patterning Components in Assembly Mode .............................................6-22

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 6-25

Local Groups and User-Defined Features 7-1LOCAL GROUPS.............................................................................................................. 7-2

Manipulating Groups..........................................................................................................7-2

USER-DEFINED FEATURES .......................................................................................... 7-5

Creating UDFs....................................................................................................................7-5

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ......................................................................................... 7-9

EXERCISE 1: Creating Local Groups .............................................................................7-10

EXERCISE 2: Using Group Options................................................................................7-13

EXERCISE 3: Creating UDFs..........................................................................................7-23

EXERCISE 4: Placing UDFs ...........................................................................................7-26

OPTIONAL EXCERCISE ............................................................................................... 7-30

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Adding the Splined UDF to the Hub ..................................7-30

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 7-34

Advanced Assembly Tools 8-1MODIFYING ASSEMBLIES............................................................................................ 8-2

Modifying Subassemblies ..................................................................................................8-2

Repositioning Components ................................................................................................8-3

Replacing Components.......................................................................................................8-4

Repeating Component Placement.......................................................................................8-7

Creating Exploded Views...................................................................................................8-7

EXERCISE 1: Restructuring the Carburetor ....................................................................8-10

EXERCISE 2: Replacing the Brake Hub Assembly Components....................................8-16

EXERCISE 3: Repeating Components.............................................................................8-23

OPTIONAL EXERCISE.................................................................................................. 8-27

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Exploded Views and Dynamic Repositioning ......8-27

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................... 8-38

Simplified Representations & Shrinkwrap 9-1SIMPLIFIED REPRESENTATIONS................................................................................ 9-2

Simplified Representation Types........................................................................................9-2

CREATING SIMPLIFIED REPS ...................................................................................... 9-5


Creating Customized Representations ............................................................................... 9-5

Specifying the Default Rule ............................................................................................... 9-5

Defining Action for Components....................................................................................... 9-6

Selecting Components........................................................................................................ 9-6

Creating Rules.................................................................................................................... 9-7

Selection Rules................................................................................................................... 9-8

SUBSTITUTING COMPONENTS....................................................................................9-9

Selecting Components for Substitution.............................................................................. 9-9

Substitution using Envelopes ............................................................................................. 9-9

Envelope Methods............................................................................................................ 9-10

Other Substitution Options............................................................................................... 9-13

SHRINKWRAP................................................................................................................9-16

Shrinkwrap Capabilities................................................................................................... 9-16

SHRINKWRAP TYPES...................................................................................................9-17

Exported Shrinkwrap Models .......................................................................................... 9-17

Associative Shrinkwrap Features..................................................................................... 9-22


EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Simplified Reps ........................................................ 9-24

EXERCISE 2: Using Shrinkwrap and Substitution in Simplified Reps........................... 9-33


OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Level Simplified Reps................................... 9-41

MODULE SUMMARY....................................................................................................9-46

Top-Down Design and Layouts 10-1DEFINING TOP-DOWN DESIGN TECHNIQUES........................................................10-2

Identifying Design Intent ................................................................................................. 10-2

Using Assembly Structures .............................................................................................. 10-2

Using Assembly Skeletons............................................................................................... 10-5

Copying Reference Geometry between Models............................................................... 10-5

USING PRO/ENGINEER LAYOUT...............................................................................10-6

Capturing the Design Process .......................................................................................... 10-7

Creating Engineering Notebooks ..................................................................................... 10-7

Sketching Designs............................................................................................................ 10-7

Controlling Designs with Global Information.................................................................. 10-8

Linking Parts to Layouts ................................................................................................ 10-11

Using Global Dimensions .............................................................................................. 10-11

Capturing Design Intent ................................................................................................. 10-12

LABORATORY PRACTICAL......................................................................................10-13

EXERCISE 1: Using Layouts ........................................................................................ 10-13

EXERCISE 2: Developing Layouts ............................................................................... 10-18


MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 10-30

Designing with Skeletons 11-1USING SKELETON PARTS........................................................................................... 11-2

Creating the Skeleton .......................................................................................................11-4

Relating Assembly Components to Skeletons ..................................................................11-4

Using Skeleton Geometry for Modeling...........................................................................11-5


EXERCISE 1: Building the Motor Skeleton ....................................................................11-8

EXERCISE 2: Creating the Crank Model ......................................................................11-14

EXERCISE 3: Using the Skeleton to Complete the Assembly ......................................11-20

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 11-23

Skeletons with Mapped Geometry 12-1USING SKELETONS WITH MAPPED GEOMETRY .................................................. 12-2

Constructing Mapped Skeletons.......................................................................................12-2

Using Model Geometry ....................................................................................................12-3

Using the Mapped Skeleton at the Subassembly Level ....................................................12-5


EXERCISE 1: Creating a Map Skeleton ..........................................................................12-6

EXERCISE 2: Mapping the Exhaust..............................................................................12-11

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 12-15

Managing References 13-1DEFINING THE PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIP................................................... 13-2

Benefits of Designing with External References..............................................................13-2

Creating Dependencies.....................................................................................................13-2

INTERROGATING EXISTING OBJECTS.................................................................... 13-4

Info Pull-Down Menu.......................................................................................................13-4

Model Tree Tool...............................................................................................................13-4

Global Reference Viewer .................................................................................................13-5

CONTROLLING INTERDEPENDENCIES ................................................................... 13-6

Setting Object-Specific Reference Control ......................................................................13-6

Reference Control Settings...............................................................................................13-7


EXERCISE 1: Modifying the Piston ................................................................................13-9

EXERCISE 2: Breaking External References ................................................................13-14

EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the Suspension Assembly .................................................13-20

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 13-23


Project Part 1: Design Intent 14-1PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS .....................................................14-2

Scenario ........................................................................................................................... 14-2

Design Requirements ....................................................................................................... 14-5


EXERCISE 1: Capturing Initial Design Intent................................................................. 14-6

EXERCISE 2: Developing Initial Product Structure ..................................................... 14-12

Project Part II: Skeleton Design 15-1EXERCISE 1: Creating the Basic Skeleton ..................................................................... 15-2

EXERCISE 2: Creating Skeleton Features for Motion .................................................... 15-6

EXERCISE 3: Creating Skeleton Features for Space Claims ........................................ 15-13

EXERCISE 4: Creating Skeleton Features for Interfaces .............................................. 15-17

Project Part III: Creating Components 16-1EXERCISE 1: Communicating Layout Information to the Skeleton............................... 16-2

EXERCISE 2: Creating Features in the Main Base Part.................................................. 16-3

EXERCISE 3: Creating Features in the Support_Arm Part ............................................. 16-8

EXERCISE 4: Creating Features in the Link Part ......................................................... 16-12

EXERCISE 5: Creating Features in the Drive_Arm Part............................................... 16-15

Project Part IV: Completing the Assembly 17-1EXERCISE 1: Creating Features in the Housing_Rear Part ............................................ 17-2

EXERCISE 2: Completing the Assembly Population...................................................... 17-5

OPTIONAL EXERCISES ..............................................................................................17-10

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Blades ...................................................... 17-10

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Using Behavioral Modeling .............................................. 17-14

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating a Pedestal Part .................................................... 17-17

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: Finishing a Model ............................................................. 17-18

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 5: Creating Exploded States .................................................. 17-20

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 6: Testing Size Requirements................................................ 17-21

Resolving Failures 18-1DEFINING REGENERATION FAILURE......................................................................18-2

USING THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................................18-2

Examples of Regeneration Problems ............................................................................... 18-4


EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failures ................................................................................... 18-8

EXERCISE 2: Resolving Assembly Failures................................................................. 18-16


MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 18-22

Pro/PROGRAM 19-1USING PRO/PROGRAM................................................................................................ 19-2

Defining the Program Structure........................................................................................19-2

Automating the Part Design Process ................................................................................19-2

Automating the Assembly Design Process.......................................................................19-6

Incorporating Changes into the Program..........................................................................19-8

Running the Program........................................................................................................19-9

Editing the Program..........................................................................................................19-9

Manipulating Features Using Pro/PROGRAM ..............................................................19-10

LABORATORY PRACTICAL ..................................................................................... 19-11

EXERCISE 1: Automating Part Design .........................................................................19-11

OPTIONAL EXERCISE................................................................................................ 19-20

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Automating Assembly Design...........................................19-20

MODULE SUMMARY ................................................................................................. 19-26

Mechanism & Design Animation 20-1DEFINING MECHANISM ANIMATION...................................................................... 20-2

CREATING MECHANISM ASSEMBLIES................................................................... 20-3

Comparing Connections to Constraints ............................................................................20-3

Selecting a Connection Type............................................................................................20-3

SIMULATING MOTION ................................................................................................ 20-4

Dragging Assembly Components.....................................................................................20-4

Drivers and Motion...........................................................................................................20-4

Selecting a Driver .............................................................................................................20-5

IMPLEMENTING MECHANISM .................................................................................. 20-6

Mechanism Design without Cam and Slot Connections...................................................20-6

Mechanism Design with Cam and Slot Connections........................................................20-8

DEFINING DESIGN ANIMATION ............................................................................... 20-9

DESIGN ANIMATION CAPABILITIES ..................................................................... 20-10

Integrated and associative...............................................................................................20-10

Key frame sequences......................................................................................................20-10

Animation Tools.............................................................................................................20-11

Animation Manager........................................................................................................20-12

Mechanism Re-use .........................................................................................................20-12

LABORATORY EXERCISES ...................................................................................... 20-13

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Basic Mechanism ..................................................................20-14

OPTIONAL EXERCISES.............................................................................................. 20-22

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Fan Mechanism........................................20-22


OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating an Animation ...................................................... 20-26

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................20-43

Creating Photorealistic Images 21-1CREATING PHOTOREALISTIC IMAGES ...................................................................21-2

PhotoRender Interface...................................................................................................... 21-2

SETTING UP A SCENE ..................................................................................................21-2

Setting up Views and Room............................................................................................. 21-3

Defining and Setting Appearances................................................................................... 21-5

Setting up Lights .............................................................................................................. 21-6

RENDERING A SCENE..................................................................................................21-7


EXERCISE 1: Using PhotoRender ................................................................................ 21-10

MODULE SUMMARY..................................................................................................21-17

Using PTC Help A-1PTC HELP OVERVIEW...................................................................................................A-2

PTC Help Features ............................................................................................................ A-2

USING PRO/ENGINEER HELP ......................................................................................A-2

Launching Help: Four Methods ........................................................................................ A-2

There are four procedures for launching the help system. ................................................ A-2

PTC HELP MODULES.....................................................................................................A-7

PTC Global Services: Technical Support B-1FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE...................................................B-2

OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS ..................................................................B-2

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail.................................................................... B-2

Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone.............................................................. B-3

Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web ................................................................. B-3

Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support.................................................................. B-3

Routing Your Technical Support Calls ............................................................................. B-4

Technical Support Call Priorities ...................................................................................... B-5

Software Performance Report Priorities ........................................................................... B-5

REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT.....................................................................B-5

ONLINE SERVICES.........................................................................................................B-6

FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE ...................................................B-6

Terminology used by Technical Support .......................................................................... B-7

GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION ....................................................................B-8

CONTACT INFORMATION............................................................................................B-9


PTC Technical Support Worldwide Electronic Services................................................... B-9

Telephone ........................................................................................................................ B-10

ELECTRONIC SERVICES ............................................................................................ B-14

Using the Pro/FICIENCY Evaluator C-1TECHNOLOGY-BASED LEARNING @ PTC............................................................... C-2

PRO/FICIENCY EVALUATOR ...................................................................................... C-2

ASSESSMENT CRITERIA.............................................................................................. C-3

EXERCISE 1: Completing Evaluator Assessments .......................................................... C-4

MODULE SUMMARY .................................................................................................... C-7

INDEX……………………………………………………………………………………I-1


Page 1-1

Module

Advanced Sketching and GeometryIn this module you learn how to create and modify advanced

geometric entities.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to:

• Create ellipses, conics, axis points, and fillets.

• Sketch and dimension splines.

• Modify splines, while defining tangency conditions.

• Use the Replace and Text options.


Page 1-2 Fundamenta ls of Des ign

NOTES

DEFINING ADVANCED GEOMETRY SKETCHINGFor most common sketching purposes, simple sketched entities such asarcs, lines, and circles are sufficient. To create complex shapes, you needadvanced geometry sketching options.

Advanced sketching options include:

• Axes that are normal to the sketching plane through a particular point

• Conics for constructing elliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic sections

• Elliptic fillets (a fillet between two sketched entities)

• Splines

Creating an Axis Normal to the Sketching PlaneUsing the Axis Point option, you can create an axis that is normal to thesketching plane through a particular point. This type of axis is not a datumaxis feature; it is an axis within the sketched feature. It is similar to thetype of axis that the system creates automatically when you extrudecylinders.

Sketching Conic EntitiesUsing the Conic option, you can create conic sketched entities to constructelliptical, parabolic, and hyperbolic sections. To construct a conic, selectone endpoint, select another endpoint, and then select a third intermediatepoint, as you would do to construct a 3-point arc.

Entering Parameter Values

To define the shape of a conic, you can specify a value for the parameter“Rho,” which is the ratio of BE/DE, where segments AE = EC, as shownin the following figure.


Advanced Sketching and Geom et ry Page 1-3

NOTES

Figure 1: Definition of RHO

You can use values for the conic parameter between .05 and .95. Thefollowing values have specific significance.

• .05 to <.5:Elliptical round

• ��

• .5: Parabolic round

• >.5 to .95: Hyperbolic round

Constraining Conic Sections

To constrain the conic section, you can use the following three constraints:

• The positions of the two endpoints determined by dimensions orassumptions of coincidence with adjacent entity vertices.

• A rho parameter—created in the same manner as a radius dimension.

• The slope of the conic at each endpoint, determined by angulardimensions or assumptions of tangency to adjacent entities orcenterlines.

A E C

D

B



NOTES

Figure 2: Using a Rho Value

Using Sketcher Points

You can constrain a conic by locating two endpoints and providing a third,intermediate known point through which the conic must pass. The knownpoint can be, for example, a sketched point, datum point, or part vertex.Pro/ENGINEER internally defines the value of “rho.”

The following figure illustrates the required dimensioning scheme.

Figure 3: Using a Sketcher Point



NOTES

Creating Elliptical FilletsUsing the Elliptic Fillet option, you can sketch a fillet between twosketched entities. You use the same method that you would used to createa radius fillet. You must locate the endpoints of the elliptic section byusing linear dimensions or x and y radius values.

Figure 4: Dimensioning Schemes of Elliptic Fillets



NOTES

Creating SplinesSplines are curves that pass smoothly through any number of intermediatepoints. You can create them by using the Spline option.

To control the shape of the spline, you can dimension any of the internalpoints, as well as the tangency angle and radius of curvature at the splineends.

Sketching Splines

To create a spline, you can:

• Sketch points.

• Select existing Sketcher points.

• Select a chain of previously sketched entities.

Using Control Polygons

You can also use the Control Poly option to generate a control polygon,as illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 5: Spline with Control Polygon



NOTES

Note:

When you use Select Points to create a spline by selectingexisting Sketcher points, there is no further link between thepoints and the spline.

If you do not delete the sketched or imported points at thesystem prompt, then you must dimension the individualSketcher points.

Modifying Splines

The modification options available for sketched splines are different fromthe options available for other sketched features. You can drag thesketcher points; or you can modify the internal control polygon.

Figure 6: Modify Spline Dialog Box

Replacing Sketched EntitiesIf you attempt to delete a sketched entity with child references whenredefining a sketched feature, a warning message displays cautioningagainst the deletion of a parent entity.

Alternatively, to avoid feature failure, the geometry can be replaced by anewly sketched entity.



NOTES

When an entity is redefined, one part of it retains the old entity identifier,and the other part gets a new identifier. To retain the children, you can usethis new entity to replace the old one.

Replacing DimensionsDimensions to the old entity can usually de deleted without consequence.However, you can also replace a dimension.

When you delete a dimension and create a new one to redefine thedimensioning scheme, the system changes the symbol names (that is, SD#in Sketcher mode and D# in PART mode).

Note:

To determine the dimension of an existing feature, you cancreate a Known dimension in Sketcher. The system assigns ita symbolic name in the form KD#. You can use it to createsection relations, but keep in mind that a known dimensioncreates a parent/child relationship to the geometry that youselect to create it.

Inserting and Modifying Sketcher TextYou can use the TEXT dialog box to insert text onto sketched entities, andto modify text styles as well.

Figure 7: Text Dialog Box



NOTES

The TEXT dialog box has the following fields:

• Font – The standard fonts are cal_alf, cal_grek, filled, font, font3d,isofont, leroy, and norm_font.

Note:

To make additional, third-party fonts available for selection,set the pro_font_dir configuration option by specifying the fullpath to the font directory.

• Aspect Ratio – Enter the new aspect ratio factor or use the slider tomodify the value.

• Slant Angle – This option affects how the text is slanted with respectto the sides of the rectangle that contains it.

• Place Along Curve – Select the check box to add or remove text froma curve. Use the Flip option to determine the orientation of the textalong a curve.



NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICAL

Goal

In this laboratory you learn additional methods for creating sketched

entities.

Method

In Exercise 1, you work with splines to create a model using varioussketching tools.

In Exercise 2, you work with elliptic fillets and sketched text. You alsoreplace sketched entities.

In Exercise 3, you demonstrate the procedure for creating anddimensioning a conic by saving the conic as a section and then creatingsolid geometry from the section.

Tools

Table 1: Advanced Sketching Icons

Icons DescriptionCreate a spline curve through several points

Create reference coordinate system

Insert collinear constraint

Insert constraints

Sketch datum curve

Toggle datum plane

Toggle dimensions

Dynamic trim

Make two entities tangent

Select primary items

Sketch circular fillet

Sketch elliptical fillet



NOTES

Icons DescriptionToggle datum axes

Select geometry

Sketch a conic

Sketch text

Sketch ellipse

Divide section

Symmetry constraint

Mirror geometry

EXERCISE 1: Working with Splines

Task 1. Sketch a spline.

1. Set your working directory to the folder that corresponds to thename of the current module.

2. Create a new part called SPLINE using the default template.

3. Select the FRONT Datum. Click [Insert sketched datum curve].

4. Close the REFERENCES dialog box. Toggle off .

5. Sketch two circles and a rectangle, as shown in the followingfigure.



NOTES

Figure 8: Sketching Two Circles and a Rectangle

6. Click [Toggle dimensions].

7. Click [Dynamic trim] and trim all but the following:

Figure 9: Trimming Geometric Entities

8. Click to sketch the spline. Select the points shown in theprevious figure.

9. Constrain the left side tangent using [Tangential constraint].



NOTES

Figure 10: Adding Constraints

10. Select the spline. Click > Modify.

11. Click Add. Select a few points on the spline.

12. Click Move. Move the points around approximately, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 11: Moving Sketch Points

13. Click Create Control Poly.

Note:

This polygon or the original spline points could bedimensioned.



NOTES

14. Click Delete Control Poly.

15. Click Display Curvature. Move few points to see the effect oncurvature.

Figure 12: Moving Points

16. Clear Display Curvature. Click from the MOD SPLINE dialogbox.

17. Click to display dimensions. Complete the dimension schemeas shown in the following figure.

Note:

Not all spline points need to be dimensioned.



NOTES

Figure 13: Displaying Dimensions

Task 2. Create a tangency angle dimension on the right tip of the spline.

1. Click . Select the spline, the vertical line and then select theright tip of the spline.

2. Click to place the angle dimension.

3. Select the angle dimension. Click . Increase the sensitivityslider to ¾. Use the wheel button to dynamically modify the angle.

4. Type [180] for the angle. Click .

5. Sketch a vertical centerline, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 14: Sketching a Vertical Centerline

6. Click to complete the feature.

7. Click [Select primary items]. Select the datum curve.

8. Click Insert > Protrusion > Revolve.

9. Drag the curve to desired angle. Click on the background toregenerate.

10. Optional: Shell the model and color the inside surfaces as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 15: Final Model

11. Save the model and close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Advanced Sketch and TextFunctionality

Task 1. Create a new part called ADV_SKETCH.PRT using the defaulttemplate.

1. Select the TOP datum plane.

2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude.

3. Sketch as shown in the following figure.

Figure 16: Sketching Straight Lines

4. Add circular and elliptic fillets as shown in the following figure

using and respectively.



NOTES

Figure 17: Adding Fillets

5. Referring to the following figure, change the dimension scheme forthe elliptic fillet.

6. Click . Select the elliptic fillet. Click . In the ELLIPSEdialog box, click X-Radius, then click Accept. In the RESOLVESKETCH dialog box, delete the horizontal 1.50 dimension.

7. Repeat the previous step for the Y-radius. Delete the vertical 1.0dimension.

Figure 18: Deleting Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions

8. Exit sketcher. Click OK.



NOTES

9. Using Dynamic Modify, drag the depth of the protrusion to be avalue between .75 and 1.0. Click Regenerate.

10. Toggle on . Notice no axes were created.

Task 2. Create axis points.

1. Click [Select primary items]. Select the protrusion just created.

2. Click > Redefine.

3. Redefine the sketch. Insert three axis points using Sketch > AxisPoint as shown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Inserting Three Axis Points

4. Complete the feature. Notice the axes created.

Task 3. Use the replace function.

1. Click [Select geometry].

2. Press <SHIFT>and select the three edges as shown in the followingfigure.



NOTES

Figure 20: Selecting Edges to Round

3. Click > Round Edges. Use the Dynamic Modify function tocreate a radius between 0.125 and 0.15. Notice the round followsa tangent chain.

4. Select the protrusion. Click to redefine the sketch.

5. Select the 45° line, and attempt to delete it. Read the warningmessage. Click No.

6. Sketch a conic with both ends tangent using .

7. Modify the Rho value to 0.20.

Figure 21: Sketching a Conic



NOTES

Task 4. Replace references used by the 45° line with the conic.

1. Delete the conic’s centerline.

2. Select the conic, then click Edit > Replace.

3. Read the message window. Select the 45° line.

4. Click Yes to delete dimensions associated with the line.

5. Modify dimensions as shown in the following figure and completethe feature.

Figure 22: Dimensioning

Task 5. Create sketched text.

1. Return the model to the default view and click . Select the topsurface.

2. Click to begin a sketched datum curve

3. Click and sketch a spline as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 23: Sketching a Spline

4. Exit sketcher and complete the spline datum curve.

5. Begin the creation of another curve as before.

6. Click [Sketch text]. Sketch a line using the start of the datumcurve as a reference, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 24: Sketching a Line as Reference

7. Type [ProE] in the TEXT dialog box. Set the font to CG Times.

8. Click Place Along Curve. Select the spline, and flip if necessary.



NOTES

9. Click to exit the TEXT dialog box.

10. Drag the the text definition line to dynamically modify.

Figure 25: Dynamic Modification

11. Complete the text datum curve feature.

12. Click . Select the text datum curve.

13. Click Insert > Protrusion > Extrude. Drag to approximately0.25.

14. Regenerate and shade the model.

Figure 26: Extruded and Shaded Model

15. Select the text protrusion. Click > Suppress.

16. Select the text datum curve. Click Insert > Cut > Extrude. Drag todesired depth.




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating the Go Cart Mirror Housing

Task 1. Open the model.

1. Open the MIRROR_MOUNT.PRT.

Figure 27: The Mirror Mount Model

Task 2. Start the definition of the protrusion using a smooth generalblend.

1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend > General > Done > Smooth> Done.

2. Select the top surface of the mirror mount base as shown in theprevious figure.

3. Click to accept the default direction. Click Bottom. SelectDTM3.

Task 3. Sketch a coordinate system for the first section.

1. Toggle off .

2. Sketch a coordinate system using at the intersection of thereferences.



NOTES

Task 4. Define an ellipse using the default-dimensioning scheme.

1. Use [Ellipse] to sketch an ellipse at the intersection of thereferences.

Figure 28: Sketching the Ellipse

2. Modify the dimensions: Ry = 70 and Rx = 50.

Task 5. Divide the ellipse into four sections so that it can blend to thefinal section consisting of four conic sections.

1. Click [Divide section] and select the ellipse at the 4intersections of the references.

2. Add centerlines to the section along DTM1 and DTM3.

3. Click [Symmetry constraint] and assign symmetry about bothcenterlines.



NOTES

Figure 29: Creating Centerlines

4. Save this section to be used for the next sub-section. Click File >Save A Copy. Type [ellipse] and click OK.

5. Click the icon.

6. Type [45] [0] [0] for the rotations of the second section.

Task 6. Create the second section.

1. Click Sketch > Data from File. Select ELLIPSE.SEC from thedialog box. Click Open.

2. Click and create horizontal and vertical dimensions. Ifpresented with conflicts, delete the Rx and Ry dimensions.Re-establish symmetry if necessary.

3. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 30: Horizontal and Vertical Dimensioning

4. Click > Yes to create a third section.

5. Type [45] [0] [0] for the rotations of the third section.

Task 7. Sketch the third section using parabolic conic sections.

1. Define a sketcher coordinate system.

2. Sketch a horizontal and vertical centerline through the coordinatesystem.

3. Sketch a [Conic] in the upper left quadrant.

Figure 31: Sketching the Conic



NOTES

4. Delete the angled centerline.

5. Locate the left endpoint relative to the centerline using a diameter

dimension. Click . Select the left most endpoint, the centerline,

and the left most endpoint again, then click to place thedimension.

6. Modify the dimensions as shown in the following figure.

Figure 32: Modifying Dimensions

7. Select the conic section. Click [Mirror geometry]. Select thevertical centerline.

8. Repeat to mirror the two conic sections about the horizontalcenterline.

9. Complete the sketch, as shown in the following figure. Remove thesymmetric constraint about the horizontal centerline and addtangency constraints.



NOTES

Figure 33: Completing and Constraining Sketch

10. Select the right-most vertex between the upper and lower conics.

Click > Start Point.

11. Click . Click No when prompted, if you wish to continue to thenext section.

12. Type a depth of [100] for the second section.

13. Type a depth of [200] for the third section.

14. Preview and shade the model.

Tips and Techniques:

You have the ability to define tangency conditions at the firstand last section of the general blend.

15. Define the first section of the general blend to be tangent to thebase of the mirror mount. Double-click the Tangency element.

16. Click Yes when prompted to define tangency for the first end.



NOTES

17. Select the top surface for all four references to be tangent to asshown in the following figure.

Figure 34: Selecting References

18. Do not define tangency for the second end. When prompted,select No.

19. Build the feature. Click OK to create the feature.

Figure 35: The Completed Model


21. Erase all the objects from memory. Click File > Erase > NotDisplayed. Click OK.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISEThe following exercise provides supplementary tools and techniques

related to this module’s goal.

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Importing External SplineData

Task 1. Create a spline and use it to create a blended wing section.

1. Click File > New > Sketch. Type [WING] for the name.

2. Sketch a horizontal and a vertical centerline.

Task 2. Sketch a spline.

1. Click [Create spline through several points].

2. Sketch a spline with three points, and click to complete thespline.

3. Dimension as shown in the following figure.

Figure 36: Sketching a 3-Point Spline



NOTES

Task 3. Read in external data to drive the shape of the spline bydimensioning the section to a local coordinate system.

1. Click [Create coordinate system]. Place the coordinate systemat the intersection of the two centerlines.

2. Select the spline, then click > Modify.

3. In the MOD SPLINE dialog box click the Coordinates tab. Selectthe coordinate system that you defined, then click Read. SelectWING.PTS. Click Open.

4. Read the prompt. Click Yes to insert points on the spline.

5. Define the bottom of the foil section. Sketch a horizontal line fromleft to right that is coincident with the endpoints of the wingsection.

Figure 37: Horizontal Line Coincident with Wing Endpoints

6. Save the section, then click from the Intent Manager.

Task 4. Create a protrusion using the section that you just created.

1. Create a new part called WING.PRT.

2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Blend > General > Done > Smooth> Done.

3. Specify FRONT as the sketching plane. Click to accept thedefault direction. Select TOP as the top reference. Close theREFERENCES dialog box.

4. Click Sketch > Data from File. Select WING.SEC from the dialogbox. Click Open.



NOTES

5. Click . Drag the section approximately to the intersection of thedatum planes.

6. Type [20.0] as the scaling factor, then click .

7. Cancel the DATUM display, and zoom in on the section. Click

> to align each centerline with the corresponding referenceline.

Figure 38: Aligning the Section

8. Click to toggle to the next section.

9. Type [0.0], [0.0], [5.0] as the X,Y,Z rotations.

Task 5. Begin sketching the next section in the new sketcher thatappears.

1. Using Data from File, get WING.SEC.

2. Modify the section length to [15.0].

Figure 39: Placing the Section

3. Click to toggle to the next section. When the system asks youif you want to proceed to the next section, click NO.



NOTES

4. Type [18.0] as the depth of the section. The resulting wing shouldresemble the one shown in the following figure.

Figure 40: Resulting Wing

5. Select the protrusion. Click > Modify > All. Modify all threeangle values to 15° and regenerate the model.


7. Erase all the objects from memory. Click File > Erase > NotDisplayed. Click OK.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you learned how to:

• Manipulate entities within the new sketcher environment.

• Define and modify splines and read in point data from an external file.

• Create and save sections in sketcher to be used at a later date.

• Create ellipses and define different dimension schemes based ondesign intent.

• Create a conic section when the section is not a simple ellipse.



Page 2-1

Module

Drafts and RoundsIn this module you learn how use drafts and rounds to finish your

part designs. You also learn to create transitions between round sets

for more complex geometry.

Objectives

After completing this module you will be able to:

• Prepare models for casting or molding by adding draft features.

• Add advanced drafts to your models.

• Create rounds with single and multiple references.

• Create edge-to-surface and surface-to-surface rounds.

• Create intent-chain rounds.



NOTES

CREATING DRAFTSThe Draft feature adds a draft angle to individual surfaces or to a series ofselected planar, cylindrical or other ruled surfaces. You can create a draftfeature to add an angle (+/- 30 degrees) to existing surfaces of a molded orcast part. A draft can add and remove material from the model.

Figure 1: Draft for Molding

Guidelines for Using DraftsConsider the following when creating drafts:

• You can draft only the surfaces that are formed by tabulated cylindersor planes.

• The draft direction must be normal to the neutral plane if a draftsurface is cylindrical.

• You cannot draft surfaces with fillets around the edge boundary.However, you can draft the surfaces first and then fillet the edges.

• To incorporate a draft into a model that has rounds, you should add thedraft before rounding the edges.

• When you add a draft to a shelled part before adding the shell feature,the system will maintain a constant wall thickness.


Draf ts and Rounds Page 2-3

NOTES

Defining a Draft FeatureThe following figure illustrates the process of defining a draft feature on amodel. You can apply a draft feature to a planar, cylindrical, and splinedsurface.

Neutral Planeremainsconstant size

DraftSurface

Neutral Plane remainsconstant size

-10°+10°

Figure 2: Draft Definitions



NOTES

Draft Types

The following figure illustrates all the variations of the draft featureavailable in Pro/ENGINEER.

Figure 3: Variations of the Draft Feature

Creating Neutral Plane DraftsTo create a neutral plane draft, you can select whether or not to split thesurfaces at a plane or sketch.

If the parting line for the mold is located in the middle of the draft surface,you can split the surfaces, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Sketch

No Split

Split at Sketch

Split at Plane

Figure 4: Neutral Plane Drafts

Creating Neutral Curve DraftsUse a neutral curve draft when the perimeter that has to remain fixed andit is not planar.

To create a neutral curve draft, you can select whether or not to split thesurfaces at a curve or surface. If the parting line for the mold is located inthe middle of the draft surface, you can split the surfaces.

Neutral curve

Figure 5: No Split Neutral Curve Draft



NOTES

Split surface

Neutralcurves

Figure 6: Split at Surface Draft

Neutral and split curve(mid-plane remainsconstant size)

Figure 7: Split at Curve Draft

CREATING ROUNDSA Round is a Pro/ENGINEER feature that can add or remove materialfrom a model. The geometry must be tangent to adjacent geometry at allpoints along the round’s edge.

Defining Simple RoundsSimple rounds are composed of a single set of references, whereasadvanced rounds can contain multiple sets of references along withvarious transition options where the sets merge together.



NOTES

Round Set 1

Transition

Round Set 2

Simple Round Advanced Round

Figure 8: Simple versus Advanced Rounds

To define a simple round, you can use various methods. Regardless of themethod that you select, you must define elements to determine the shape,radius, and location of the feature.

Selecting Round Feature ReferencesYou should select references for round features carefully for two reasons:

• If you remove a single reference for the round, the system mustresolve the entire round feature.

• The type of reference that you select influences the round shape andextent. You should experiment with these selection options to fullydevelop the round geometry:

One-by-one Tangent Chain Surface Chain

Edge-Surf Surf-Surf Full Round

Figure 9: Selecting Surfaces Rounds



NOTES

When you select surfaces for round set geometry, Pro/ENGINEER tries todefine the round set tangent to the selected surface. If adjacent surfaces aretangent to the selected surface or surfaces, the system automatically triesto continue the round geometry along these tangent surfaces. However,you can prevent the round from continuing onto adjacent surfaces.

Setting Round Extents

In some cases, you may want to continue the round feature or stop it atsome point along the selected references that the system developsautomatically.

Note:

The additional selected references create parent/childreferences in the round feature.

TerminatingSurface

Auto Blend

Auto

Figure 10: Round Extent Options

Defining Radius Values

After you define the references, you must specify the round radius.

• Constant radius

• Variable radius

• Through a curve

• Full round



NOTES

Figure 11: Constant and Variable Radius Options

Using Points or Vertexes

You can select a datum point, vertex, curve, or edge end through whichthe round should pass. The selected entity must be on an adjacent surfaceto the geometry. The system does not assign a radius dimension to theround. The radius is a direct result of the position of the other geometry.

Note:

Using a point or vertex to define the round size creates aparent/child relationship between the round feature and theselected point.

Creating Advanced RoundsAdvanced rounds give you more flexibility in creating robust geometry.One of the major advantages of the advanced round feature is that it givesyou the ability to create transitions between round sets. A round set is a setof references with attributes and radius values, created with the sameoptions and attributes as a simple round. Using round sets, you cancombine surface-to-surface rounds with edge rounds or define rounds thathave multiple radii.

Using Transitions

By creating transitions between round sets, you can use a greater varietyof geometry shapes at the intersection of round sets without compromisingthe flexibility of the model. The transition element also enables you tospecify how Pro/ENGINEER should handle the intersection of round setswith model geometry.



NOTES

Figure 12: Blend Surfs and Continue Transitions

Setting the Default Transition

You can set up a transition between round sets to customize the shape ofthe round geometry in the following ways:

Corner Sphere Corner Sweep Corner Patch

Figure 13: Corner Transitions

Creating Round SetsYou can create a round set by making a rolling ball or a round surfacenormal to a spine.

• The rolling ball shape looks as if you rolled a ball between the tworeferences.

• The normal-to-spine shape looks as if you created the round surface bysweeping an arc normal to the selected spine.

Setting Round Shape Cross-Sections

By default, the system creates a circular cross-section of the round definedwith a true radius, but you can drive the cross-section to use a conicsection. A round with a conic section uses two values to drive its shape: aradius value and a conic parameter (rho) value.



NOTES

• The radius value determines the point of tangency on the model. Thevalue of Rho determines the shape of the conic itself as seen in thefollowing figure. Rho is the ratio of BE/DE where segments AE = EC.You can use values of the conic parameter between .95 and .05. Someof these values have specific significance:

� .05 to <.5: elliptical round

� √2 –1: normal quadrant elliptical round

� .5: parabolic round

� >.5 to .95: hyperbolic round

• Using a [true ellipse] value for the conic parameter creates a circularshape on the round feature.

Figure 14: “Rho”

Figure 15: Round Shape



NOTES

DEVELOPING GEOMETRY WITH ROUNDSAs you create simple or advanced rounds, you can use surface techniquesto develop specific geometry. Instead of creating the round geometryusing surface features entirely, you can actually use a round feature togenerate surfaces. When you create a round, you must choose one of theseoptions:

Make Solid Make Surface

Figure 16: Developing Needed Geometry

Tips for Creating Rounds

If you are having difficulty creating a particular round feature, you shouldbreak it up into separate round features, or change to an advanced roundand add a transition. If those methods do not resolve the problem, try anyof the following:

• Type a different radius.

• Use a different round option (Surf-Surf, Edge-Surf, etc).

• Create the round as a surface. Using surfacing techniques, you can fixthe problem areas manually.

• Create swept or extruded protrusions, cuts, etc.



NOTES

LABORATORY PRACTICALGoal

In this laboratory, you learn how to apply draft and round features as

finishing features.

Method

In Exercises 1,you learn how to insert neutral plane drafts.

In Exercise 2, you learn advanced round techniques.

In Exercise 3, you experiment with various intent chain rounds.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Advanced Geometry Creation

Icons DescriptionSaved view list

Use edge

EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral Plane Drafts

Task 1. Open a sample model and insert a simple draft.


2. Open DRAFT_PLANE.PRT, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 17: Draft Plane Part



NOTES

3. Click Insert > Draft.

4. Click to accept the default selection Neutral Pln.

5. Click once again to accept Tweak, No Split, Constant.

6. Select the two surfaces, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 18: Selecting Draft Surfaces

7. Click > , and select the surface as the neutral plane, asshown in the following figure .

Figure 19: Selecting Neutral Plane

8. Click Use Neut Pln to automatically use the neutral plane as thereference plane.



NOTES

9. Observe the direction of the circular arrow. Type [-10] as the draftangle.

10. Click Preview, and notice that the base of the cylinder increased insize.

11. Click to complete the draft.

Figure 20: Completed Neutral Draft Feature

Task 2. Create another draft with variable angles.

1. Click Insert > Draft > .

2. Click Variable > Done.

3. Click Intent Surfs and select the surface shown in the followingfigure. The system automatically selects all side edges of theprotrusion.



NOTES

Figure 21: Selecting Intent Surface

4. Click , and select the datum TOP from the Model Tree as theneutral plane.

5. Select the surface as the reference plane, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 22: Selecting a Reference Plane

6. Click > , and type [+10] as the draft angles of for the leftside and [-10] for the right side.

7. Click to complete the feature.



NOTES

Figure 23: Completed Model with Variable Angles

8. Switch to a front view of the model. Notice how material wasremoved from the top of the part and added to the bottom. The‘waistline’ remained neutral.

9. Modify the two right-side angles to [-20] and regenerate.

Figure 24: Regenerated Model with Variable Angles



NOTES

Task 3. Create a draft using split at plane.


2. Click Split at Pln > .

3. Click Intent Surfs and select the surface shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 25: Selecting an Intent Surface

4. Click , and select the datum Top from the Model Tree as theneutral plane.

5. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the referenceplane.

Figure 26: Selecting a Reference Plane



NOTES

6. Type [+13] as the draft angle and click to complete thefeature.

Figure 27: Completing the Draft Feature

Task 4. Investigate the robustness of the intent chain based draft.

1. Select HEX from the Model Tree and > Redefine.

2. Enter the sketch and delete the six lines, leaving the constructioncircle.

3. Sketch a spline similar to the one in the following figure.

Figure 28: Sketching a Spline

4. Complete the redefinition and observe how the draft adapts to thenew geometry.



NOTES

Figure 29: Redefined Draft Feature




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Rounds

Task 1. Use the round functionality.

1. Open the MULTI_ROUND.PRT

Figure 30: Multi-Round Part

2. Orient to a saved view. Click > Quick_Round.

3. Insert a full round. Click Insert > Round > Simple. Use theattributes for Full Round > Edge Pair.

4. Select the edges shown in the following figure. Click OK.



NOTES

Figure 31: Selecting Edges

5. Click to select the edge, as shown in the following figure.

Click > Round Edges.

Figure 32: Selecting Edge to Round

6. Drag the radius to a reasonable value, and on the background.



NOTES

Figure 33: Dragging Radius

Hint:

The round may be dynamically edited whenever needed by

using > Dynamic Modify.

Task 2. Experiment with round transitions.

1. Orient to a saved view. Click > Mult_Trans.

Figure 34: Multiple Transitions



NOTES

2. Insert an advanced round. Click Insert > Round > Advanced>Done.

3. Define the first round set’s attributes. Click Variable > EdgeChain > Done and select the tangent chain, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 35: Defining First Round Set Attributes

4. Click Done > Done. Type [0.0] and [2.50] as the radius values.

5. Click OK > Add to begin the definition of round set 2.

6. Click Constant > Edge Chain > Done. Select the edge shown inthe following figure and click Done.

Figure 36: Selecting Edge

7. Type [1.50] as the radius. Click OK > Done sets to completeRound Set 2.



NOTES

8. Click Transitions > Define > Add by Select, select the left green

edge of Round Set 2, and > .

9. Click Stop at Pnt > Done and select the datum point named

STOP. Click > .

Figure 37: Clicking Datum Point Stop

10. Begin definition of round set 3. Click Round Sets > Define >Add.

11. Click Constant > Edge ChainDone > Tangent Chain and selectthe edge shown in the following figure.

Figure 38: Setting Edge Attributes

12. Type [1.50] as the radius and click OK > Done Sets.

13. Click Transitions > Define > Add By Select. Select the threeedges (green), as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 39: Selecting Edges for Transitions

14. Click and drag over the menu options for Intersect, CornerSphere, Corner Sweep, and Patch.

15. Click Corner Sphere > > Done Trans > Preview.

16. Alternate between and . The corner sphere is shown inthe following figure.

Figure 40: Solid Model



NOTES

Figure 41: Wireframe Display

17. Click Transitions > Define > Transition 2. Select Corner Sweeptransition type and complete the round feature. The Corner Sweepis shown in the following figure.

Figure 42: Corner Sweep

Figure 43: Wireframe Display



NOTES

18. Repeat the redefine process for the other two transition types.

Task 3. Utilize the other round transition types.

1. Click to orient to the saved view Blend_Cont

2. Insert a round using Advanced, Constant and Surf-Surf. Selectthe two surfaces shown in the following figure.

Figure 44: Selecting Surfaces

3. Type [5.25] as the radius and click .

4. Click OK > Done Sets. Notice the round does fit all the wayaround.

Tip:

Use the CNTR datum point to reposition your spin center foreasier manipulation.

5. Complete Round Set 1, click Transitions > Define > Add bySelect and select the two edges (green), as shown in the following

figure and .



NOTES


6. Click Blend Surfs and > > > Preview.

7. Shade and spin to observe the transition. Do not click OK.

8. The round looks smooth and continuous to the eye, however, acurvature plot will show otherwise.

9. Click Analysis > Surface Analysis. Select all round surface

patches and . Notice the curvature plot is discontinuous.



NOTES

Figure 46: Curvature Plot Shows Discontinuities

10. Close the SURFACE ANALYSIS dialog box.

11. Redefine the transition. Click Transitions > Define > Redfine >Transitions 1 > Continue > Done > Done Trans.

12. Rerun the Surface Analysis, and notice that the curvature iscontinuous.

Figure 47: Continuous Curvature



NOTES

13. To complete the feature, click OK.

Task 4. Insert a round through a datum curve

1. Click to orient to the saved view Thru_Curve.

2. Click Insert > Round Simple > Done > Thru Curve > Edge Chain>Tangent chain, select the edge shown in the following figure.

Figure 48: Selecting Tangent Chain

3. Click Done Sel > Done.

4. Use Curve Chain and Select All to select the entire datum curve.

5. To complete the feature, click Done > OK.

6. Click the Rnd_Curve from the Model Tree, and click > Hide.Notice how the round follows the curve contour.

Figure 49: Round Follows Curve Contour

7. Optional: Modify the sketch of the Spline (within reason) andRegenerate the round.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Intent Chains

Task 1. Experiment with Intent Chains

1. Click > Intent Chain.

2. Click Insert > Round > > > Intent Chain, and QuerySelect on the vertex shown in the following figure.

Figure 50: Selecting a Vertex

3. There should be three possible options for feature 51 (the barbellshaped protrusion) as seen in the message window:

� Intent Chain (F51 X PART)

� Intent Chain (SIDE SRFS F51 X START SRFS F37)

� Intent Chain (SIDE EDGES) created by feature 51

4. Accept the third option listed, click Done, type a radius of [1.0],and click OK.

Task 2. Completely redefine the sketch and observe the impact on theround.

1. In Model Tree, select PROT_F51 and redefine the sketch.

2. Delete all sketched entities, leaving the reference intact.



NOTES

3. Sketch a rectangle as shown in the following figure.

Figure 51: Sketching a Rectangle

4. Complete the feature and notice the adaptability of the ‘SideEdges’ Intent Chain driven round.

Figure 52: Adaptability of Side Edges

5. Redefine PROT_F51 to be Both Sides with a blind depth of [24.0].

6. Reorient to the saved view Intent_Bot. Then click View >Previous.

7. Select PROT_F51 and > Suppress. Allow its associated roundto also be suppressed.



NOTES

Task 3. Create other Intent Chain round

1. Repeat the above procedure to insert another Intent Chain Roundfrom PROT_F50. Query Sel the edge shown in the followingfigure and Accept the (F50 X PART) Intent Chain.

Figure 53: Inserting Another Intent Chain

2. Type a radius of [1.0] and complete the feature.

3. Repeat for PROT_F49, except use the (SIDE SRFS F49 X STARTSRFS F37) Intent Chain.

Note:

Both rounds will be visually identical at this point.

4. Orient to the saved view INTENT_TOP, select PROT_F50and > Modify.

5. Click the vertical [10.0] dimension, modify to [2.5], andRegenerate.

6. Orient the model suitably and notice the changes.



NOTES

Figure 54: Selecting the Vertical Dimension

7. Orient to the saved view INTENT_TOP, select PROT_F50 and > Modify.

8. Click on the vertex shown in the following figure, drag thesection approximately as shown in the following figure andregenerate.

Figure 55: Regenerating Model

9. Notice the robustness of the round.



NOTES

Figure 56: A Robust Round Feature

10. Repeat the drag procedure for Prot_F49. Notice the difference inthe round feature- it only interacts with its intent chain (SIDESRFS F49 X START SRFS F37).

Figure 57: Round Feature Interacts only with its Intent Chain

11. Repeat the drag procedure again on PROT_F50 as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 58: Repeating Drag Procedure

12. Redefine both PROT_F49 and PROT_F50 from One Side to BothSides, using a depth of [24.0]

13. Orient to the saved view INTENT_BOT.

Figure 59: Differing Intent Chains

14. Notice how the two intent chains above are different, and clickView > Previous.



NOTES

15. Create a final round using the Intent Chain “(END EDGES)created by feature 49” as shown. Use a radius of [0.50]

Figure 60: Creating a Final Round

16. Redefine the Sketch for Prot_F49. Delete all geometry, and sketcha 2.5 radius circle. Complete the feature and notice how the roundadapts.

Figure 61: Round Adapts to New Criteria

17. Save the model, close all windows, and click File > Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISESThe following exercises provide supplementary tools and techniques

related to this module’s goal. You may work on these as time allows.

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Inserting Neutral CurveDrafts

Task 1. Open the model and insert a split at surface draft on the uppermodel.

1. Open DRAFT_CURVE.PRT

Figure 62: Neutral Curve Draft Feature

2. Click Insert > Draft > Neutral Curve > Done.

3. Click Tweak > Split at Srf > Both Sides > Dependent >Constant > Done.

4. Click Indiv Surfs and select the surfaces shown in the followingfigure.



NOTES

Figure 63: Selecting Individual Surfaces

5. Click Intent Surfs. Select the round shown in the following figure.Click Done to continue.

Figure 64: Selecting Round Surface

6. This type of draft requires two neutral curves (or sets of edges).For the first curve, use Tangent Chain to select the upper set ofedges, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 65: Selecting Upper Set of Edges

7. Click Done > Tangent Chain to select the lower set of edges, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 66: Selecting Lower Set of Edges

8. Click Done. Select the parting quilt.

9. To select the pull direction plane, click Sel By Menu > Top >Select.

10. Note the direction of the green draft arrow, type [10.0°], and clickOK.



NOTES

Task 2. Insert a split at curve draft on the lower model

1. Insert another neutral curve draft. Use the attributes Tweak > Splitat Crv > Both Sides > Dependent > Constant.

2. Use the previous techniques to select the surfaces from the lowermodel, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 67: Selecting Surfaces from Lower Model

3. To select the neutral curve, click Curve Chain. Select the datumcurve. Then click Select All > Done.

4. Select the OFFSET plane as the reference plane.

5. Note the direction of the green draft arrow, type [10°], and clickOK.

6. Select the OFFSET plane and use > Modify to change theoffset dimension to [2.0].

7. Click > Front and zoom, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 68: Front View

8. Notice that the upper model increased in size, while the lowermodel decreased.




NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating Advanced Drafts

Task 1. Open DRAFT_SKETCH.PRT and create a draft on therectangular protrusion on the top of the part, using non-parallel neutral andreference planes.

1. Open DRAFT_SKETCH.PRT.

Figure 69: Draft Example Part

2. Click Insert > Draft > > .

3. Select the surfaces to be drafted, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 70: Selecting Draft Surfaces

4. Select the neutral plane, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 71: Selecting the Neutral Plane

5. Select the Top datum plane from the Model Tree as a referenceplane for angle measurement.

6. Type [-5.0] as the draft angle, and complete the feature.

7. Click > Front, and investigate the draft angles created.

Figure 72: Investigating Draft Angles

Task 2. Insert a split at sketch draft.

1. Click > Sketch.



NOTES

Figure 73: Inserting a Split at Sketch


3. Click Split at Skt > .

4. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the draftsurface.

Figure 74: Selecting Draft Surface

5. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the neutralplane.



NOTES

Figure 75: Selecting a Neutral Plane

6. When prompted for a sketching plane, select the draft surface.

7. Select the TOP datum as the top reference plane.

8. To close the REFERENCES dialog box, click Close > Yes.

9. Click , and select the five datum curve segments, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 76: Selecting Datum Curve Segments

10. Complete the sketch, type [-7.0] and [7.0] as the draft angles,and complete the feature.



NOTES

Figure 77: Completed Model




NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating Simple andAdvanced Rounds

Task 1. Insert an edge-to-surface round to make a smooth transitionwhere the knuckle tapers to connect to the suspension link.

1. Open RR_KNUCKLE.PRT.

Figure 78: RR Knuckle Part

2. Click Insert > Round > Simple > Done.

3. Specify the round attributes. Click Constant > Edge-Surf > Done.

4. Select the edge and the cylindrical surface, as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 79: Selecting Edge and Cylindrical Surface

5. Type [1.0] as the radius and click OK to create the round.

6. Repeat the round for the other side of the part.

Figure 80: Repeating Round Feature

Task 2. Insert a round between the main body of the part and the lowercylinder that connects to the suspension.

1. Click Insert > Round > Simple > Done.

2. Specify the round attributes. Click Constant > Surf-Surf > Done.



NOTES

3. Select the two surfaces shown in the following figure.


4. Type [0.5] as the radius, and click OK to create the feature.

Figure 82: Model after Feature Creation

5. Click Insert > Round > Advanced > Done.

6. Specify the attributes for the set. Click Constant > Surf-Surf >Done.

7. Select the two reference surfaces as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 83: Selecting References

8. Type [0.2] as the radius. Click OK to accept the round set.

9. Click Done Sets > Preview, to view the geometry. Notice thelower round edge is straight.

Figure 84: Previewing Geometry

Task 3. Add a transition to the round.

1. Click Transitions > Define.



NOTES

2. Specify the edges to create the transition. Select the two insidegreen edges. Click Done Sel > Done > Done Trans.

3. Notice the system automatically adds a blend transition.

Figure 85: Automatic Blend Transition

4. Click OK to create the round.




NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you have learned how to:

• Prepare a model for casting or molding by adding draft features.

• Use advanced types of drafts for more complex applications.

• Insert rounds with single and multiple sets of references.

• Define radius values for rounds.

• Create transitions between round sets for more complex geometry.

• Utilize various intent chain rounds.


Page 3-1

Module

Creating Advanced GeometryIn this module, you learn how to use advanced techniques to create

and manipulate construction features that would otherwise require

multiple steps to create.

Objectives


• Create swept blends.

• Create variable section sweeps.

• Define the types of variable section sweeps and their purpose.

• Define the purpose of using helical sweeps.



NOTES

CREATING SWEPT BLENDSThe swept blend and variable section sweep features enable you to capturethe design intent of your model by:

• Following a specified path that you can control parametrically.

• Varying the cross-section of the feature along the specified path.

Creating SpinesTo create a swept blend feature, you blend several cross-sections along asingle trajectory, defined as the spine.

Cross-sections

Spine

Figure 1: Swept Blend

• You define the cross-sections by sketching or selecting them atspecified segment vertices or datum points located on the curve. Youcan sketch the spine trajectory as an open or closed loop.

• You define additional elements when creating a swept blend featureusing Blend Control and Tangency.


Advanced Geomet ry Creat ion Page 3-3

NOTES

Using Swept Blends• To create a swept blend, all sections must intersect the trajectory.

• To use a closed trajectory, you must create two sections: one sketchedat the start point, the other sketched at any other location.

• To use an open trajectory, you create use a section at the start pointsand end points.

• To define sections of a swept blend, you use the underlying curvesegments or edges from which you constructed the composite curve.

CREATING VARIABLE SECTION SWEEPSTo create a variable section sweep (VSS) feature, you sweep a singlevariable section along one or more trajectories.

Creating Normal-to-Original SpinesThe following points have to be kept in mind when creating normal-to-original spines:

• You must define at least one additional trajectory, called the x-vectoror horizontal vector trajectory.

• The system uses this trajectory to orient the section during the sweep.

• The section plane is always normal to the spine at their intersection asshown in the following figure.



NOTES

Spine trajectory x-vectortrajectory

x-vectortrajectory sets uphorizontal forSketcher

Resulting feature twistsdue to change inhorizontal determined byx-vector

Figure 1: Result of X-Vector

Defining Shapes with Additional TrajectoriesOnce you have defined the spine and x-vector, you can select or sketchadditional trajectories to define the shape of the swept section.

Spine

Additionaltrajectories

Known vertex forautomaticalignment



NOTES

Figure 2: Using Multiple Trajectories

Note:

You do not have to add explicit alignments to a known vertex.If possible, you should avoid making unnecessary alignmentsin the section of a variable section sweep.

Using the Trajectory Parameter

When the system regenerates a variable section sweep, it automaticallyevaluates an internal parameter called a trajpar (trajectory parameter). It isa normalized value between 0 and 1, representing the percentage length ofthe swept feature at every point along the spine trajectory.

At the beginning of the sweep, the value of trajpar is 0; at the end, it is 1.You can use this value to your advantage by writing relations to controlthe section.



NOTES

Sketcher dimension

No relations

Added relationsd4 = trajpar + 1 Added relation

sd4 = sin ( trajpar *360 ) + 1.5

Figure 3: Using Trajpar to Drive the Section

You can use the trajpar parameter to drive surfaces to zero anywhere alongthe trajectory by using complex relations to drive the section, or byevaluating a Datum Graph feature (evalgraph).

Before trajpar relation After trajpar relation

Figure 4: Driving a Surface to Zero



NOTES

Figure 5: Using a Datum Graph Feature

Using Variable Section SweepsThe following points have to be kept in mind when using variable sectionsweeps:

• A variable section sweep cannot be the first feature in a model, so youmust use default datums first.

• The spine curve must consist of only tangent entities, unless the PivotDir option is used.

• The x-vector trajectory cannot cross the spine. However, eitherendpoint may intersect the spine.

• All additional trajectories must intersect the sweep’s sketching plane,but they do not have to be the same length as the spine trajectory.

• The sweep feature’s sketching plane may intersect any trajectory onlyonce at any given location along the sweep.

• If the sweep feature’s sketching plane cannot intersect all trajectoriesat the sweep’s start point, you can use a datum point (on the spine) todefine the start point.



NOTES

Spine trajectory

Internal sketchplane defined atpoint

Figure 6: Using a Datum Point to Define a Sketching Plane

Orienting Cross-SectionsBoth the swept blend and the variable section sweep enable you to controlhow the system sweeps the cross-section with respect to the spinetrajectory.

The following options provide flexibility in defining a feature by allowingyou to specify the orientation of its cross-section.

• Normal to the original trajectory

Spine

Other trajectory

Figure 7: Normal to the Original Trajectory



NOTES

• Normal to trajectory

Figure 8: Normal to Selected Trajectory

• Pivot direction

Normal to DTM2

Figure 9: Normal to Pivot Plane

CREATING HELICAL SWEEPSTo create a helical sweep feature, you sweep a single section along ahelical path that is defined by a profile and a pitch value.

You must first specify a sweep profile using a sketch. The followingfigures illustrate a straight profile section and a resulting ‘spring’ feature.



NOTES

Figure 6: Straight Profile Section and Spring Feature

Variations of the profile can easily be created. The following profile hasthree line segments. After specifying a profile, you specify a pitch value tobe used and sketch a cross section. The section was simply a circle,centered on the provided crosshairs.

Figure 7: Profile variation with Three Line Segments



NOTES

Helical Sweep Options

• Right or Left Handed

Figure 8: Right and Left Handed Helical Sweeps

• Thru Axis or Normal to Traj

Figure 9: Thru Axis and Norm to Traj Sweeps

• Constant or Variable Pitch

Figure 10: Constant and Variable Sweeps



NOTES

You can control the pitch with sketcher points and a graph using variablepitch. The sketcher points are located on the original profile, as shown inthe following figure. Once sketcher points are added, they can be added toa pitch graph, and the pitch values for each point are entered.

Figure 11: Sketcher Points on the Original Profile

Figure 12: Pitch Values at Various Points



NOTES


In this laboratory, you practice the techniques used to create swept

blends and variable section sweeps.

Method

In Exercise 1, you create a swept blend including all the steps it takes tocreate an intake port for a go-cart.

In Exercise 2, you create a variable section sweep using a graph.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Advanced Geometry Creation

Icons DescriptionSaved views list

Use Edge

Offset Edge

Select Geometry

Collinear Constraint

EXERCISE 1: Using Swept Blends

Task 1. Open the models and configure the display.


2. Open ENGINE_BLOCK.PRT.

3. Click > Intake.



NOTES

Figure 13: Intake View of Engine Block Model

4. View the geometry making up the intake ports on the engine block,and then close the window.

5. Open CARB_INTAKE_PORT.PRT.

Figure 14: Carb_Intake_Port Model

6. Notice the surface quilts. These are Copy Geometry features thatare ‘mapped’ geometry transferred from the engine block viewedpreviously.



NOTES

Task 2. Use the copied geometry and supplied datum curves to create amating intake manifold part that ‘fits perfectly’, and maintains tangencyon inner surfaces. Begin by defining a trajectory.

1. Select the first Copy Geometry feature from the Model Tree and

click > Hide.

2. Click Insert > Protrusion > Swept Blend.

3. Click Select Sec > NrmToOriginTraj > Done.

4. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain, and select the datum curveshown in the following figure.

Figure 15: Selecting Datum Curve

5. Click Select All > Done.

Task 3. Define the cross sections for the swept blend.

1. Using Select Curve, select the eight datum curve segments thatform the loop shown in the following figure. Note the location ofyour start point. (Using a different start point is acceptable.)



NOTES

Figure 16: Selecting Datum Curve Segments

Tip

Using the option for Sel Chain is an easy way to selectmultiple continuous curve segments.

2. Click Done. Use the same technique to select the eight curvesegments for the second section, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 17: Selecting Curve

3. Check that the start points of the two sections line up. Ifnecessary, click Start Point, and select a new location.

4. Click Done > No > OK to complete the feature.



NOTES

Figure 18: Completed Feature

Task 4. Using the capabilities of a swept blend, create a cut to hollow-out the protrusion while maintaining tangency with the copied geometry.

1. Click Insert > Cut > Swept Blend > Done.

2. Click Select Traj > Curve Chain.

3. Select the same curve that you used as the trajectory for theprotrusion. Click Select All. Use the same start point as theprotrusion. Click Done.

4. Click Automatic > Done to automatically orient the sketchingplane.

5. Click Next to skip definition of intermediate sections.

6. Type [0.0] for the Z-axis rotation.

7. Click > Chain and select the two edges of the copy geometryas shown in the following figure.




NOTES

8. Click Accept to select the entire loop. Note the location of theStart Point.

9. Click > Automatic > Done.

10. Type [0.0] for the Z-axis rotation.

11. Click > Loop, and select the surface shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 20: Selecting Surface

12. Type [-.125] for the offset.

13. Ensure that the start point lines up with the start point of the first

section. If necessary, select the proper location and click >StartPoint.

14. Click . Verify the material removal arrow faces the inside of thesection and click Okay.

15. Click Preview. Notice that there is currently a sharp transitionbetween the cut and the copy geometry surfaces. (The surfaces inthe following figure are shown using a Gaussian Curvature SurfaceAnalysis)



NOTES

Figure 21: Gaussian Curvature Surface Analysis

Task 5. Eliminate the ‘sharp’ by defining Tangency.

1. Click Tangency > Define.

2. Click Yes to define the blend tangent at the first end.

3. The system now highlights the section in blue and the edge shownin red.

Figure 22: System Highlights Edge

4. Select the surface shown in the following figure as the tangentreference for the highlighted edge.



NOTES

Figure 23: Standard Surface Reference for Edge

5. Continue to select tangent surfaces for each highlighted red edge insequence.

Tips & Techniques:

Use Query Sel when defining tangency on a blend. Youcannot change one of the edges on the fly. If you inadvertentlyselect the wrong reference, you must repeat the whole process.

6. Click No to skip tangency definition at the other end.

7. Click Preview. Notice that the cut is tangent to the surfaces of theengine intake. (The surfaces in the following figure are shownusing a Gaussian Curvature Surface Analysis)

8. Click OK.

Figure 24: Cut is Tangent to Surfaces of Engine Intake



NOTES

9. Hide the remaining Copy Geometry feature.

Figure 25: Model after Hiding Features

Task 6. [Optional] Create mounting tabs at each end of the port tocomplete the part, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 26: Model with Mounting Tabs

1. Save the part and close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Variable Section SweepReference Curves

Task 1. Utilize datum curves as variable section sweep trajectories.

1. Open the BOTTLE.PRT

Figure 27: Start Model

Task 2. Create a variable section sweep for the body of the bottle.Begin by defining trajectories

1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Variable Section Sweep >NrmToOriginTraj > Done.

2. Click Select Traj and select the datum curve shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES


3. Click , and verify that the start point is at the bottom of thecurve. (If necessary, click Start Point and modify.)

4. Click > Select Traj > Curve Chain to define theX-vector.

5. Select the rightmost curve. Click Select All > .

6. Continue using Select Traj > Curve Chain, and Select All > to select the remaining curves in any order.

7. Click .

Task 3. Define the cross-section.

1. Sketch a rectangle with all four sides snapping to the providedsketcher points. Sketch fillets and then dimension/constrain, asshown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 29: Sketching Fillets and Constraining

2. Click > OK.

3. Hide all datum curves using the Model Tree. Notice the top of thebottle is not cylindrical, and the radius on the corners is constant.

Figure 30: Analyzing the Bottle Model



NOTES

Task 4. Create a datum graph that will control the radius on the cornersof the bottle.

1. Click Insert > Datum > Graph.

2. Type [radius].

3. To save time, insert a saved sketch. Click Sketch >Data From File > Radius.sec > Open.

Figure 31: Inserting a Saved Sketch

4. Observe the following:

� The Graph is 140 units in ‘X’, which is the height of the spinetrajectory curve.

� It has horizontal segments at ‘Y’ values of 115 and 50.Dividing each by 5 yields 23 and 10, which relate to thedimensions of the original curves.

5. Click .

6. In order to control the variable section sweep with the radiusgraph, reorder it before the variable section sweep by dragging inthe Model Tree.



NOTES

Task 5. Redefine the variable section sweep and link it to the graph.

1. Select the protrusion with the Model Tree, and click >Redefine > Section > Sketch.

2. Click Sketch > Relations > Add.

3. Observe your dimension number for the radius,(SD9 in this example).

Figure 32: Dimension Number sd9

4. Using your dimension number, type[SD9=EVALGRAPH(“RADIUS”,TRAJPAR*140)/5].(Notice the 140 and 5 are the X and Y graph scales respectively.)

5. Click > OK.

Figure 33: Changing Radius on Bottle

6. Notice the changing radius forms a cylindrical surface near the topand at the ‘squeezed’ mid portion.



NOTES

Task 6. Add a few finishing touches.

1. Set allow_anatomic_features option to Yes.

2. Click Insert > Advanced> Radius Dome.

3. Select the bottom surface, as shown in the following figure, thenselect the FRONT datum plane.

Figure 34: Selecting Bottom Surface

4. Type [-25.0] as radius of the dome and click .

5. Click and select the edge shown in the following figure.

Figure 35: Selecting Bottom Edge

6. Click > Round Edges, and drag the radius to a valuebetween 4.5 and 5.0.



NOTES

Figure 36: Rounding Edges

7. Click Insert > Shell and select the surface shown in the following

figure. Click > .

Figure 37: Selecting Surface for Shell Feature

8. Type [1.0] and click . Click OK to complete the feature.



NOTES

Figure 38: Completed Model




NOTES


related to this module’s goal. .

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Controlling Cuts withDatum Graph Features

Figure 39: The Finished Cam Drawing

Task 1. Create a revolved protrusion as the foundation for the cam anduse a datum graph to control the height of the variable section sweep cut.

Tips & Techniques:

It may be easier to scale the Y values when creating the graphfeature. Remember to factor out the scaling value when writingthe relation.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you have learned that:

• The swept blend and variable section sweep features allow the creationof designs that follow a specified path controlled parametrically.

• To create a swept blend feature, you blend several cross-sections alonga single trajectory.

• When the system regenerates a variable section sweep, it automaticallyevaluates an internal parameter called a trajpar.

• To create a helical sweep feature, you sweep a single section along ahelical path, which is defined by a profile and a pitch value.



Page 4-1

Module

Surface Creation and Style FeatureIn this module you learn to create solid geometry using surface

creation techniques and the Style feature. These features are part of

the Interactive Surface Design Extension (ISDX).

Objectives


• Use surfaces to improve model design.

• Create surfaces and manipulate surface displays.

• Utilize ISDX capabilities.

• Apply the Parallel Modeling paradigm.

• Use single-view and four-view window layouts.

• Create 2-D and 3-D freeform curves.

• Create freeform surfaces using boundary curves.



NOTES

USING SURFACES IN MODEL DESIGNSurfaces can be used in model design to:

• Define an entire model with surface features.

• Create geometry on an existing solid model.

• Reference and generate additional geometry.

• Reference parts in Assembly mode.

Advantages of Using SurfacesUsing surfaces to design your models enables you to:

• Create robust complex geometry.

• Increase regeneration speed.

• Represent the master model without affecting mass properties.

• Reduce the number of features.

• Reduce screen clutter by blanking layers.

Manipulating Surface Displays

Pro/ENGINEER distinguishes surfaces from the white and gray hiddenlines of solid geometry by displaying them in yellow, and their silhouetteedges in magenta.

DEFINING SURFACE OPTIONS

Working in Part ModeNormally, you create surface features using all of the same options thatyou would use for a solid feature—such as extrude, revolve, sweep, blend,swept blend, variable section sweep, and helical sweep.

In addition, you can use some unique surface functionality options in partmode. They are:

• Flat – Sketches the planar boundaries of a surface


Surface Creat ion and Sty le Fea tu re Page 4-3

NOTES

Figure 1: A Flat Surface

• By Boundaries – Uses selected curves in one or two directions todefine the outer boundaries of the surface

Figure 2: Surfaces by Boundaries

• Offset – Offsets a new surface feature from an existing surface by aspecified distance

Figure 3: Offset Surface



NOTES

Open Ends versus Capped EndsIf the cross-section of an extruded, revolved, swept, or blended surface is aclosed loop, you can use the Capped Ends option to automatically createflat surfaces that close off the ends of the feature.

The system automatically merges two flat surfaces with the other surfacesto form an enclosed volume. This is illustrated in the following figure.

Figure 4: Open vs. Capped Ends

Creating Merged SurfacesYou can combine one or more surface features into a single surface quilt.When you create a merged surface:

• It consumes the old surfaces and becomes a child.

• Any single-sided edge that becomes a two-sided edge changes fromyellow to magenta.

• If you delete the merge, the old surfaces return.

Use Join formating edges orwhere one edgelies on theother surface.

Join Intersect Resultant merge

Figure 5: Using Merge Join and Merge Intersect



NOTES

CREATING SOLID FEATURESIf a surface extends to or beyond the boundaries of a solid part or defines aclosed volume, you can use it to create new solid or thin features.

You can create different features such as protrusions, slots, or cuts withthe Use Quilt option.

Creating a cut

Creating a thin protrusion

Figure 6: Using Surfaces to Generate Solid Features

DEFINING ISDXThe Interactive Surface Design Extension (ISDX) offers a spline-basedfreeform modeler that enables you to create 2-D and 3-D curves andfreeform surfaces. You can use ISDX to create freeform surface models aspart of:

• Conceptual design

• Engineering design

• Reverse styling

ISDX allows you to create Style features. Within the Style feature, youcan create freeform curves and surfaces easily.



NOTES

Figure 7: A Style Feature with Several Curves and Surfaces

Using the Style FeatureA Style feature can contain several curves and surfaces or quilts. Itdisplays in the MODEL TREE as Style.

Style Feature Concepts

The following are the important concepts of the Style feature:

• 4-view Layout – Allows you to work around the model.



NOTES

Figure 8: Four-View Window Layout

• Soft Point Technology – Allows you to snap a curve on to otherentities with a soft point, which can be interactively located at adesired location.

• Switching Parent Child Relationships – Style offers a flexiblehierarchy of the curves and surfaces you create. You can alter theparent child relationships.

Parallel ModelingMost products are a combination of geometric forms and freeform shapes.The Style feature enables you to integrate the feature based parametricmodeling of Pro/ENGINEER with freeform unconstrained surfacing.

You can create a total product design in a single modeling environment.



NOTES

USING ISDXYou use ISDX to create curves and freeform surfaces, where geometry iseither not defined or requires great flexibility. Also, you use it when thedesign intent is dependent on visual or aesthetic criteria.

Specifically, you can use ISDX to create:

• 2-D or 3-D curves(referenced or unconstrained).

• Curves On Surface (COS).

• Styling design models.

• Blends and transition surfaces.

• Freeform surfaces along with parametric surfaces in engineeringdesign models.

• Reverse styling surfaces.

Creating 2-D and 3-D CurvesYou can use the Style feature as a 2-D (2-dimensional) or 3-D (3-dimensional) sketcher to create unconstrained or referenced curves. Thesecurves can be attached to features, such as points, curves, or edges. Theycan also be used to create other Pro/ENGINEER features.

Figure 9: Defining Curves in 3-D Space



NOTES

Figure 10: A Blend Surface based on a Freeform 3-D Curve

Figure 11: Surfaces Created from 3-D Curves

Creating Curves on SurfacesYou can create curves on surfaces (COS) by sketching them directly on tothe base surface, or by using the Drop tool. Style allows easy manipulationor modification of the COS in order to capture the design intent. You canuse COS to build further surfaces or to trim the surfaces.

Figure 12: Using COS for Trimming



NOTES

Creating Styling ModelsYou can use freeform, intuitive curves and surfaces to conceptualizeproducts. Integrating parametric surfaces with the freeform surfacesenables you to complete a product design on a single platform anddatabase.

You can also model using concept images that can be applied on to basesurfaces, as shown in the following figures.

(A) (B)

(C)

Figure 13: (A) Sketch (B) Sketch Applied on to the Base Surface (C) ModelDeveloped Using the Sketch

Creating Freeform SurfacesWhile designing products, you may need to impose dimensional controlson freeform surfaces. ISDX allows freeform curves and surfaces toreference with parametric curves or surfaces, enabling you to control thefreeform surfaces using dimensions.



NOTES

Figure 14: Dimensionally Controlling a Style Model

Creating Blends and TransitionsYou can use the Style feature to create quick and high quality splineblends to improve the aesthetics or smoothness of products. You cancreate tangent or curvature-continuous transition surfaces with interactivecontrol over the tangency.

Figure 15: Typical Transition Surfaces



NOTES

Figure 16: Interactive Manipulation of Tangency

Using Style Surfaces in Engineering ModelsYou can combine style surfaces with parametric surfaces while creatinghigh curvature or transition surfaces.

Figure 17: High Curvature Transition Surfaces

Reverse Styling

You can conveniently refer to imported scan curves and faceted or surfacedata to build Style curves and surfaces.

Figure 18: Reverse Styling



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory, you learn surface creation techniques using

Pro/SURFACE and ISDX.

Method

In Exercise 1, you merge surfaces into a quilt, and using them to createsolid geometry.

In Exercise 2, you explore the power of the variable section sweep featureby using trajpar and datum graph features to create geometry.

In Exercise 3, you create a simple surface by combining unconstrainedfreeform functionality with parametric modeling.

Tools

Table 1: Surfaces and Style Feature Icons

Icons DescriptionWireframe display

Create datum curve

Toggle datum plane

Set active datum plane

Create and edit curves

Display curvature plots

Delete all curvature points

Regenerate all

Create surfaces from boundary curves



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Cuts Using Surfaces

Task 1. Begin a new model and create the first feature.


2. Create a new part, SURF_CUT, using the default template.

3. Select the FRONT datum, then click Insert > Surface > Extrudeand sketch, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Sketching to Extrude a Surface

4. Exit Sketcher, orient to the default view, and drag the section to adepth of approximately [5.625].



NOTES

Figure 20: Creating Depth Dimension

5. Note that this method results in a surface that is one-sided and

open-ended. Click to verify this (magenta and yellow).

Task 2. Redefine the surface to use the options for Both Sides andCapped Ends.

1. Select the surface, and click > Redefine.

2. Click Attributes and specify Both Sides and Capped Ends. Then

click four times. Note that this has created a ‘hollow’ surface(magenta).

Figure 21: Redefining for Capped Ends



NOTES

Task 3. Create a solid from the existing surface.

1. Click Insert > Protrusion > Use Quilt, select the surface, and

click . Note that the model is now solid (white).

Task 4. Create the first of two surfaces that will define a later cut.

1. Click Insert > Surface > Revolve, and use the options for BothSides and Open Ends.

2. Select the RIGHT datum as the sketching plane, click Okay, andselect the TOP datum as the reference.

3. Create the sketch using a spline with a total of five points, asshown in the following figure. Note the use of dimensionedconstruction lines. Be sure to specify the horizontal centerline asthe axis of revolution.

Figure 22: Creating Sketch

4. Finish the sketch and revolve the surface by 180°.



NOTES

Figure 23: Sketch after Revolving Surface

3. Complete the feature.

Task 5. Create the second of two surfaces that will define a later cut.

1. Click Insert > Surface > Extrude. Use the options for One Sideand Open Ends.

2. Select the TOP datum as the sketching plane, click Okay >Bottom, and select the FRONT datum plane.

3. Sketch the ellipse shown in the following figure.Hint: Use two centerlines and four sketcher points.



NOTES

Figure 24: Creating a Sketch with Two Centerlines and Four Sketcher Points

4. Complete the sketch and use the base of the block as an Up toSurface depth.

Figure 25: Using Base of Block as “Up to Surface” Depth

Task 6. Create a surface merge and a cut.

1. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge, and select the twosurface features.



NOTES

2. Toggle through the various Quilt Side options to result in the meshshown in the following figure.

Figure 26: Required Quilt Side Option

3. Complete the merge feature, and click Insert > Cut > Use Quilt.

4. Select the surface and specify the removal side to result in the cutshown in the following figure.

Figure 27: Cut Feature

Task 7. Add finishing rounds to the model.

1. Click and <SHIFT> to select both edges, then round the edges,as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 28: Rounding Edges of Cut

2. [Optional] Delete the last three features from the Model Tree.Redefine the second surface depth as UP TO SURFACE , andQUERY SELECT the entire first surface. Then re-create the merge,cut, and rounds. What was different about the merge?




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Applying Variable Section Sweeps

Task 1. View the Go-cart. The task is to create a custom exhaust pipe.

1. The go-cart and the engine compartment detail are shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 29: Go-Cart and Engine Compartment Detail

2. Open the EXHAUST_PIPE.ASM.

Figure 30: Exhaust Pipe Assembly

3. Notice the following:

� The cyan blue surfaces are copied from the engine.

� The Green surface (swept blend) is a portion of the exhaust thatwas started for you.



NOTES

� The orange datum curve is the pre-defined trajectory, created toavoid the copied brown and white surfaces from the engineassembly that the exhaust cannot touch.

Task 2. A common technique for creating a second trajectory for avariable section sweep is to use a surface strip. Create a surface strip thatfollows the existing trajectory, and uses trajpar to change orientation. Theedge of this surface strip will form a second trajectory for the finalvariable section sweep.

1. Click the EXHAUST_PIPE.PRT in the Model Tree and click >Open.

Figure 31: Opening the Exhaust Pipe Part through Model Tree

4. Click Insert > Surface > Variable Section Sweep > Pivot Dir >Done.

2. Select the Top Datum from the Model Tree. Click Okay.

3. Click Select Trajectory > Curve Chain.

4. Select anywhere on the datum curve and click Select All > Done >Done > Done > Origin Start.



NOTES

Task 3. Sketch the following line.

Figure 32: Sketching Line

1. Click Sketch > Relations > Add.

2. Using your dimension number for the angle dimension(sd3 in this example), type the following two lines:/* equation to rotate line 90-0 during length of trajectorysd3 = 90 – trajpar *90Notice how the angle changes after regeneration.

3. Click > OK.

Figure 33: Angle Changes after Regeneration



NOTES

Task 4. Create and reorder a graph feature using a saved sketch that willbe used to control the width of the strip.

1. Click Insert > Datum > Graph, and type [Pipe_stretch].

2. Click Sketch > Data From File > pipe_stretch.sec > Open

Figure 34: Controlling Width of Strip with Graph Feature

3. Click .

4. Use the Model Tree to reorder the graph before the strip surface.

Task 5. Link the graph feature to the variable section sweep so that itcontrols the width of the strip surface.

1. Select the strip surface in the Model Tree and click >Redefine > Section > Define > Sketch.

2. Click Sketch > Relations. Note the dimension number for thelength dimension (ex: sd5) and click Edit Rel.

3. Using your dimension number for the length dimension,type the following lines under the previous entries:/*vary width of strip according to graph featuresd5= (d60/2) + evalgraph ("pipe_stretch", trajpar *100)/10

Note

The diameter dimension at the circular end of the green surfaceis known to be d60. The 100 and 10 values are the X and Ygraph scales respectively.



NOTES

4. Save and exit the Notepad.

5. Click > OK.

Figure 35: Length Dimension Variation

Task 6. Use the two edges of the strip surface as trajectories for the finalvariable section sweep. The sweep should have a circular cross-sectionadjacent to the existing green surface and be elliptical at the other end ofthe sweep.

1. Click Insert > Surface > Variable Section Sweep >NormToOriginTraj > Done.

2. Click Select Traj > Bndry Chain. Select the surface shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES


3. Using From-To, select the appropriate edge.

4. Click Done >No Join > Done.

5. Click Select Traj > Tangent Chain, and select the edge of thesurface strip shown in the following figure.

Figure 37: Creating Tangent Chain

6. Click Done > No Join > Done > Done > Open Ends > Done >Origin Start.



NOTES

Figure 38: Open Ends

5. Click Sketch > Data From File > pipe_ellipse.sec > Open.

Task 7. Drag the center of the imported sketch until it snaps to thecrosshairs, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 39: Imported Sketch Snaps to Crosshairs

1. Edit the scale to [1.0] and click .



NOTES

2. Click > , and Query Select the two sketcher points shownin the following figure.

Figure 40: Selecting Sketcher Points

3. Notice that the ellipse now conforms to a circle at the beginning ofthe trajectory.

4. Click > OK.

Figure 41: Ellipse Conforms to Circle

5. Select the surface strip and the origin curve from the Model Treeand click Hide.

7. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge and select the twosurfaces shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 42: Merging Surfaces

8. Click .

9. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt.

10. Select anywhere on the exhaust surface, verify the material arrowpoints to the outside, type [0.25] as the thickness and click .

Figure 43: Creating Thin Protrusion by Using Quilts

11. Open the EXHAUST_PIPE.ASM.

Figure 44: Opening Exhaust Pipe Assembly

12. Save the model and erase it from memory.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Style Surfaces

Task 1. Begin a new Style feature for the main flashlight body.

1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.


2. Click Insert > Style.

3. If necessary, click View > Show All to revert to a single paneview.

4. Click [Set active datum plane] in the side bar. Select theFRONT datum plane.

Figure 46: Setting Front as the Active Datum Plane



NOTES

Task 2. Create a curve and refine its shape.

1. Create a planar curve. Click [Create and edit curves] > New >Planar, then click the locations on the active plane, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 47: Plotting a Curve

2. Click > Front.

3. To display curvature plot, click [Display curvature plots].

4. In the CURVE dialog box, click Edit.

5. Drag the curve points to form the shape of the curve, as shown inthe following figure. Check that the curve is located above thebatteries.

Figure 48: Editing and Adjusting the Curve



NOTES

6. Click OK to finish creating the curve.

Task 3. Create another curve on the lower side.

1. Click > New > Planar and click the locations on the FRONTplane as shown in the following figure.

Figure 49: Creating the Bottom Curve

2. Refine the shape of the curve using the same techniques as theprevious curve so it appears approximately as shown in thepreceding figure.

3. Click OK.

Task 4. Create the first cross-sectional curve and refine its shape.

1. Click > DEFAULT. Then click [Clear all curvature points]

and turn off .

2. Click > New > Free. Hold <ALT> and click the top-curve,then click on the lower curve, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 50: Plotting the Back of the Flashlight

3. Click Add, then click on the two locations to add points, as shownin the following figure.

Figure 51: Adding Points

4. Click Edit. Press and hold <SHIFT> and then drag the points, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 52: Creating a Curve by Manipulating Points



NOTES

Task 5. Make the curve normal to the FRONT plane.

1. Select the upper endpoint of the newest curve. Click Tangent,change its type to NORMAL, and select the FRONT plane.

Figure 53: Creating a Tangent to the Front Plane

2. Repeat the above step for the lower end of the same curve.

Task 6. Refine the shape of the curve.

1. Click > RIGHT.

2. Click and modify the shape by manipulating point locationsand tangent lengths.

Figure 54: Modifying Shape by Manipulating Points



NOTES

3. Click OK.

Task 7. Create another cross sectional curve as a planar curve.

1. Click > Default. Then click and select the RIGHT plane.

2. Click > New > Planar. Click Planar to open the drop-downmenu. Type [-75.0] in the OFFSET text box.

3. Click Styling > Snap to turn snap on.

4. Click the top curve, click the next two points on the active plane,then click the bottom curve, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 55: Creating the Face of the Flashlight

5. Click Styling > Snap to turn snap off.

Task 8. Constrain the endpoint tangents.

1. Click Edit. Click an endpoint and on the TANGENT bar,select Normal from the shortcut menu, and select the FRONTplane.

2. Click > Right.

3. Modify the shape of the curve, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 56: Modifying Shape by Manipulating Points

4. In the CURVE dialog box, click OK.

5. Regenerate the model. Click [Regenerate all], if necessary.

Task 9. Create a surface from the Style curves.

1. Click [Create surfaces from boundary curves] and select thefour style curves, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 57: Selecting Boundary Curves



NOTES

2. Click OK.

3. Click to shade the model.

Figure 58: Created Surface

Task 10. Redefine the location of the offset plane.

1. Select the planar, cross-section curve, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 59: Selecting the Planar Cross-Section Curve

2. Click > Definition.

3. Click Planar to expand the box, type [ – 90], press <ENTER> andclick OK.

4. Click to regenerate the Style feature.



NOTES

Figure 60: Regenerated Style Feature

5. Exit Style.




NOTES



OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Flashlight

Task 1. Redefine the style feature to continue creating handle curvesand surfaces.

1. Open FLASHLIGHT.PRT.

2. Redefine the STYLE feature.

3. Click and select the FRONT datum, then click > Front.

4. Click > New > Planar and create the two curves, as shown inthe following figure. Check that the Planar, Offset is zero.

Figure 61: Creating Two more Curves

5. Click > New > Free and create the first cross section curve, asshown in the following figure. Press <ALT> to snap to the existingcurves.



NOTES

Figure 62: Creating a Free Curve

6. Click Add and select a location for a midpoint, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 63: Selecting a Midpoint Location

7. Click Edit, then press <SHIFT> and drag the point perpendicularfrom the FRONT plane.

8. Place the endpoint tangents normal to the FRONT datum plane andshape the curve, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 64: Shaping Curve

9. Using the same techniques, create another new curve and shape, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 65: Creating and Shaping a Second Curve

10. Click OK to close the CURVE dialog box.

11. Click . Select the four curves that form the handle, and clickOK.

12. Shade the model.

13. Click to exit Style.



NOTES

Figure 66: Creating Surface from Four Style Curves

14. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge.

15. Select the handle surface, then select the body surface.

16. Toggle the mesh for the Quilt Sides, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 67: Quilting Sides

17. Click .

18. Click Feature > Mirror Geom.

19. Select the FRONT plane.



NOTES

Figure 68: Mirroring Geometry

20. Click Insert > Surface Operation > Merge, select the left andright halves of the flashlight body, and click .

21. Select the edges shown in the following figure. Click >Round Edges.

Figure 69: Rounding Rough Edges

22. Dynamically modify the radius to a value of [5].

23. Repeat for the other side of the handle.



NOTES

Figure 70: Rounded Edges

24. Click Insert > Thin Protrusion > Use Quilt. Select the surfacequilt.

25. Flip the MATERIAL SIDE arrow to add material to the inside of thesurface.

26. Type [2.0] as the thickness value and click . (You may wish toadd the Style curves to a layer and blank the layer)

Figure 71: Finished Model




NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you have learned that:

• Surfaces can be used to create model designs.

• Surfaces can be merged to form quilts. The quilts can form solidgeometry using the Use Quilt and Patch options.

• ISDX integrates freeform surfacing and parametric modeling toenhance existing surfacing capabilities of Pro/ENGINEER, enablingyou to create product forms that require flexible surfaces.

• Style allows you to create geometry using a single-view layout or4-view layout.

• A curve can be created as a free 3-D curve or as a planar curve.

• To create a Style surface you need four touching boundary curves.

• To change the shape of a surface, you need to manipulate the shape ofthe boundary curves.



Page 5-1

Module

Family Tables and Inheritance FeaturesIn this module you learn how to use Family Tables and Inheritance

features to efficiently reuse data. You also learn how to use these

features to create quickly create variations of existing designs.

Objectives


• Create and modify part family tables.

• Create and modify assembly family tables.

• Manage family tables.

• Describe how to use inheritance features.



NOTES

USING FAMILY TABLESFamily tables are collections of parts (or assemblies or features) that sharesimilar features. Parts in family tables usually have one or moredimensional variations.

For example, bolts come in various sizes but they all look alike andperform the same function. Thus, it is useful to think of them as a “family”of parts. In the following figure, the bolt on the left is the “generic” modeland the rest are “instances” of the generic. The generic model is the mainobject in the family table. Every family table has one and only onegeneric. Every family table has one or more instances. You can makeeither part family tables or assembly family tables. A family table wouldnever consist of both parts and assemblies.

Generic

Instances

Figure 1: Family of Bolts

You can use family tables to:

• Create and store large numbers of objects simply and compactly.

• Save time and effort by standardizing part generation.

• Generate variations of a part without having to re-create and generateeach one separately.

• Create slight variations in parts without having to use relations.

• Create part lists that can be printed and included in catalogs or othermaterials.


Fami ly Tab les and Inher i tance Page 5-3

NOTES

Family Table StructureFamily tables are displayed as spreadsheets, consisting of columns androws. Rows display instances (of parts) and their corresponding featurevalues. Columns display feature names.

Figure 2: Family Table for Bolt

Family Tables consist of three components:

1. The generic object on which all family members are based.

2. Dimensions and parameters, feature numbers, user-defined featurenames, and specified assembly member names.

3. The names of all family members (instances) created by the tableand the corresponding values for each of the table-driven items.

Advantages of Using Generics and Instances

There are several advantages to using family tables. For example, you canincrease productivity by:

• Storing multiple similar models within the same file.

• Saving different positions of a moveable assembly.



NOTES

• Saving different steps to the manufacturing of a model.

• Permanently saving model variations that you created usingPro/PROGRAM.

CREATING FAMILY TABLESTo create a part family table, you must first model the generic part anddetermine the variants before you can create the table and generateinstances.

Creating the Generic ModelThe first step in creating a family table is to model the generic part with allits possible features. The following figure illustrates the generic bolt.

Figure 3: Generic Bolt

After modeling the generic part, you should determine which dimensions,parameters, and features will change from one instance to the next.



NOTES

Creating the TableNext, you can add the item columns to be varied (dimensions, parameters,features) to the family table clicking Family Tab in the menu manager.

Figure 4: New Family Table Dialog Box

Select the appropriate icons to add items to the family table.

Guidelines for Using Family Tables

• The system lists columns in the order in which you add the items;therefore, add items in a logical order, grouping similar items.

• If you change dimension symbols using Modify > DimCosmetics,these symbols appear in the heading for that column.

• If you name features using Setup > Names, the names appear in theheading for the column.

Creating Instances

After you add items to the table, you can add instance rows to the FamilyTable. You can use any of these methods to accomplish this:

• Manually fill out the table by typing in values for the instances.

• Use Edit > Copy with Increments to create several instances bypatterning.



NOTES

• Read in a previously saved table.

• Use a spreadsheet, such as Microsoft Excel, to generate the instances.

Figure 5: Family Table for Bolt

Confirming Instance Validity

As a final step, you should use [Verify icon] to verify that allinstances are valid and can be regenerated prior to saving changes to thepart/assembly. Pro/ENGINEER regenerates each instance in sequence,and indicates if each instance regenerates successfully.

Note:

Never save a model within a PDM environment withoutregenerating or verifying the instances. Review the FAMILYTREE dialog box to be certain that all the information iscorrect prior to saving. If a family table is submitted to eitherPro/PDM or INTRALINK with typographical errors in thenaming of the instances it will typically require anadministrator to resolve the problem. Never rename aninstance in PRO-TABLE if that part has been submitted.



NOTES

Figure 6: Family Tree

Clicking [Preview icon] in the dialog box will preview the selectedinstance.

Creating Assembly Family Tables

To create a family table for an assembly, you must model the genericassembly with all of the components needed for all of the instances, andthen add the items that will vary from one instance to the next.

You can add the following items to an assembly family table:

• Assembly-level dimensions such as mate offsets and align offsets

• Assembly-level features

• Assembly parameters

• Components

Retrieving Instances

You can retrieve the various instances using these three methods:

• Use Family Tab after first highlighting the instance and opening it.

• Retrieve the generic model to obtain a menu listing of the family table.

• Retrieve the instance directly if an instance index file exists.



NOTES

MODIFYING FAMILY TABLESOnce you have set up the family table, you can modify either the genericmodel or the instances. Each type of change affects the family tabledifferently:

• Modifying a table-driven dimension – If the dimension is listed inthe table, it is a variable dimension. Changing this dimension updatesthe table.

Figure 7: Modifying Variable Dimension

• Modifying a non table-driven dimension – Dimensions that are notlisted in the table are invariable dimensions. Any change causes allinstances to update, regardless of the location of the change.



NOTES

Hole dimensionchanged in allinstances

Figure 8: Modifying Invariable Dimension

• Adding a feature to the generic – Adding a feature to the genericcauses it to appear in all of the instances.

Round addedto generic isautomaticallyadded toinstance

Figure 9: Feature Added to Generic

• Adding a feature to an instance – The system adds a column for thefeature to the family table and enters a Y for that instance, an N for thegeneric, and an * (same as generic) for all other instances.



NOTES

Added column

Hole added toan instance

Figure 10: Adding Feature to Instance

• Deleting a feature from the generic – The system removes thefeature from all instances. If it has a column in the family table, itremoves that column as well.

Chamfer deletedfrom genericautomaticallydeletes it frominstances

Figure 11: Deleting Feature from Generic



NOTES

• Deleting a feature from the instance – The system places an N inthe column for that feature. If a column does not exist, it creates oneand enters an N for that instance, a Y for the generic, and an * for allother instances.

Figure 12: Deleting Feature from Instance

• Renaming Instances with a PDM systems – The procedure forrenaming an instance is dependant upon whether the model has beenverified, saved and submitted:

� Pro/E model not verified, not saved and not submitted:Rename the instances within Pro/TABLE. Pro/PDM and Pro/Intralinkare not aware of the existence of the instances yet.

� Pro/E model is verified or is saved, not submitted: Renamethe instances using Pro/E rename functionality. Do not edit tableinstance names directly.

� Pro/E model is verified or is saved and is submitted: Onlyrename within Pro/PDM or Pro/Intralink.



NOTES

DEFINING FAMILY TABLE OPTIONSPro/ENGINEER offers several useful tools for effectively managingfamily tables. Using File > Instance Operations, you can examine eachinstance file of a generic that is currently in session and delete any that arenot current with the generic. In addition, you can also use instance indexfiles and accelerator files to increase the efficiency of family tables.

Using Instance Index Files

An instance index file contains a list of all instances that exist for allfamily tables within a directory. It is specific to a directory and has thename “directory_name.idx.” If an instance index file exists, the systemlists all instances when you retrieve a model. To decrease regenerationtime when retrieving instances, you can create accelerator files.

Using Accelerator Files

Accelerator files decrease the amount of time that the system requires todirectly retrieve an instance. However, they require more hard drive spacesince they are roughly the same size as the part file. The system gives partaccelerator files the .xpr extension and appends .xas to assemblyaccelerator files.

Using the configuration file option “save_instance_accelerator,” you cancontrol when the system creates these accelerator files.

DEFINING INHERITANCE FEATURESInheritance features allow a one-way associative merge of geometry andfeature data from one part to another. You can select dimensions andfeatures in the base model for value changes both at the time of theInheritance feature creation and later.

Inheritance features are always created by referencing existing parts. Aninheritance feature begins with all of its geometry and data identical to thepart from which it is derived. Then you can identify the geometry andfeature data that can change on the inherited feature without changing theoriginal part.



NOTES

Using Inheritance Features• An inheritance feature is used similarly to a merge feature. More than

one inheritance feature can be used in one part.

• It also can be used for creating design variations without the use of afamily table.

Capabilities• Access to parameters of inherited models, its features, and their usage

provided the prefix "IID_" is used.

• Access to dimensions in drawing mode as well as part and assemblymode. Dimensions can be shown in a drawing of the derived object,which is a limitation if you use a merged part in a drawing.

• Multilevel nesting of inheritance features

• Support of RefPattern

• Special Resolve Mode for inheritance failure cases

• Non-geometry elements are copied in addition to 3D Notes(GeomTols, Surface Finish, and so forth)

• Parent-child relationship

Creating Inheritance FeaturesThere are a few important steps in the creation of an inheritance feature.

1. You first open the Inheritance dialog box and the LOCATE MDLmenu.

2. With the LOCATE MDL menu open the base model. Initially, alldata from the base model are present in the inheritance feature. Themodel opens in a separate window. The LOCATION menu opens.

3. Define the placement of the inheritance feature as Default orExternal coordinate system.



NOTES

4. Open the VARIED DIMENSIONS dialog box and select base modeldimensions. You may then change the values.

Figure 13: Varied Dimensions Dialog Box

5. Use the Var Feats element definition to open the VARIEDFEATURES dialog box.

Figure 14: Varied Features Dialog Box

6. Select what you would like to define as variable. Either yousuppress them before creating the inheritance feature or you decidenot to do this and will be allowed to do this later.



NOTES

7. You can make the Inheritance feature dependent or independent ofthe base model. In the first case you create a dependency betweenthe derived object and the base model. Changes made in the basemodel will be reflected in the derived object. An independentinheritance feature will not update when the base model ismodified.

8. Use Copy Notes to define whether 3D notes will be copied to theinheritance feature. 3D notes can be copied to the derived object,but they will not be modifiable or erasable in the derived object.



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory, you create and manipulate part and assembly family

tables. You also learn how to create an inheritance feature and to

compare this with the use of merge parts and family tables.

Method

In Exercises 1 you open the generic instance and define the family tablebased on the generic. You also modify the family table.

In Exercises 2 and 3, you create an inheritance feature with and withoutvaried dimensions and features. You add a varied dimension later. Youalso learn how to create a totally new model and add a group of features toan existing geometry using inheritance features.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Family Tables and Inheritance Features

Icons DescriptionVerify

Preview

Add item

Add row



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Part Family Tables

Task 1. Retrieve the generic tire part and review the family table.


2. Open TIRE.PRT. Notice that there are three instances of thegeneric that exist: 12_INCH, 13_INCH, and 14_INCH rim diameters.

3. Click The generic > Open.

Figure 15

Task 2. Create a family table for the 12_INCH instance of the Tirefamily table, thus “nesting” an instance.

1. In the PART menu, click Family Tab.

Figure 16: Family Table



NOTES

2. Select the 12_INCH instance name and click . Notice theinstance designation on the screen.

Figure 17

3. Click Family Tab and click to add a column to the familytable.

4. Select the revolved protrusion from the model tree to view itsdimensions.

Figure 18

5. Select the 6.00 dimension. Notice it is added to the Item list asTIRE_WIDTH.

6. Click Info > Switch Dimensions to view the symbolic names ofthe other dimensions.



NOTES

7. In the FAMILY ITEMS dialog box, click Parameter. Select theSIDEWALL_HEIGHT parameter and click Done Sel >Done/Return > OK.

8. Click to add a row to the family table.

9. Select the New Instance cell, and type [12X4X1] as the name.

10. Type the values for TIRE_WIDTH and SIDEWALL_HEIGHT asshown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Adding the First Instance

Task 3. Create the remaining instances by copying the new instance.

1. Select the 12X4X1 cell. Click Edit > Copy with Increments.

2. Select SIDEWALL_HEIGHT from the items list and click .

3. Type [1.0] as the increment.

4. Select 1 from the Quantity column, and type [3]. This will be thequantity for the pattern in the first direction.

5. Click , select TIRE_WIDTH and click .

6. Type [2] as the increment.

7. Select the Quantity for Direction2 (currently 1) and type [3].

8. The dialog box should appear as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 20

9. Click OK to create the patterned instances.

Figure 21

Note:

Every time you use Copy with Increments, the system createsa duplicate of the original instance with a slightly differentname. (In this case the 12x4x10 instance is the duplicate)

10. Right-click the 12x4x10 cell and select Delete Rows > Yes.

Task 4. Edit the names of the tire instances.

1. Edit the table to modify only the instance names as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 22: 12_INCH Family Table


You can also edit a Family Table with Microsoft Excel byclicking File > Edit with Excel. This is useful for largertables needing more involved editing.

Task 5. Verify the Family Table to ensure that Pro/ENGINEER canregenerate all instances.

1. Click > Verify. The system regenerates all instances, placingan arrow next to the instance being regenerated. The results shouldappear as shown in the following figure.

Figure 23



NOTES

Note:

Verify also generates a text file called <modelname>.tst.

The Verify option only confirms if the model regeneratessuccessfully, it does not verify that the model satisfies thedesign criteria of the model.

2. close the Verify window.

Task 6. Save the Pro/TABLE file (.ptd) so you can import it to anotherinstance.

1. Click File > Export Table > PRO/TABLE file.

2. Edit the name to [12_INCH_EXPORT] and click Save.

Task 7. Preview other instances

1. Select the 12X4X3 instance and click .

2. Close the Preview window and preview a few other instances.

3. Close any Preview windows, and click Ok from the Family Tabledialog.

4. Click Window > Close to close the 12_INCH instance.

Task 8. Edit the family table data for importing.

1. Click Window > Open System Window.

2. The following step assumes a Windows operating system. If youare on a UNIX station, use an appropriate editor.

3. Type [Notepad 12_inch_export.ptd] and press <ENTER>.

4. Click Search > Replace. Type [12] and [13] into the fields andclick Replace All. Close the Replace window.

5. From Notepad, click File > Save As, type[13_INCH_IMPORT.PTD], and click Save.

6. From the Notepad window, click File > Exit.



NOTES

7. Type [Exit] in the DOS window to return to Pro/E.

Task 9. Create the instances for the 13_INCH tire.

1. Click Window > Activate to activate the generic TIRE instance.

2. Click Family Tab, select the 13_INCH instance, and click

3. Click , and select the revolved protrusion from the model treeto display dimensions.

4. Select the TIRE_WIDTH dimension.

5. Click Parameter, and select SIDEWALL_HEIGHT. Click Done Sel> Done/Return > OK.

6. Click File > Import Table. Select 13_INCH_IMPORT.PTD andClick File Open.

Figure 24: 13_Inch Instances

7. Click > Verify. All instances should be successful.

8. Click Close > OK.

9. Save the generic model and close any open windows.

Note:

The 14_INCH tire instances have already been created for you.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Using Inheritance Features

Task 1. Retrieve the ABSORBER_BAR.PRT and determine where itscoordinate system was created.

1. Open IF_ABSORBER_BAR.PRT.

Figure 25

2. Zoom as shown in the following figure, and notice where thecoordinate system is located.

Figure 26

Task 2. Create an inheritance feature.

1. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open.

2. Select IF_ABSORBER_FASTENER.PRT > Open.



NOTES

3. Note the location of the Csys in the subwindow model.

4. Click Default > OK.

Figure 27: Added Group of Inheritance Feature

Task 3. Modify the value of the hole dimension.

1. Expand the Model Tree to view the entry for the Inheritancefeature. Notice it indicates which model was used as the source forthe inheritance, and also listed the inherited features.

Figure 28



NOTES

2. Right-click Hole id 68 and select Modify.

3. Select the 0.38 dimension. Confirm adding this dimension to theInherited Var Dim Table by clicking Yes.

5. Type [0.2] and click Regenerate.

6. Right-click the Inheritance feature from the MODEL TREE andselect Redefine > Var Dims > Define. Notice the modifieddimension was added to the table.

Figure 29

7. Click Cancel > Cancel > Yes.

Task 4. Modify a feature in the Base model.

1. Right-click the Inheritance feature from the MODEL TREE andselect Open Base.

2. Click Regenerate from the IF_ABSORBER_FASTENERwindow. Notice the model is unaffected by the diameter change.

3. Modify Round id 70 from [0.1] to [0.25] and click Regenerate.

4. Close the window and activate the IF_ABSORBER_BAR window.

5. Click Regenerate. Notice the round has updated.

6. Save the model, close the window, and click Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Inheritance Feature in New Models

Task 1. Create a new part named HEX_BOLT and an InheritanceFeature. You will see a warning by using two different unit systems.

1. Create a new part called [HEX_BOLT] using the default template.

2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open.

3. Select IF_BOLT.PRT and click Open > Default.

4. Click Var Dims > Define. Select the protrusion shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 30

5. Select the 3.00 and 0.95 dimensions. Modify the New Value of d1to [5.0] as shown in the following figure.

Figure 31: Varied Dimensions Dialog Box



NOTES

6. Click OK.

7. Click Var Feats > Define and select the Hole.

8. Select the Hole entry and click Suppress. Refer to the followingfigure.

Figure 32: Varied Features Dialog Box

9. Click Ok > Ok.

Figure 33

10. Save the model, close the window, and click Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES



OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating AssemblyFamily Tables

Figure 34: Variations on Wheel Assembly

Task 1. Add the components of the wheel assembly to the family tableand regenerate the rim.

1. Open WHEEL.ASM.

Figure 35

2. Notice that the Assembly was created with an ‘extra’ interferingcomponent in the center. Some versions of the assembly will usethis component.



NOTES

3. The differences in the styles of rims are based upon family tableinstances of the rim component itself. Right-click RIM.PRT andselect Open from the popup menu. Select The generic and clickOpen.

4. Click Family Tab and use to preview and examine a fewinstances.

5. Click Cancel and Window > Close.

6. If necessary, Activate the WHEEL.ASM window.

7. Click Family Tab > > Component.

8. Select the RIM, TIRE, and SPINDLE_BUSHING from the ModelTree. Click Done Sel > OK.

Task 2. Create a family table of the assembly by manually editing.

1. Click four times.

2. Edit the instance names as shown in the following figure.

Figure 36: Wheel Family Table

Task 3. Add the rim instance names using the assembly instance names.Highlight the four instance names, as shown in the following figure.

1. Enter instance names into the RIM column so that the RIMinstances are used in the assembly Family Table. Refer to thefollowing figure. Hint: Highlight the desired portion of theneighboring cell and use Copy and Paste.



NOTES

Figure 37: Adding the Rim Instances

2. Type names for the TIRE instances as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 38: Adding the Tire Instance Names

Task 4. Instances with the “SP” designation require a spindle bushing,while those designated with the “4N” designation do not. Use the FamilyTable to remove the spindle from the assembly when lug nuts will be used.

1. Use the Yes/No option in the Spindle Bushing column as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 39: Adding the Spindle Bushing

2. Click > Verify. All instances should be successful.



NOTES

3. Click Close > OK.

4. Save the assembly and close the window.

Task 5. Replace the wheel on a higher level assembly with one of theinstances.

1. Open FT_FRT_SUSP.ASM.

Figure 40

Task 6. Use family tables to replace a Wheel assembly.

1. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace. Use Query Sel toselect the first WHEEL assembly listed in the model tree.

2. Click By Family Table Member > Browse.



NOTES

3. Select the W_12x6-BR-SP instance that you created. Click OK >Apply > Done. Notice the Hub in the center of the Rim, instead ofthe four lugnut holes.

Figure 41: First Wheel Assembly: Replaced with W_12x6-BR-SP

4. Repeat the process to replace the other wheel assembly with aninstance of your choice.

Figure 42: Second Wheel Assembly: Replaced with W_12x6-AR-4N

5. Save the model, close the window, and click File > Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you learned that:

• You can rapidly create parts and assemblies using a Family Table.

• Family Tables are invaluable when parts are similar in nature and needto be controlled with one file.

• Family Tables reduce the number of files that exist on your systemthus making possible the optimal use of system memory.

• The instances of a Family Table are associative.

• Family Tables are useful in replacing components and exploringdesign alternatives.

• You can create inheritance features and parts with the capability toinclude varied dimensions and features.

• Inheritance features can be used in many cases to avoid the use of afamily table and also for copying from a different model.


Page 6-1

Module

Advanced Part Tools and PatternsIn this module you learn how to create geometry in models at the

assembly level utilizing the top-down design functionality in

Pro/ENGINEER.

Objectives

After completing this module, you will be able to

• Create part intersections and bulk items.

• Mirror geometry.

• Create independent features in components and assembly levelfeatures.

• Use relations to control geometry.

• Create assembly-level features.

• Use style surfaces to define solid geometry.

• Create derivative assembly parts from a single part model.

• Create dimension and reference patterns.

• Manipulate existing patterns.

• Maintain patterns from one component to another.


Page 6-2 Fundamenta l o f Design

NOTES

ADVANCED COMPONENT OPERATIONS

Creating Part IntersectionsUsing the intersection between two components, you can define a newcomponent.

The Intersect option in the MODIFY PART menu, enables you to trim anexisting part to the volume defined by the intersection with another part.When you trim a part, the part becomes dependent on the assembly for theintersect feature.

Figure 1: Intersection Part from Two Tubes

Merging and Cutting Out PartsYou can merge the existing material of one part into another part bycopying the geometry into the model or by always maintaining areference. If you copy the geometry, the model is independent of thereference part.

Using the cutout technique, you can also remove material from onecomponent, based on the intersecting material of another component. Youcan either copy or reference the geometry, creating dependence orindependence. The following figure illustrates the merge and cutouttechniques.


Advanced Part Too ls and Pat te rns Page 6-3

NOTES

Base component Second component Assembly

Resulting merge Resulting cutout

Figure 2: Using Merge and Cutout

Creating Mirrored PartsWhen creating a component at the assembly level, you can use Part >Mirror to mirror a new component from an original component. You canmirror a part using either the Reference option or the Copy option.



NOTES

Mirrored component

Temporary assemblyOriginal part

Figure 3: Mirrored Parts

Creating Assembly-Level FeaturesIn the manufacturing process, some features are not added to the assemblyuntil the parts are actually assembled. Using Assembly features, you can:

• Model holes, cuts, and slots machined at the time of componentassembly by making them visible only at the assembly level.

• Create datum and surface features to reference when assemblingcomponents and creating part features.

• Define machining operations in assembled weldments.

• Create matching holes/cuts in multiple parts by making the featuresvisible at the part level as well.

• Create cutaways in the assembly to look behind certain components.



NOTES

Using Assembly Features to Define Part Features

You can create independent part features at the part level instead of theassembly level.

Visibility Level

By default, Pro/ENGINEER displays a subtractive assembly solid feature(such as a hole, or cut) in the assembly only, but not in the part or anysubassembly. By specifying the appropriate visibility level, you can viewassembly-level features in the parts themselves or in the subassemblies.

Specifying Models to Intersect

If you use the Add Model and Auto Sel options, the feature cuts materialfrom all the parts in the specified path, from the sketching plane out to thespecified depth.

If you select Add Model and Manual Sel, you can specify the parts in thepath that the feature should cut.

To redefine the visibility level of an assembly feature or change themodels that it intersects, you can use the Redefine option and select theINTSCT PARTS element from the dialog box.

Auto Selection Manual Selection of Bottom and TopComponents

Figure 4: Intersection of Assembly Cut



NOTES

Note:

Assembly-level features automatically create family tableinstances in the components that you select for intersection.

USING PATTERNINGUsing patterning, you create multiple instances of the lead feature. Youmanipulate the instances as a single feature. To control the size andposition of pattern instances, you use dimensions or reference an existingpattern.

Patterning enables you to:

• Increase your productivity by quickly and easily reproducing a featuremultiple times.

• Perform operations on the entire pattern, rather than individualfeatures.

• Control a pattern parametrically by changing pattern parameters.

• Increase your efficiency by modifying a pattern rather than changingmany individual features.

Pattern Types

In Pro/ENGINEER, you can create two types of patterns to define thelocation of instances:

• Dimension Patterns – Uses dimensions to control the position of theinstances.

• Reference Patterns – References an existing pattern.



NOTES

Creating Dimension PatternsThe default method for creating a dimension pattern is to increment thedriving dimensions of the lead feature.

Number ofinstances

IncrementDimensions

Lead feature

Figure 5: Incremental-Driven Pattern

Creating Pattern TablesWith a pattern table, you control the location of the instances by creatingan absolute dimension to the same reference as the leader. You enter eachdimension in tabular format and edit each dimension independently.

Using this technique, you can create complex configurations, such asunequal spacing or irregular sizes, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 6: Pattern Table Examples

You use a table-driven pattern when a pattern is too complex or irregularto control using incremental dimensions, for example:



NOTES

• Different variations of the model require multiple patternconfigurations.

• The design intent requires you to locate each instance from the samereferences, rather than incrementally from the previous instance.

• Multiple models must share the same pattern.

Table 1: Pattern Table

Table Name: HOLES_1

idx d5 (1.00) d6 (2.00)

1 5.00 2.00

2 5.00 4.00

3 1.00 6.00

4 1.00 8.00

5 5.00 8.00

Redefining Pattern Tables

To create a pattern table, you use an existing pattern to defineincrementally.

To redefine an instance, you use the To Table option to convert theexisting incremental pattern.

To create the pattern shown in the following figure, you convert theincremental pattern to a table, and then delete two instances.

Figure 7: Converting an Incremental Pattern to a Pattern Table

Note:

Once you have converted a pattern to a table, you cannotconvert it back to its original form.



NOTES

Editing Pattern Tables

When modifying a pattern table, it is important to be able to distinguishbetween variable and invariable dimensions.

• Variable dimensions are listed in the pattern table and can vary fromone instance to another.

• All other dimensions for the patterned feature are invariable, so allinstances must share the same value.

• Any change that you make to a variable dimension affects only theinstance that you modify, and the table updates.

• When you change an invariable dimension, it affects all instances.

Table 2: Pattern Table

Table Name: HOLES_2.

!idx d5 (1.00) d6 (2.00)

1 4.00 2.00

2 1.00 5.00

3 4.00 5.00

4 1.00 8.00

5 3.00 6.00

6 5.00 8.00

Modifying radiusaffects allinstances.

Figure 8: Modifying Table-Driven Dimensions


Page 6-10 Fundamenta l of Design

NOTES

Modifying radiusaffects allinstances.

Figure 9: Modifying Dimensions That Are Not Table-Driven

Editing Features in Patterns

Using Modify > Pattern Table, you can select a feature in the pattern andmake the following modifications:

• Add a new pattern table to a feature, delete an existing table pattern,and modify instances.

• Add a new pattern table to the feature.

• Delete an existing pattern table.

• Assign a new name to an existing pattern table.

• Change which pattern table to use for the feature upon regeneration.

• Save a pattern table to the hard drive using the namePATT_TABLE_NAME.PTB.

• Read in a pattern table from the hard drive.

Creating Design Variations in Patterns

By adding multiple pattern tables to a single feature, you can createdifferent variations within the design, enabling change from one to theother using the Switch functionality.

Figure 10: Using a Pattern Table for Design Variations



NOTES

Using Patterns on Multiple Models

You can save a pattern table in a file, and then use it to drive anotherpattern by reading the file into another model. This technique ensures thatpattern tables have the same configuration on different models, and savestime.

Figure 11: Using a Pattern Table to Maintain a Relation Between Two Parts

Creating Patterns in Assembly ModeYou can pattern components in Assembly mode the same way that youpattern features in Part mode, using both dimension and reference patterns.In the following figure, the first bolt references the lead hole.

Figure 12: Patterning Components in an Assembly

• You can use a reference pattern to assemble a component to eachinstance of another patterned component in the assembly. You can alsoreference a patterned feature, such as a hole in a part.

• For a dimension pattern, you can use a constraint, such as Mate



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you create patterns, part, and features within the

context of the assembly.

Method

In Exercise 1, you create the left knuckle part for the go-cart by mirroringin a temporary assembly. The left knuckle is a mirror image of the rightknuckle that already exists.

In Exercise 2, you create the steering wheel and airbag cover parts fromthe steering wheel master model.

In Exercise 3, you create a simple identical pattern of a hole incrementallyon a brake disk. Then you convert the pattern into a table to gain morecontrol over the location of the holes.

In Exercise 4, you assemble the lug nuts to the wheels by creating a radialpattern. After assembling the first nut, you assemble the remaining nuts byfollowing the existing pattern.

Tools

Icons DescriptionShow

View Repaint

Apply and close

Save

Select All

Insert Datum Plane



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Mirroring the Knuckle Part

Task 1. Create an empty assembly and assemble the right knuckle as thefirst component. Create a datum plane in the part about which to mirrorthe part.


2. To create a new assembly, click File > New. In the NEW dialogbox, click Assembly. Clear the Use Default Template check box.Type [mirror_knuckle] and click OK. In the NEW FILEOPTIONS dialog box, select Empty and click OK.

Note:

Do not create default datums in this assembly since you onlywant to reference the two components to each other.

3. To assemble the first component, click Component > Assemble.Select RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT and click Open > Done/Return.Notice that the system places the component in its defaultorientation.

Figure 13: RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT

4. Click Modify > Mod Part. Select the part.

5. Click View > Layers. Select the DATUMS layer.

6. Click > > Close.



NOTES

7. Click [Insert Datum Plane] > Offset. Select the SIDE datumplane.

8. Click Enter Value. Type [–5] and click .

9. Click Done until you reach the ASSEMBLY menu.

Figure 14: New Datum Plane for Mirroring

Task 2. Create the new left-knuckle part.

1. Click Component > Create.

2. In the COMPONENT CREATE dialog box, click Part and Mirror.Type name [left_knuckle]. Click OK.

3. In the MIRROR PART dialog box, click Copy. SelectRIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT.

4. Select DTM5 on the RIGHT_KNUCKLE.PRT. Click OK.

Note:

You do not use an assembly-level datum because this wouldcreate a dependency to the assembly. Since you used a partdatum from the original part, you can now delete the assemblyfile.



NOTES

Figure 15: Mirrored Part

5. Save LEFT_KNUCKLE.PRT. Click .Type [left_knuckle], instead of accepting the assembly name.

6. Do not save the assembly. Erase the assembly from session.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Assembly Features

Figure 16: Completed SHELL.ASM with Spline Cut

Task 1. Open the shell assembly and obtain information about it.

1. Open SHELL.ASM

2. Click Info > Bill of Materials. Select Top Level > OK. The modelconsists of three components. Click Close to close the InformationWindow.

3. Shade the assembly.

4. Click Info > Feature. Using Query Sel, select the Cut feature[F8(Cut:Shell)]. In the INFORMATION window, notice that the cutwas made in Assembly mode as an assembly feature. Close thewindow.

Task 2. Notice that the assembly feature intersects the outer casing.Change the intersection of the feature to include the inner casing.

1. Click Feature > Redefine. Select the Cut feature.

2. Click Intsct Parts > Define.

3. Click Sel By Menu. Select SHELL_INNER.PRT.

4. Click Select > Done Sel. Leave the visibility level unchanged.Click OK > OK to finish.

5. Repaint to view the results. Shade the assembly again and makesure that the cut goes through both shells.



NOTES

Figure 17: Assembly Feature

Task 3. The assembly cut visibility level is set to the top level. Verifythis by inspecting the parts individually.

1. Open SHELL_OUTER.PRT. Note that the cut is not visible in Partmode.

2. Close the SHELL_OUTER.PRT window.

3. Click Window > Activate to return to the assembly.

4. While in Assembly mode, try to add a feature to theSHELL_OUTER.PRT. Click Modify > Mod Part. SelectSHELL_OUTER.PRT. In the MESSAGE AREA, read the messageand click Confirm.

5. Click Done from the MODIFY PART menu. The assembly featurereturns.

Task 4. Make the assembly feature visible at the Part level.

1. Click Feature > Redefine. Select the Cut feature. In the CUTdialog box, click Intsct Parts > Define and click Remove twice toremove both models from the list of intersected components.

2. From the LEVEL list, click Part Level.

3. Select SHELL_OUTER.PRT and SHELL_INNER.PRT. Click OK >OK to complete the feature.

4. Open the SHELL_INNER.PRT. The assembly feature shouldappear. Open the SHELL_OUTER.PRT. The assembly featureshould appear here also.



NOTES

5. Close the part windows and reactivate the assembly.

Figure 18: Assembly Feature Example

6. [Optional] Create an assembly cut as shown in the precedingfigure.

7. Save the assembly and erase it from memory.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Pattern Tables

Task 1. Create a dimension pattern of the lead hole using increments todrive the pattern.

1. Open BRAKE_DISK_VENTED.PRT.

2. Click Feature > Pattern; select the small hole feature.

3. Click Identical > Done.

4. Select the 20.0 angular dimension. Type [5]. Select the 2.000radius dimension; type [0.5].

Increment thesedimensions in thefirst direction.

Increment angleagain for seconddirection.

Figure 19: Hole Pattern Dimensions

5. Click Done; type [4] as the number of instances.

6. Select the 20.0 angle dimension again; type [30].

7. Click Done; type [12] as the number of instances.



NOTES

Task 2. Change the hole pattern to a table and edit the table to removethe extra holes.

Figure 20: Modified Hole Pattern

1. Click Redefine; select one of the holes.

2. In the HOLES dialog box, click the Pattern button. Select ToTable.

3. To specify the pattern name, type [holes1]. The system shouldinform you that it has created the pattern table HOLES1.

4. Click Done/Return > .

5. Click Done to return to the PART menu..

6. To edit the pattern table, click Modify > Pattern Table.

7. In the TABLES dialog box, select HOLES1. Click Actions > Edit.

8. To delete the rows in the editor, select the rows beginning from idx8 to idx 15 as shown in the following figure. Click Edit > Delete.In the DELETE/ROWS COLUMN dialog box, click Rows > OK.



NOTES

Figure 21

1. Similarly, delete the rows from idx 24 to 31 and from idx 40 to 47.

Tips & Techniques:

You do not have to renumber the idx column to account for theremoved holes. The instance index numbers have to be unique,but they do not have to be consecutive.

2. Exit the editor. Click OK and Regenerate.

Task 3. Incorporate holes into the solid disk brake. According to thedesign intent, it should have the same hole pattern as the vented disk. Toaccomplish this, save the pattern table to the hard drive so that the systemcan read it into another part.

1. Click Modify > Pattern Table. Select the HOLES1 pattern table.

2. Click Actions > Write. The system saves the pattern tableinformation for the HOLES1 configuration to the hard drive(another pattern table called HOLES2 already exists on the harddrive). Click OK.

3. Save the model.



NOTES

Task 4. A variation on the design requires a different configuration ofholes. Add another pattern table to the hole feature by reading it in to thevented disk part from the hard drive.

1. Click Modify > Pattern Table. Select HOLES1 in the TABLESdialog box.

2. Read in the HOLES2.PTB file. Click Actions > Read. SelectHOLES2.PTB. Click Open. The system then informs you that itcreated pattern table HOLES2.

3. Switch the pattern to use the table that you read in. Select HOLES2Click Actions > Activate.

4. Click Ok > Regenerate to view the new hole pattern.

Note:

You may use the icons in the TABLES dialog box to performoperations such as Activate, Read, Write, etc.

Figure 22: Alternate Hole Pattern

Task 5. Use the pattern tables on another model. Drive an existing holeon the disk solid part.

1. Open BRAKE_DISK_SOLID.PRT.

2. Click Feature > Pattern. Select the hole. Click Identical > Done.



NOTES

3. Click Table. Select the 20.0 angle dimension; then select the 2.000placement radius. Click Done.

Note:

It is important to select these dimensions in the correct orderbecause this determines the order of the columns in the table.You must follow the order of the columns in the pattern tablethat you saved on the hard drive.

4. Click Read. Select HOLES1.PTB and click Open..

5. Click Read. Select HOLES2.PTB and click Open.

6. You have read the two pattern tables into the part. Click Done >Done. Notice that the Holes1 pattern appears.

7. Click Modify > Pattern Table and select HOLES2.

8. Click Actions > Activate > Ok > Done.

9. Click Regenerate and the model appears with the Holes2 pattern.

10. Save both models and erase them from memory.



NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Patterning Components in AssemblyMode

Task 1. Assemble the first nut to the lead hole; then reference pattern itto add the other nuts to the assembly.

1. Open the WHEEL.ASM assembly file.

2. Click Component > Assemble. Select LUG_NUT.PRT.

3. Select Mate from the CONSTRAINTS, TYPE list. Mate the taperedsurface on the nut to the tapered surface inside the hole. This fullydefines the placement. Click OK to finish.

Mate theconic surfaces.

Figure 23: Lug Nut Assembly References

4. Click Pattern from the Component menu. Select the lug nut.

5. Click Ref Pattern > Done.

6. Save the model and erase the entire assembly from memory. Use

to erase all components.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you learned:

• That you need to be concerned about establishing external referenceswhen creating merge parts, features on a part while in the assembly,mirror parts and assembly level features. Use the Design Manager tocontrol what references you define.

• How to access the different levels of the assembly. How to create astyle surface.

• That you can create a single part made of surface geometry thatrepresent the final assembly and use that part to create the individualcomponents, thus ensuring proper fit.

• The differences among pattern types and when they should be used.

• How to create a simple pattern in two directions.

• How to create a pattern table.

• How to export pattern information and import it into another model tosave time.

• How to pattern components in assembly mode.



Page 7-1

Module

Local Groups and User-Defined FeaturesIn this module you learn how to use local groups to organize your

models. You also learn how to create and use libraries of commonly

used geometry by defining user-defined features (UDFs).

Objectives


• Create and manipulate local groups.

• Reuse data.

• Work on multiple features as if they were one feature.

• Break the dependency of features within groups.

• Create and place user-defined features (UDF).



NOTES

LOCAL GROUPSA group is a set of features within a part or a set of components in anassembly that behave as a single entity. A Local Group is a group that youcreate within a model.

A Local Group:

• Is particular to the model in which it is created.

• Cannot be transferred to another model.

• Appears in the Model Tree as a single feature with a substructure.

Figure 1: Model Tree Before and After Creating a Local Group

Manipulating GroupsOn a local group you can perform various operations such as suppression,deletion, or reordering and the group still behaves as a single feature.

You can also:

• Pattern and Unpattern the group.

• Ungroup it.

• Break the dependencies that develop between features.

• Redefine the group to add features.

Patterning Features

Grouped features can use the same patterns as other regular features.When patterning, you can access all dimensions of all features in thegroup.


Local Groups and User-Def ined Featu res Page 7-3

NOTES

Figure 2: Group Patterning

You can create some configurations in local group patterns that youcannot create in reference patterns, as shown in the following figure.

Cannot referencepattern the draft, butyou can create a grouppattern.

Figure 3: Reference Patterning

You can break the group pattern by unpatterning it into individual groupswith their own dimensions that you can then modify or delete individually.

Figure 4: Unpatterned Groups



NOTES

Ungrouping

You can break a group into individual features so that you can work onthem individually.

Figure 5: Ungrouping of One Group

Breaking Dependencies

When you create a group, the system creates a dependency between theoriginal group and the copied or patterned group.

When you unpattern or ungroup the group, it still maintains a dependencyat the feature level. Using Modify > Make Indep, you can break thisdependency.

Figure 6: Height of One Group Made Independent



NOTES

USER-DEFINED FEATURESUDFs are groups of features, references, and dimensions that can be savedfor future use on models. UDFs save time and energy by helping establisha library of common geometry. The following figure shows a UDF thatcan be reused.

1. Cylindricalprotrusion

2. Rib3. Copy of ribs4. Coaxial hole

Figure 7: Screw Boss Geometry

Creating UDFsTo create a UDF, model the geometry that you want to save and thendefine the UDF by following these steps:

• Beginning the definition and specifying storage.

� At this stage, specify whether you would like to store the UDFas a Stand Alone feature or a Subordinate feature.

• Storing reference parts.

� When creating a standalone UDF, you can store a referencepart to use later. The system creates a copy of the current part andassigns it the name UDFname_GP.PRT.

� If you store the UDF as a subordinate feature, the currentmodel automatically becomes the reference part.



NOTES

• Naming the group.

� When the system stores the file, it appends the file extension.gph The UDF should have a valid filename that is unique anddescriptive.

• Selecting features.

� Use Query Sel or the Model Tree to select the model featuresto include in the UDF.

• Creating external reference prompts.

� These are user-defined prompts that help you to selectcorresponding references while placing the UDF in a new model.

Placementplane

Side plane

Front plane

Figure 8: External References for Screw Boss

• Defining variable dimensions and elements.As you select features forthe UDF, you can do the following:

� Make some or all the driving dimensions variable.

� Increase the UDFs flexibility by creating variable elements.

� Define prompts and logic statements.

� Create predefined variations of the UDF.



NOTES

• Completing the definition.

� Once you have defined all of the UDF elements, you can clickOK in the dialog box to automatically save the UDF and the referencepart to the hard drive. The system assigns the UDF the nameUDFname.gph.

Placing UDFs

When you place a UDF on a new model, the system creates a group withinthe new model containing the UDF features.

Figure 9: New Part Needs a Screw Boss

You can place a UDF file, using the following steps:

• Select the driving options to control the geometry. To control thegeometry after placing it, you can define it as either independent orUDF-driven.

• Retrieve a reference part to assist you in placing the UDF, if necessary.

• Type values for any variable dimensions that you created and selectplacement references.



NOTES

Placement plane

Side plane

Front plane

Figure 10: Selecting References for UDF Placement

• Specify the display for invariable dimensions as Normal, Read Only,or Blank.

Figure 11: Invariable Dimensions Blanked

• Define any optional elements.

• Finish the placement.

Creating Assembly-Level UDFs

By creating user-defined features at the assembly level, you can createcomponent groupings and place them as a single unit.



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you create and manipulate a local group. You also

create and utilize common library components known as UDFs.

Method

In Exercise 1, you use local groups to pattern vented disks for the brakesof a go-cart. You work on multiple features as if they are one feature andbreak the dependency of features within a group

In Exercise 2, you first gain mastery over the procedure for creating aUDF. You then place the UDF in different models.

In Exercise 3, you create a UDF from the end spline of an axle.

In Exercise 4, you place the spline-end UDF on the end of an axle part.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Local Groups and User-Defined Features

Icons DescriptionSelect Geometry

Apply and close

Save



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Local Groups

Task 1. Retrieve a part and resume currently suppressed geometry in it.


2. Open BRAKE_DISK_VENTED.PRT.

Figure 12

3. Click Utilities > Model Player.

Figure 13: MODEL PLAYER Dialog Box

4. Click to ‘rewind’ the model.

5. Click repeatedly to step through each feature in the model.Notice that a single ‘blade’ is composed of four features.



NOTES

Figure 14: Blade Geometry

6. Click Finish.

Task 2. Create a local group containing the features comprising theblade.

1. Click Feature > Group > Local Group, and type [blade] as thename for the group.

2. Press and hold <SHIFT>, then select Protrusion id 50 andRound id 148 in the MODEL TREE.

3. Click Done Select > Done.

4. Expand the group in the model tree.

Figure 15

Task 3. Pattern the group radially around the disk.

1. Click Pattern from the Group menu.

2. Select the Group BLADE in the MODEL TREE. All of thedimensions for the group appear.



NOTES

Figure 16

3. Select the 30° angle dimension and type [30] as the increment.

4. Click Done, type [12] as the number of instances, and click Done.

Figure 17: Finished Blade Pattern




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Using Group Options

Task 1. Open the model and create a group pattern.

1. Open LOCAL_GROUP.PRT.


2. Click Feature > Group > Local Group and type [volcano].

3. Select the protrusion, the draft, and the hole from the Model Tree,

and click > . Notice the group branch in the Model Tree.

Figure 19: Group Branch in Model Tree



NOTES

4. While still in the GROUP menu, click Pattern and select anywhereon the group.

5. Select the dimension to increment in the first direction, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 20: Dimension to Increment in First Direction

6. Type [3.0], click Done and type [3].

7. Select the dimension to increment in the second direction, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 21: Direction to Increment in the Second Direction

8. Type [5.0], click Done and type [2].



NOTES

Figure 22: Created Pattern

Task 2. Create a reference pattern on the group.

1. Using , select the edge and click > Round Edges.

Figure 23: Rounding Edges

2. Drag to a radius of approximately 0.20.

3. Select the round and click > Pattern.

Task 3. Investigate the Unpattern option.

1. Select any group and click > Modify.



NOTES

Figure 24

2. Modify 3 VOLCANOS to [2] and Regenerate.

3. Modify the quantity back to [3] and Regenerate.

4. Modify the draft angle to [13] and Regenerate.

5. Modify the draft angle back to [7] and Regenerate.

6. Modify the dimension as shown in the following figure, to [3] andRegenerate. (Hint: Query Select the protrusion within the group).

Figure 25: Modified Dimensions

7. Modify the dimension back to [5] and Regenerate.

8. Notice that during the previous modifications, the members of thegroup functioned as instances in a pattern.



NOTES

9. Click Feature > Group > Unpattern and select any group. In theMessage Area, read the prompt. Notice that the group can not beunpatterned due to the reference pattern.

Task 4. To investigate the Group manipulation possibilities, recreate themodel. First delete the patterns, include the round in the group and thencreate the group pattern again.

1. Delete the reference pattern. In the Model Tree, select Pattern

(Round) and > Delete Pattern.

Figure 26

2. In the Model Tree, select Pattern (VOLCANO) and > DeletePattern.

Figure 27



NOTES

Task 5. Redefine the Group.

1. In the Model Tree, select GROUP (VOLCANO) and >Redefine.

2. In the FEATURES area of the GROUP HEAD dialog box, click ,

select the ROUND, and click Done Sel > . Notice that the roundis added to the group.

Task 6. Recreate the group pattern using the instructions outlined in theearlier steps.

1. Pattern the Group. Use a vertical increment of [3.0], and ahorizontal increment of [5.0].

Figure 28: Reconstructing the Model

Task 7. Investigate the Group manipulation possibilities.

1. Click Feature > Group > Unpattern and select any group.

2. Click > and read the prompt.

3. Modify the dimension on the protrusion to [5.0] as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 29: Modifying Dimensions

4. Click Regenerate, and notice now groups can be repositionedindividually.

5. Modify the radius on the round as shown in the following figure,then Regenerate. Notice that the change affects all groups.

Figure 30: Modifying Radius

6. Click Feature > Delete and select the hole, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 31: Deleting Hole Feature



NOTES

7. Click > . Notice the deletion of the feature forced thedeletion of the group.

8. Delete the group in the upper left corner using the Model Tree.

Task 8. Investigate the UnGroup option.

1. Click Feature > Group > Ungroup. Select the groups, as shown in

the following figure. Click > .

Figure 32: Selecting Groups to Ungroup

2. Delete the holes from the groups just selected. Notice you can nowdelete individual features from the groups.

Figure 33: Deleted Holes

3. Modify the radius value as shown in the following figure, thenRegenerate.



NOTES

Figure 34: Modifying Radius Value

4. Notice that the dimension values are still linked after beingunpatterned and ungrouped.

Task 9. Investigate the Make Independent option.

1. Click Modify > Make Indep > Dimension. Select the protrusion(not the draft), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 35: Selecting Protrusion

2. Select the 2.0 height dimension, and read the prompt.

3. Select the two protrusions without holes and click > >

.

4. Modify the height of the two protrusions previously selected to[3.0] and regenerate. Notice now independent featuremodifications are possible.



NOTES

Figure 36: Protrusions with Modified Height




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating UDFs

Task 1. Create a UDF from the end spline of the axle.

1. Open AXEL_END.PRT.

Figure 37

2. Click Feature > UDF Library > Create.

3. Type [SPLINE_END] as the name and click Subordinate > Done.

4. Select the features shown in the following figure.

Figure 38: UDF Features Highlighted in Model Tree



NOTES

5. Click Done > Done/Return.

Task 2. Provide prompts for each reference that was used to create thesefeatures.

1. Read the message in the Message Area. Notice the highlighted

edge in the model. Type [end edge] as the prompt and click .

2. For the axis, click Single > Done/Return, and type [main axis]

and click .

3. For the datum plane, type [datum plane along axis] and

click .

4. For the surface, click Single > Done /Return. Type [end

surface] click .

6. For the next reference. Type [cylindrical surface] and click

.

7. Review your prompts using the Next and Previous options. Ifnecessary, correct any of the prompts, using Enter Prompt. Whenall prompts are correct, click Done/Return.

Task 3. Define the optional elements for the UDF to make it moreflexible for future use. Make the depth of the spline cuts and the holedepth option variable.

1. Click Var Dims > Define.

Figure 39



NOTES

2. Select the 1.25 dimension defining the length of the cuts. ClickDone/Return > Done/Return.

3. Specify a prompt for this dimension. Type [spline length].

4. Define a variable element. Click Var Elements > Define.

5. Specify the feature for which to define variable elements. Selectthe hole and click All > Done.

6. Click Done Sel > OK. The system creates the SPLINE_END.GPHfile on the hard drive.




NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Placing UDFs

Task 1. Place the SPLINE_END UDF on the ends of the axle part.

1. Open the AXEL.PRT and click The generic > Open.

Figure 40

2. Click Feature > Create > User Defined.

3. Select the SPLINE_END.GPH file and click Open.

4. Notice that the system automatically retrieves the AXLE_ENDmodel in a subwindow.

5. Relocate the AXLE_END window such that you can read themessages in the main window. Also reposition/reorient the AXLEpart such that you can clearly view all the features.

Note:

According to this design intent scenario, place the UDF so it isindependent from the original.

6. Click Independent > Done > Same Dims > Done.

7. Type [1.00] as the spline length.



NOTES

Note:

According to this design intent scenario, you should not beable to modify the dimensions easily after placement, but youshould still be able to view them.

8. Click Read Only > Done to make all other dimensions visible butnot modifiable.

Task 2. One by one, specify appropriate references on the axle part

1. Select the End Edge as shown in the following figure.

Figure 41

2. Select the Main Axis as shown in the following figure.

Figure 42

3. Select the Datum Plane Along Axis as shown in the followingfigure.



NOTES

Figure 43

4. Select the End Surface as shown in the following figure.

Figure 44

5. Select the Cylindrical Surface as shown in the following figure.

Figure 45

6. Click Ok > Ok to accept the arrow directions.

7. Since you selected the hole to have variable elements, the systemallows you to change it. Select Depth One and change it toVariable.

8. Type [0.75] as the depth and click > Done.



NOTES

Figure 46: Finished UDF on Axle

Task 3. Attempt to modify the placed UDF.

1. Try to modify the cuts creating the spline end. Notice that all of thedimensions highlight. Select the dimensions for the width of eachcut. Notice that this is a read-only dimension, so you cannotmodify it.

Task 4. Add another independent UDF to the other end of the axle part,as shown in the following figure.

1. Use the same options as you did for the first UDF.

2. Make sure that you select the lower edge and flip both datumplane arrows to match the correct orientation of the UDF on thisend of the model.

Figure 47: Finished Axle

3. Save the models, close all windows, and click File > Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXCERCISEThe following exercise provides supplementary tools and techniques


OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Adding the SplinedUDF to the Hub

Task 1. Place the UDF on the hub part.

1. Open the R_HUB.PRT.

Figure 48

2. Click Feature > Create > User Defined.

3. Select the SPLINE_END UDF and click Open.

Note:

According to this design intent scenario, place the UDF so itcan be updated from the original.

4. Click UDF Driven > Done > Same Dims > Done.

5. Type [0.5] as the spline length.

Note:

According to this design intent scenario, you should not showthe dimensions in the model.



NOTES

6. Click Blank > Done for the other dimensions.

Task 2. Follow the prompts and select appropriate references on thehub.

1. Select references appropriately. Refer to the following figures.

Figure 49: End Edge and Main Axis

Figure 50: Datum Plane Along Axis and End Surface

Figure 51: Cylindrical Surface.

2. Complete the UDF using the Hole defaults.

Figure 52: Finished Hub



NOTES

Task 3. Investigate Blanked dimensions

1. Modify the placed UDF. Notice that the only dimension thatdisplays is the overall length because you blanked the otherdimensions.

Figure 53: Blanked Dimensions

Task 4. Change the UDF file and observe how it affects the UDF-drivenspline end in the hub, but does not affect the independent spline end in theaxle.

1. Open AXLE_END.PRT.

2. Modify the width of one of the cuts from 0.2 to 0.1 andregenerate.

Figure 54: Change Width of Cut in AXLE_END.PRT

3. Activate the R_HUB.PRT window.

4. Click Feature > Group > Update > Done/Return > Done.



NOTES

5. Regenerate the model to see the changes.

Figure 55: Updated Hub

Task 5. Try to make the same modification to the axle part that youmade to the UDF earlier.

1. Open the AXLE.PRT and click The generic > Open.

2. Click Feature > Group. Notice that Update is unavailable.Because Independent was chosen for the UDF. Therefore, it is notassociated with the SPLINE_END UDF file.

3. Save the models, close all windows, and click File > Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module you have learned:

• How to create local groups.

• How to manipulate groups.

• How to reuse data.

• How to work on multiple features as if they were one.

• How to break the dependency of features within groups.

• How to create user defined features (UDF).

• How to place UDF’s on new models.


Page 8-1

Module

Advanced Assembly ToolsIn this module you learn different ways to manipulate assemblies.

You do this by modifying subassemblies and components.

Objectives


• Modify subassemblies.

• Reposition and add components.

• Replace components.

• Repeat component placement.

• Create exploded assembly views.



NOTES

MODIFYING ASSEMBLIESOnce you have created an assembly, you can manipulate it by modifyingits subassemblies, repositioning or replacing components, and creatingexploded views.

Modifying SubassembliesBecause Pro/ENGINEER assembles a subassembly into the currentassembly as a single component, it applies component operations to theentire subassembly.

You must perform operations on components within the subassembly towhich they belong. However, you can use the Mod SubAsm option toredefine, delete, assemble, and replace components without displaying thesubassembly in its own window.

Restructuring Subassemblies

Using the Restructure option, you can easily move assembly componentsfrom one level to another, for example, from the top-level assembly to alower subassembly.

You can also restructure to a new subassembly by using Component >Create > SubAssy.

Figure 1: Restructuring an Assembly


Advanced Assembly Tools Page 8-3

NOTES

Note:

When restructuring a component, the system sometimesrequires you to reselect its assembly references to referencegeometry in the desired level of the assembly. Although itassembles the part in a new level or subassembly, it maintainsthe original assembly references, resulting in externalreferences. These references should be redefined to avoidpossible component placement failure.

Repositioning ComponentsUsing various methods, you can reposition components after constrainingthem. The method that you use depends on the type of change that youmake, and the extent to which you want to control the component aftermaking the change.

• Redefining or rerouting components – This can be used toassemble a component into a different position.

• Using offset constraints – To translate a component to a differentposition, you can use the Mate Offset or Align Offset placementconstraints. To create angle dimensions, you can create a datum anduse the Angle option when assembling.

• Using the package move functionality – By packaging, you candrag a component to a new position and automatically add offsetswhile moving it.

• Using assembly skeletons – You can use skeletons to represent theframework of a moving assembly.

• Temporarily translating or rotating a component – You cantemporarily translate and/or rotate a component away from itsplacement position—with respect to the axis of an assemblycoordinate system—without changing the component’s constraints.

• Using Pro/PROGRAM –Using the PRO/PROGRAM functionality, youcan set up the system so that it prompts you automatically for thevalues of component dimensions.



NOTES

Replacing ComponentsUsing Adv Utils > Replace, you can remove one component from anassembly and replace it with a different one without deleting thecomponent and reassembling.

You can use the following tools to replace components within anassembly.

• By Family Table Member

• By Interchange Assembly

• By Layout

• Manually

• By New Copy

• By Shrinkwrap

Note: When replacing a component, the system places the newcomponent in the same order in which it assembled theoriginal component. If you simply deleted the component andassembled a new one, you would have to reorder the newcomponent to return it to its original place.

Replace By Family Table Member

Instances of a family table are automatically interchangeable as long asthey were created from the same generic instance, and each instancecontains the required references. The system can also replace with childcomponents if those references are available as well. For example, bothpin instances below have the same ‘head’ feature (required for Mateconstraint) and also the hole (used for a child clevis pin component).

Figure 2: Instances of the Pin



NOTES

Note:

When using any of the replacement methods, if the replacedcomponent has child components assembled to it, you mayhave to replace the children’s missing references by redefiningor rerouting them to the new component.

Replace By Interchange Assembly

An Interchange Assembly is a special type of assembly that can containtwo types of components:

• Simplify Components

• Functional Components

Both types allow components to be interchanged with other compatiblemembers of the interchange assembly. The interchange assembly can besaved and used repeatedly.

Simplify Components

• Used with Simplified Reps for Substitution.

Functional Components

• Used with the component advanced utilities Replace functionality,you can set up functional interchangeability between two or moreindependently modeled parts or assemblies.

• Allows functionally equivalent components to be easily exchanged inan assembly.

• Uses reference tags between components for assembly or childreferences.

• Use this method to change the configuration of the model rather thanto simplify the model.



NOTES

Figure 3: An Interchange Assembly with Functional Components

Figure 4: Using an Interchange Assembly

Replace By Layout

If adequate global datum references have been established between two ormore components and a Layout, the components may be interchanged.

Replace Manually

Using Replace Component > Manual, you can use placement constraintsor packaging techniques to place the new component as you would in anormal assembly.



NOTES

Replace By New Copy

This option will replace the selected component with a new component.This new component is an independent copy of the entire original modeland is given a name during the replace process.

Replace By Shrinkwrap

Allows you to select a component that contains a shrinkwrap of thecomponent to be replaced.

Repeating Component PlacementYou have the ability to repeat the placement constraints of a component toplace additional instances of the same component into an assembly. Thisreduces the number of selections required since you do not have to re-select all of the references on the component that you are placing. Thesystem also allows you to skip redundant references, such as a commonmating plane.

Figure 5: Repeated Placement of Bolt

Creating Exploded ViewsUsing View > Explode, you can generate a default explode state for anassembly. Exploding an assembly affects only the display of theassembly—the system does not alter actual distances betweencomponents.



NOTES

Figure 6: Exploded Assembly View

The default explode may or may not explode your assembly as desired. Tomodify the exploded positions, you can use Modify > Mod Expld togenerate one or multiple exploded states. Within each exploded state youcan drag components into a desired position using the EXPLODEPOSITION dialog box, as shown in the following figure. In addition, offsetlines may be added between components.

Figure 7: Setting Explode Positions



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you manipulate components in an assembly.

Method

In Exercise 1, you restructure a component in an assembly rather thandeleting and reassembling it.

In Exercise 2, you create an interchange assembly of components thathave the same function in an assembly but are physically different.

In Exercise 3, you demonstrate how to quickly assemble the samecomponent numerous times using the Repeat option.

Table 1: Advanced Assembly Tools Icons

Icons DescriptionFix to current position

Assemble at default placement

Change orientation of constraint

Preferences

Remove selected constraint

Specify new constraint

Show component in assembly window

Show component in separate window



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Restructuring the Carburetor

Task 1. Investigate the top-level assembly.


2. Open CARB_RESTRUCT.ASM.

Figure 8: The Carburetor Assembly

3. View the structure of all of the components in the Model Tree asshown in the following figure.

Figure 9



NOTES

4. Notice the assembly and the subassembly structure. Also noticethat the VALVE is the part of the SHAFT subassembly.

Task 2. The valve part is in the shaft subassembly, which would makethe valve shaft physically impossible to assemble into the housing part.Change the level at which the valve part was placed.

1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Restructure.

2. Select the VALVE.PRT. This marks the component as moving.

Figure 10

3. Select VALVE.ASM as the target. In the MODEL TREE, notice thatthe VALVE.PRT is now part of the VALVE.ASM.

Figure 11: The Valve Moved into the Valve Assembly

4. Click Done.



NOTES

Task 3. The handle could be assembled to the shaft before assemblingto the valve. Move the handle part into the shaft assembly.

1. Click Restructure. Select the HANDLE.PRT from the Model Tree.

2. Select SHAFT.ASM as the target. The Model Tree should displayas shown in the following figure.

Figure 12: Moving the Handle

2. Click Done.

3. Save the assembly, close all windows and click File > Erase NotDisplayed.

Task 4. Determine if the subassembly has any problems.

1. Open SHAFT.ASM. Notice that the assembly fails to regeneratethe handle placement, but displays the handle in its last knownposition.

Figure 13



NOTES

2. In the RESOLVE FEAT menu, click Quick Fix > Redefine >Confirm.

3. With Placement checked, click Done.

4. Read the prompt. Click Confirm.

5. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box notice that theassembly references are missing.

Figure 14

Task 5. Replace the missing references with surfaces on ARM1.PRT.

1. In the dialogue box, Click and . The component shoulddisplay in a subwindow as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15



NOTES

2. Select the cylindrical surfaces of the ARM1.PRT and theHANDLE.PRT as shown in the following figure. This creates anInsert constraint.

Figure 16

3. Select the flat circular surfaces on the ARM1.PRT andHANDLE.PRT, as shown in the following figure. This creates aMate constraint.

Figure 17

4. Click to accept the [0.0] offset.

5. Select the 0.0 Offset for the Mate constraint, and selectCoincident from the drop down list.



NOTES

Figure 18

6. Click OK to finalize the component placement.

7. Click Yes to resume the assembly.

Figure 19




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Replacing the Brake Hub AssemblyComponents

Task 1. Attempt to replace the DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT bydeleting it from the assembly.

1. Open BRAKE_HUB.ASM.

Figure 20

2. Click Component > Delete. Select DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT.Notice that the system highlights a BRAKE_CALIPER because it isa child of the disk.

3. Click Quit > Quit Del/Sup.

4. Click Window > Close.

Task 2. Create a new interchange assembly called DISKS.ASM so youcan replace the disk brake and preserve the parent/child relationships.

1. Click File > New > Assembly > Interchange.

2. Type [DISKS] as the name and click OK.

3. Click Component > Add.

4. Select DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT and click Open.

5. Click Add > Functional Component > OK.

6. Select DISK_BRAKE_SOLID PRT and click Open.



NOTES

Figure 21

7. Click OK > Done/Return.

Task 3. Through the interchange assembly, set up the equivalentreferences on the components using tags. First, determine the referencesthat the hollow disk has in the brake hub assembly

1. Click Reference Tag > Auto Tag. Select theDISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW from the Model Tree.

2. Read the prompt.

3. Select the BRAKE_HUB.ASM and click Open.

Figure 22: AutoTag Creation Dialog Box


You can control the orientation of the model shown in theAutoTag Creation dialog box using the mouse.



NOTES

Task 4. Define tag names.

1. For the highlighted surface, type [MATE_SURFACE] as the tag nameand press <ENTER>.

2. For the highlighted axis, type [ALIGN_AXIS] as the name andpress <ENTER>. The dialog box should display as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 23: Specifying the Tags

3. Click OK. The Tag names appear in the Reference Tags dialog.

Figure 24



NOTES

Task 5. Assign the Mate Surface tag to the corresponding geometry onthe solid disk to make it interchangeable.

1. Select the MATE_SURFACE and DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shownin the following figure.

Figure 25

2. Notice that the back surface of DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW ishighlighted. Use Query Select to select the equivalent backsurface on DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in the following figure.

Figure 26: Creating Reference Tags

Task 6. Assign the Align Axis tag to the corresponding geometry on thesolid disk to make it interchangeable.

1. Click to display Datum Axes.



NOTES

2. Select ALIGN_AXIS and DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 27

3. Notice that A_1 on the DISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW is highlighted.Select the equivalent axis DISK_BRAKE_SOLID as shown in thefollowing figure.

4. Notice that the entries under ALL TAGS list now indicate Y,signifying that you have defined all of the reference tags.

5. Click OK.


Task 7. Automatically replace the hollow disk with the solid disk.

1. Open BRAKE_HUB.ASM.



NOTES

Figure 28

2. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace and selectDISK_BRAKE_HOLLOW.PRT.

3. Click By Interchange Assembly > Browse.

4. Expand the tree and select DISK_BRAKE_SOLID.PRT. Click OK.

5. Click Apply > Done.

Figure 29: The Replaced Disk


Task 8. Replace components in the wheel assembly using the familytable definitions associated with it.

1. Open the WHEEL_GENERIC.ASM and click The generic > Open.



NOTES

Figure 30: WHEEL_GENERIC.ASM

2. Click Component > Adv Utils > Replace and selectRIM_GENERIC.PRT from the Model Tree.

3. Click By Family Table Member > Browse.

4. Select the 12X6-STYLE_C instance. Click OK > Apply > Done.

Figure 31

5. Replace the rim with another instance.




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Repeating Components

Task 1. Start by assembling the BOLT.PRT to a hole in theINTAKE.ASM.

1. Open INTAKE.ASM.

Figure 32:

2. Click Component > Assemble. Select the BOLT.PRT and clickOpen.

3. Select the two surfaces shown below. This creates an Insertconstraint.

Figure 33



NOTES

4. Select the two surfaces shown below. This creates a MateCoincident constraint.

Figure 34

5. Click Ok.

.

Figure 35

Task 2. Use Repeat to place another bolt.

1. Click Component > Adv Utls > Repeat. Select BOLT.PRT.

2. Select Insert and Mate from the dialog box as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 36

3. Click Add. Read the prompt.



NOTES

4. Select the cylindrical surface shown below.

Figure 37

5. Read the prompt and then select the surface shown below.

Figure 38

6. Notice the assembled bolt as shown in the following figure.

Figure 39



NOTES

7. Select another corresponding cylindrical and mating surface asshown in the following figure.

Figure 40

8. Continue to place bolts into all of the holes.

9. Click Confirm.

Note:

The repeated bolts are completely independent to one another.




NOTES



OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Exploded Viewsand Dynamic Repositioning

Task 1. Open the assembly and experiment with dynamic repositioning.

1. Open VALVE_EXP.ASM.

Figure 41:

2. Select the ARM_EXP and click > Delete > Ok.

3. Click Component > Assemble. Select Arm.prt and click Open.

4. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and click and drag themouse. Notice the component zooms in and out of the screen.

5. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and click and drag themouse. Notice this rotates only the component.



NOTES

6. Press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT> and drag the mouse. Notice thispans only the component in the plane of the screen.

Task 2. Fully constrain the component.

1. Position the component approximately as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 42: Positioning Component

2. Maintain the default Automatic constraint, and select the twosurfaces, as shown in the following figure.


3. Again, press and hold <CTRL> + <ALT>. Click and then while dragging the mouse. Notice that the component is partiallyconstrained.



NOTES

4. Click > Snap Options > Activate Snapping > Close.

5. Click and select the surface as shown in the following figure.

Figure 44: Selecting Surfaces for Automatic Constraint

6. Click <CTRL> + <ALT> + . Drag the component up and downwithout releasing any keys. Notice that is snaps to availablesurfaces.

7. Snap the Arm as shown below and release all keys.

Figure 45

8. Notice the system has interpreted this as a Mate constraint. Test thedegrees of freedom of the component with <CTRL> <ALT> and

, and .

9. Position the arm as shown in the following figure using the mouse.



NOTES

Figure 46: Positioning Component

10. Click OK.

11. Notice that the arm reoriented itself to a default position.

12. Redefine the arm, and clear the Allow Assumptions check box.

13. Position the arm again.

14. Click > [Fix to current position]. Notice the arm is nowfully constrained, and click OK.

Task 3. Activate the default exploded state.

1. Click View > Explode.

Figure 47: Unhelpful Exploded View



NOTES

2. Notice that this exploded state is likely not desirable.

3. Click View > Unexplode.

Task 4. Create a custom exploded state.

1. Click Explode State > Create. Type [Explode_all].

2. Maintain the default Motion Type of Translate. Set the MotionReference to Plane Normal.

3. Select the surface as shown in the following figure.

Figure 48: Selecting Surface

4. Select the Arm and reposition as shown in the following figure.

Figure 49: Repositioning

5. Set the Motion Increment to 10 and select the Cover.

6. Reposition as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 50: Repositioning after Setting Motion Increment

7. Click Preferences > Move Many > Close.

8. Set the Motion Reference to Plane Normal. Select the surfaceshown in the following figure.

Figure 51: Selecting Surface after Setting Motion Reference

9. Select the Arm, Cover, and Shaft followed by .

10. Click anywhere in the window and reposition as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 52: Repositioning

11. Set the Motion Reference to Plane Normal. Select the surfaceshown in the following figure.

Figure 53: Selecting Surface after Setting Motion Reference

12. Reposition the VALVE_PLATE, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 54: Repositioning the Valve Plate

13. Reposition the Arm. Use the edge shown in the following figure asa reference.

Figure 55: Selecting Edge



NOTES

Task 5. Finish the explode state with offset lines.

1. Click OK > Offset Lines > Create.

2. Toggle to display datum axes and select the two axes, as shownin the following figure.

Figure 56: Selecting Two Axes

3. Repeat for other axes.

Figure 57: Selecting Other Axes

4. Use a combination of the Axis and Surface Norm options for thelast offset line.



NOTES

Figure 58: Using a Combination for the Last Offset Line

5. Return to the main menu to complete the explode state.

Task 6. Create another exploded state.

1. Click View > Unexplode.

2. Create the explode state named EXP_SUB_ASSY, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 59: Creating an New Explode State



NOTES

3. Use Explode State > Set Current to toggle between the threeexploded states.

4. Use View > Explode and View > Unexplode to toggle betweenthe unexploded view and the last used explode state.




NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you have learned:

• How to restructure assembly components without deleting them.

• How to create and use interchange assemblies to replace componentsin an assembly.

• How to replace components using family table instances.

• How to use the repeat functionality to rapidly place components intoan assembly without establishing unwanted dependencies.


Page 9-1

Module

Simplified Representations & ShrinkwrapIn this module you learn how to use Simplified representations to

reduce retrieval, repaint, and regeneration time for large assemblies

and parts.

Objectives


• Create Simplified Representations of parts and assemblies.

• Create Shrinkwraps in part and assembly mode.

• Use substitution in Simplified Reps.

• Create Simplified Representations with Shrinkwraps.



NOTES

SIMPLIFIED REPRESENTATIONSSimplified Representations (Simplified Reps) are the primary largeassembly management tool in Pro/ENGINEER. For assemblies, you cancontrol which components the system retrieves into session, and to whatlevel components are retrieved. You can omit components, use differentreps of particular components, and substitute less complicated versions ofcomponents. For Part models, you can control which features aredisplayed, and also create work-region (cutaway) representations.

Simplified Reps:

• Increase machine efficiency when working with complex models orlarge assemblies.

• Can tailor your model for a particular task not requiring allcomponents or features.

• Automatically manage the children of components that you substituteor remove, unlike the suppression functionality.

Simplified Representation Types• Master Rep – Model geometry is solid, visible, and available for

selection or referencing. Mass property calculations and measurementsmay be performed. Individual features can be selected and redefined.Equivalent to the default state of a model before Simplified Repcreation, the Master Rep always reflects the full assembly, includingall of its members and their detail.

Figure 1: Master Rep of an Assembly (Shown Exploded)


Simpl i f ied Representat ions and Shrinkwrap Page 9-3

NOTES

• Geometry Rep – Model geometry is solid, visible, and available forselection or referencing. Mass property calculations and measurementsmay be performed. The model is treated as one combined solid insteadof individual features, so individual features can not be selected orviewed in the model tree. Although visually identical, Geometry Repsregenerate and display faster than Master Reps.

Figure 2: Geometry Rep of an Assembly (Shown Unexploded)

• Graphics Rep – Model geometry is not solid or available forselection, and mass property calculations and measurements may notbe performed. Graphics Reps are significantly faster than GeometryReps. Visibility of Graphics Reps is dependant on the config optionsave_model_display when the model is saved, with the followingoptions:

� Wireframe – Model will be displayed in wireframe.

� Shading High – Shading with full detail.

� Shading Med – Shading with medium detail.

� Shading Low – Shading with least detail.

� Shading LOD – Shading is dependent on the performancesetting Levels of Detail.

Figure 3: Graphics Rep Shown in Wireframe



NOTES

• Exclude – Model(s) can be excluded from current Simplified Rep, andare not displayed or regenerated.

Figure 4: Excluded Gear Models

• Substitute – Model(s) can be substituted with simplified versions

Figure 5: Substituted Brake Disk Assembly



NOTES

CREATING SIMPLIFIED REPSYou can create Simplified reps in an assembly:

• After retrieving the entire assembly.

� Once the Rep is created, excluded models must be erased fromRAM to improve performance.

• On-the-fly during retrieval of the assembly.

� The Open Rep option in the Open dialog box will allow you toopen an existing Simplified Rep, or create a new one before theassembly is retrieved. This eliminates the need to open the entireassembly, only to remove some components from RAM afterimplementing a Simplified Rep.

Figure 6: Open Rep Dialog Box

Creating Customized RepresentationsInstead of opening all components in an assembly as a Master, Geometry,or Graphics Rep, you can define your own customized Rep. This allowsdifferent components to be placed into various Rep levels, depending ontheir relevance to the task at hand.

Specifying the Default RuleThe default rule for a Simplified Rep determines how the system willinitially classify all components, and cannot be redefined. The followingfour options are available:

• Master • Geometry • Graphics • Exclude



NOTES

Defining Action for ComponentsOnce you have created a Simplified Rep and set the default rule, you candefine one of the following actions for each component to be selected.

• Master – Includes component in its Master Rep.

• Exclude – Does not include the component in the Rep.

• Graphics Rep – Includes the component in its Graphics Rep.

• Geometry Rep – Includes the component in its Geometry Rep.

• Default – Returns the component to the Rep level defined by thedefault rule.

• Substitute – Substitutes the component with representative geometry.

Selecting ComponentsThere are several available selection tools:

• Pick Mdl – Select the model(s) from the screen or Model Tree.

• All – Select all components.

• From/To – Select two models or features in the model tree to select allthose in between.

• By Rule – Setup a rule for component selection.

• By Rep – Select models active in another Rep.

• By Envelope – Selects components belonging to a defined Envelope.Used with Substitute only.



NOTES

Creating Rules

Definition Rules

Using the Definition Rules option allows you to create rules that candynamically update a Simplified Rep as assembly components are addedor modified. Definition Rules are based on the same rule options asSelection Rules

Selection Rules

You can establish selection rules using the By Rule dialog box, to moreefficiently select desired components. Selection Rules are intended to beused to select components for the original definition of the Rep. Thesystem does not re-evaluate them when it retrieves the Simplified Rep orregenerates the assembly.

Figure 7



NOTES

Selection Rules

Geometric

• Zone – Components are located within a predefined zone. Zones canbe used to select components on one side of a plane, within anenclosed surface, or within a specified distance from an entity.

Figure 8: Selecting Using Zone

• Distance – Selects components located within a spherical region froma point defined by a radius.

• Size – Selects components based on their model size—the diagonalmeasurement of the smallest bounding box that could hold the part.

Figure 9: Model Size Option



NOTES

• Exterior Comps – Select components that contribute to the externalshape of the assembly.

Properties

• Model Name – Selects components based on their names. Wildcardssuch as *or ? can be used to select multiple similar names.

• Expression – Create logic statement(s) based on model parameters.For example, all items with Cost > 12.00 AND Vendor =Boston Gear. You must designate the parameters and save themodel to use this option.

• Comp Type – Can be used to select all skeleton models.

Parent / Child

• Used to select all parents of children of selected component. Severaloptions and filter settings are available.

SUBSTITUTING COMPONENTSModel can be substituted (exchanged) with a simpler, representativemodel or subassembly. The system preserves the references of thereplaced component to allow you to work on the assembly in the future.

Selecting Components for Substitution• Pick Mdl – Select the model(s) from the screen or Model Tree.

• By Rule – Setup a rule for component selection.

• By Envelope – Selects components belonging to a predefinedEnvelope. Used with Substitute only.

Substitution using EnvelopesAn Envelope is a special part that you can create in the context of anassembly specifically for use with the Substitute option when creating aSimplified Rep.

• Envelopes typically replace a number of components or subassemblieswith simplified, representative geometry.

• The envelope part itself contains a list of all components that itreplaces, as well as some simplified geometry to represent thesubstituted parts.



NOTES

• Components can be selected to be included in the envelope manually,or by using a selection rule.

• Envelopes offer the following substitution advantages:

� One envelope can replace many components.

� An envelope can cross over the boundaries of a subassembly toinclude components not included in that subassembly.

� The system stores envelope geometry in a separate part file sothat you can make changes and assign mass properties in Part mode.

Note:

You can only use an envelope in the assembly in which youcreated it.

Envelope MethodsThere are several methods that can be used to create envelope geometry:

Figure 10

Create Envelope Part

This option allows you to manually create and assemble a part model intothe assembly. Geometry such as solids or surfaces can be created manuallyin the context of the assembly to represent multiple components.



NOTES

Figure 11: Using a Manually Created Envelope

Select Existing Assembly Component

With this option, an existing component in the assembly is selected andused for envelope geometry. Typically, the component would have beencreated specifically for use as an envelope, and could contain solidfeatures or surface features such as a Shrinkwrap.

Surface Subset Shrinkwrap

This option creates an envelope part using a surface Shrinkwrap, which isautomatically created and engulfs selected envelope component(s). Smallsurfaces are left out using lower quality values.

Figure 12: Original Cylinder Head Model



NOTES

Figure 13: Envelope using Shrinkwrap Surface Subset

Faceted Solid Shrinkwrap

Creates an envelope part using a faced solid shrinkwrap, which isautomatically created and engulfs selected envelope component(s). Smallsurfaces are passed over using lower quality values.

Original Cylinder Head Envelope Using Faceted SolidFigure 14



NOTES

Other Substitution OptionsBesides Envelopes, there are other Substitution options available:

Figure 15

By Family Table Member

A family table instance may be used for substitution. For example,instances of components or subassemblies with a reduced number offeatures or components can be substituted for the more complex instance.The ‘simplified’ instance must support any assembly references used inthe original model.

By Interchange Assembly

A special type of assembly that can contain two types of components:

Simplify Component

• Used with Simplified Reps for Substitution.

• A component is placed or created in the interchange assembly thatrepresents a simplified version of a part or assembly.

• The Simplify Component is assembled directly on the component(s) itis to substitute for.

• The Simplify Component can be assigned the mass properties of thecomponent(s) it is to substitute for.



NOTES

Original Subassembly Simplify Component Interchange AssemblyFigure 16

Original Assembly Simplify Interchange Component SubstitutedFigure 17

Functional Component

• Used with the component advanced utilities Replace functionality.

• Allows functionally equivalent components to be easily exchanged inan assembly.

• Uses reference tags between components for assembly or childreferences.

• Use this method to change the configuration of the model rather thanto simplify the model.

By Simplified Rep

This option allows you to select pre-defined Simplified reps from a part orassembly, and use them for substitution in the Simplified Rep of a higherlevel assembly.

Assembly Simplified Reps

If you create a Simplified Rep in a subassembly, you can substitute it intothe Simplified Rep of a higher level assembly.



NOTES

Figure 18: Substituted Rep

Part Simplified Reps

Simplified reps can be created at the part level to aid in the creation ofcomplex models. They will be available for selection during substitutionwhile creating an assembly Simplified Rep. Part Simplified reps offer thefollowing capabilities:

• Including / Excluding features without affecting parent/childrelationships.

• Create Work-Region cutaways.

• Selecting surfaces to be copied into the Rep.

Figure 19: Part-level Simplified Rep Substituted in an Assembly

Considerations with Part Simplified Reps

• When you retrieve a part Simplified Rep or an assembly that uses apart Simplified Rep, the system automatically regenerates the MasterRep of that part and then the part Simplified Rep. As a result, retrievaltime increases for part level reps.



NOTES

• Since part level reps will allow you to Exclude features withoutaffecting parent child relationships, they are best used to aid modelingof complex part models outside of the context of an assembly; and notas a large assembly management technique in Simplified reps.

• To decrease retrieval time with part level reps, you can create anaccelerator file (.xpr) that contains model information, allowing youto directly retrieve the part level Simplified Rep without firstregenerating the part’s master Rep.

SHRINKWRAP

Shrinkwrap CapabilitiesA Shrinkwrap:

• Provides an extremely ‘lightweight’ method for representingcomponents or entire assemblies.

• Can be used inside of Simplified reps.

• Allows for distribution of complex design information.

• Provides representations of designs to suppliers and customers, whileprotecting proprietary design information.

• Creates accurate representations, including:

� Surface appearance and colors.

� Mass properties.

� Space claims for range of component motion usingMechanism.

• Reduces data size by 70-90% resulting in:

� Less time to retrieve data sets for visualization.

� Less hardware resources needed to work with data sets.

� Less time needed to transfer data over networks.



NOTES

SHRINKWRAP TYPESThere are two types of Shrinkwrap:

• Exported Shrinkwrap models.

• Associative Shrinkwrap features.

Exported Shrinkwrap ModelsExported shrinkwrap models are created through the Save a Copy menu,and are non-associative. This creates a new part model which is ashrinkwrap of the model or assembly in the active window.

The type of geometry created in the shrinkwrap depends on the creationmethod used:

• Surface Subset – Creates a non-parametric surface model. Theamount of surfaces included is dependent on the quality setting andother options.

• Merged Solid – (Assemblies only) Merges part models in an assemblytogether to form one solid part.

• Faceted Solid – Creates a faceted solid that is representative of theoriginal solid. How closely the faceted solid maps to the originalgeometry is dependent on the quality setting and other options.

Exported Shrinkwrap Dialogs

Other options for exported shrinkwrap models are managed in thefollowing dialog boxes.



NOTES

Figure 20: Options for Exported Shrinkwrap



NOTES

Shrinkwrap Examples

Surface Subset

Figure 21: Original Transmission: File Size 147MB

Figure 22: Surface Subset: File Size 23MB



NOTES

Merged Solid

Figure 23: Original Engine: File Size 591MB

Figure 24: Merged Solid: File Size 18MB



NOTES

Faceted Solid

Figure 25: Original Transmission: File Size 147MB

Figure 26: Faceted Solid: File Size 17MB



NOTES

Associative Shrinkwrap Features• Are created in a new or existing component or assembly.

• Are accessed through the Data Sharing menu.

• Are associative, since they can be parametrically updated to reflectchanges made in the source geometry.

• Only have the Surface Subset method of creation.

• Promote data sharing and reuse in other assemblies.

Associative Shrinkwrap Feature Types

• Internal Shrinkwrap – Created using the Shrinkwrap option.

� Available as an assembly level feature, or a part level feature ofa component in the context of an assembly.

� Uses geometry from a set of components in the currentassembly as a source.

• External Shrinkwrap – Created using the ExtShrinkwrap orShrinkwrap from Other Model option.

� Available as an assembly level feature, a part level feature of acomponent in the context of an assembly or in an individual partmodel.

� Uses geometry from any selected or retrieved model as asource.

� Locates the source geometry by coordinate system.

Creating Associative Shrinkwrap Features

• Attributes – Quality level (1-10) and options for filling / ignoringsurfaces.



NOTES

Figure 27

• Component Subset – Components are marked as Consider or Ignorefor shrinkwrap creation in the model tree.

• Subset Handling – Order of operations for creating shrinkwrap.

� Shrinkwrap and Select – Create shrinkwrap, then selectcomponents specified in Component Subset.

� Select and Shrinkwrap – Select components specified inComponent Subset, then create shrinkwrap.

• Additional Srfs – Select additional surfaces to be included inshrinkwrap.

• Include Datums – Select additional datum features to be included inshrinkwrap.

• Geom Dependency – Allows you to toggle the shrinkwrap fromDependent to Independent and back.

• Externalize – Converts the shrinkwrap to External.

Updating Associative Shrinkwrap Features

There are two ways to update a shrinkwrap:

• Regenerating the model(s) – This will effectively update theshrinkwrap for most dimensional and other moderate changes.

• Using Update Shrinkwrap on the shrinkwrap feature – This will allowthe shrinkwrap to recalculate itself, accounting for major changes suchas addition / removal of components.



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you practice with simplified reps and shrinkwrap

features, which are key tools for working with large assemblies.

Method

In Exercise 1, you will create various Simplified Reps, utilizing Rep levelsand selection rules.

In Exercise 2, you will create and use shrinkwrap as a tool to createenvelope models.

EXERCISE 1: Creating Assembly Simplified Reps

Task 1. Open the engine assembly and setup display.

1. Set the working directory to the folder, which matches the name ofthis module.

2. Open CART_ENGINE.ASM.

3. Turn off the display of all datum features.

4. Click Utilities > Environment and ensure that Colors is enabled.Click Ok.

5. If necessary, enable transparency by clicking View > DisplaySettings > Model Display. Select the Shade tab, and clickTransparency > Ok.



NOTES

Figure 28: Original Assembly (Master Rep)

Note:

Depending on your graphics card, you may wish to change thetransparency level to clearly view the internal enginecomponents. Click View > Model Setup > Color andAppearance. Then click Modify from Model, and selectthe engine block. Select Advanced, and drag theTransparency bar accordingly.

Task 2. Create a Simplified Rep with Exclude as the Default Rule

1. Click Simplified Rep > Create. Type [STATIONARY_COMP]as the name.

2. Click Exclude Comp as the default rule to exclude all componentsin this assembly except those that you will explicitly select.

3. Click Update Screen. No components will be displayed.

Task 3. Select the components to include in this Simplified Rep.

1. Expand the model tree to view both columns.



NOTES

2. Click Master Rep and select ENG_BLOCK.PRT, ENG_HEAD.PRT,and ENG_SIDE_COVER.PRT from the Model Tree.

3. Click Update Screen. Notice that several components are visuallymissing, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 29: Stationary_Comp Rep

Note:

Remember Pro/E allows you to remove components that havechildren using Simplified Reps without addressing parent/childrelationships.

4. Click Done and File > Erase > Not Displayed. Notice that theother models from the assembly are listed and click Ok.

5. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok. Noticethe erased components are retrieved back into session.



NOTES

Figure 30

Task 4. Create a Simplified Rep with Master Rep as the Default Rule

1. From the Simplified Rep menu, click Create and type [INTERNAL]as the name.

2. Click Master Rep as the default rule.

3. Click Exclude and select the ENG_MTR_SKEL and ENG_BLOCKfrom the model tree.

4. Click Update Screen.

Figure 31



NOTES

Task 5. Experiment with selection options.

1. Click Exclude > From/To, and select the ENG_SIDE_COVER andENG_FLYWHL from the model tree.


Figure 32

3. Click Exclude > By Rule.

4. Select Geometric > Size > Absolute > Less Than, type [5.25],and click Evaluate.

5. Notice the new components marked as Exclude in the model tree.Click Update Screen.



NOTES

Figure 33

6. Click Undo Last > Update Screen.

7. Click Done > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok.

Task 6. Create a Rep using Geometry Rep as the Default Rule.

1. Click Create and type [COVER_MOD]. Select Geometry Rep as thedefault rule.

2. At this point, there is component data that can be erased toimprove performance. Click Done and File > Erase > NotDisplayed. Notice the entries in the list and click Ok.

Task 7. Configure the Rep for modification of the Cover.

1. Further define the Rep. Click Redefine > COVER_MOD > Ok.

2. Click Exclude > By Rule > Properties > Model Name.

3. Type [*ON*] and click Evaluate > Update Screen. Notice that theENG_CONNECT_ROD and ENG_PISTON models are excluded.

4. Select the ENG_MTR_SKEL and click Update Screen.



NOTES

Figure 34

5. Click Graphics Rep, select the ENG_HEAD and ENG_FLYWHL,and click Update Screen. There should be no visual difference.

Note:

Remember that the display of components in Graphics Rep isdependant on the Save_Model_Display config option. Inthis case, the models were saved with the Shading_Highoption.

6. Click Master Rep and select the ENG_SIDE_COVER.

7. Observe the model tree. Notice components are now in fourdifferent Rep states (Master, Geometry, Graphics, Exclude).

8. Click Done and File > Erase > Not Displayed. Notice the modelslisted and click Ok.

9. Click Done/Return > Regenerate > Automatic.

Task 8. Investigate selection capabilities of the components.

1. Click Analysis > Measure. Select any edge(s) of theENG_FLYWHL, and notice that it is not selectable, since it is inGraphics Rep.

2. Select any edge(s) from the ENG_BLOCK. Notice that these areselectable, since it is in Geometry Rep.



NOTES

3. Close the Measure dialog box.

4. Click Modify. Select anywhere on the ENG_FLYWHL. Again, itdoesn’t register.

5. Select the ENG_BLOCK. Read the message window.

Task 9. Make modifications to the cover

1. Zoom in as shown in the following figure.

Figure 35

2. Click Analysis > Measure. Set the Type to Diameter.

3. Since the ENG_SHAFT is in Geometry Rep, select the surfaceshown in the following figure.

Figure 36

4. Note the diameter value (1.25) and click Close.

5. Click Modify and select the hole in the ENG_SIDE_COVER asshown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 37

6. Modify the hole diameter as shown in the following figure toaccommodate for a bearing to be assembled.

Figure 38

Note:

In this case, you could not ‘accidentally’ modify the diameterof the shaft since it is in Geometry Rep.

7. Click Regenerate > Automatic.

8. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep > Ok.

9. Save (do not close) the Assembly.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Using Shrinkwrap and Substitutionin Simplified Reps

Task 1. Create a shrinkwrap envelope on the cylinder head.

1. Click Design Mgr > Envelope> Create, and type [HEAD_ENV].

2. Select the ENG_HEAD and click Done.

3. Configure the dialog box as shown in the following figure.

Figure 39

4. Click OK, wait for the shrinkwrap to calculate, and click Done.

Note:

You must be in the Master Rep of the assembly to enable theshrinkwrap options above.

Task 2. Create a shrinkwrap envelope on the clutch assembly.

1. From the Envelope menu, click Create, and type [CLUTCH_ENV].

2. Select the ENG_CLUTCH.ASM from the model tree and clickDone.



NOTES


Figure 40

4. Click OK, wait for the shrinkwrap to calculate, and click Done >Done Return > Done Return.

Task 3. Create a non-associative faceted solid shrinkwrap of the engineblock.

1. Select the engine block and click RMB > Open.

Figure 41

2. Click Setup > Density and type [0.098].



NOTES

3. Click File > Save a Copy, set the Type to Shrinkwrap, andclick Ok.


Figure 42

5. Click Preview, and wait for the shrinkwrap to appear.



NOTES

Figure 43

6. Click Create. When the dialog box opens, click Window >BLOCK_FCT_SHRNK > File > Save.

7. Close the dialog box and the engine block window.

Task 4. Create an Interchange assembly for the engine block

1. Click File > New > Assembly > Interchange.

2. Type [BLOCK_INTCH] and click Ok.

3. Click Component > Add, select the Eng_block.prt, and clickOpen.

4. Notice the component was added as a functional component.

Note:

The designation represents a functional component, while

represents a simplify component.

5. Add another block as a simplify component. Click Add > SimplifyComponent > Ok.

6. Select the Block_fct_shrnk.prt and click Open.



NOTES

Figure 44

7. Click . The blocks are now assembled on top of each other.Click Ok.

8. Select the Mass Properties tab and select the Properties of aspecified functional component option.

9. Click Compute and accept the default accuracy value.

10. Click Default > Ok.

11. Click File > Save and close the window.

Task 5. Create a Simplified Rep that substitutes the two envelopes justcreated.

1. If necessary, Open the Engine assembly in its Master Rep, andActivate the Engine Assembly window.

2. Click Simplified Rep > Create and type [ENVELOPES]. SelectGeometry Rep as the default rule.

3. Click Master Rep and select the engine block.

Note:

The component to be substituted with an interchange assemblyneeds to be in its Master Rep.

4. Click Substitute > By Envelope > HEAD_ENV > UpdateScreen.



NOTES

5. Zoom in as shown and note that the head now has no holes andsome surfaces have been left out.

Figure 45

6. Click Substitute > By Envelope > CLUTCH_ENV >Update Screen.

7. Notice the small clutch surfaces left out due to low quality levels.

Figure 46

Task 6. Substitute using the interchange assembly you created.

1. Click Substitute and select the ENG_BLOCK.

2. Select By Interchange Assembly and click Browse.

3. Expand BLOCK_INTCH and select BLOCK_FCT_SHRNK.

4. Click Ok > Ok > Update Screen.



NOTES

Figure 47

5. Click Done and Save the Assembly.

Task 7. Shrinkwrap the entire engine in a separate part model.

1. Click Simplified Rep > Set Current > Master Rep Ok.

2. Click File > New > Part, type [ENGINE_SW], and click Ok.

3. From the new part, click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrapfrom Other Model.

4. Click Open, select Cart_Engine.asm and click Open.

5. Click Default, set the Quality to [4] and click Done.

6. Click Component Subset > Define.

7. Click Ignore > All. Notice the Ignore status in the model tree.

8. Click Consider > By Rule > Geometric > Exterior Comps >Evaluate.

9. Notice that several components are now set to Consider in themodel tree.

10. Click Done > Ok.

11. The entire engine assembly is now represented by a singleassociative shrinkwrap feature in the model tree.



NOTES

Figure 48

12. This model could now easily be used to create an interchangeassembly with the actual engine assembly, and then be substitutedin a higher level assembly.




NOTES



OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Creating Part LevelSimplified Reps

Task 1. Open the engine head to create a simplified version of it.

1. Open the ENG_HEAD.

Figure 49

Task 2. Create a simplified version of this part showing only the basicshape and the important mounting locations.

1. Click Simplfd Rep > Create. Type [HEAD_NO_FINS] as the name.

2. Click Exclude Feat > Regenerate > Whole Model > Done.

Tips & Techniques:

If the part regenerates slowly, you could use Accelerateinstead of Regenerate to retrieve it faster (you can set thisoption later by selecting Attributes from the EDITMETHOD menu).



NOTES

3. Click Features > Include > From/To.

4. From the Model Tree, select DTM1 and Round id 65. Notice thatthe system now includes all of the features between DTM1 and theround.

Figure 50

5. Click Done > Done/Return. The simplified part should display asshown in the following figure.

Figure 51



NOTES

Tips & Techniques:

To view the Rep with the included features only, click UpdateScreen. If you inadvertently select a feature toinclude/exclude, click Default and select the feature to set itback to the default rule.

Task 3. Create a Simplified Rep that shows a cutaway of this part. Usean accelerator file for faster retrieval.

1. Click Set Current > Master Rep > OK.

2. Click Create and type [HEAD_CUTAWAY] as the name.

3. Click Include Feat > Accelerate > Whole Model > Done.

4. Click Work Region > Extrude > Solid > Done > Both Sides >Done.

5. Select DTM1 as the sketching plane and click Okay to accept thedefault direction for viewing.

6. Click Top and select DTM2.

7. From the references dialog, Delete DTM3 and select the outermostvertical edges of the part as references.

8. Turn off the display of datum planes and sketch a single horizontalline as shown in the following figure.

Figure 52

9. Click and Flip the arrow upward if necessary. Click Okay.



NOTES

10. Click Thru All > Done > Thru All > Done.

11. Click OK to complete the work region. Click Done Return >Done Return.

12. Spin the model and notice the cutaway section. The Rep shoulddisplay as shown in the following figure.

Figure 53


Task 4. Create a Simplified Rep in the engine assembly, substituting thepart Rep that you just created.

1. Open the CART_ENGINE.ASM. If necessary, set the current Rep toMaster Rep.

2. Click Simplified Rep > Create. Type [HEAD_CUT_REP] and clickExclude Comp as the default rule.

3. Begin the new Rep creation by using a previously defined Rep as astarting point. Click Master Rep > By Rep >STATIONARY_COMP > OK.




NOTES

Task 5. Change the Rep of the ENG_HEAD.PRT.

1. Click Substitute, Select the ENG_HEAD part and click Browse toview the Simplified reps in that model.

2. Select HEAD_NO_FINS and Click OK > OK > Update Screen.

Figure 54

3. Click Substitute, Select the ENG_HEAD part and click Browse toview the Simplified reps in that model.

4. Select HEAD_CUTAWAY and Click OK > OK > Update Screen.

Figure 55

5. Save the models, Close all windows and click Erase > NotDisplayed.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you have learned how to:

• Create Simplified representations using predefined or customizedrepresentations.

• Create part and assembly level Simplified representations.

• Use substitution in Simplified reps.

• Create a Shrinkwrap feature.


Page 10-1

Module

Top-Down Design and LayoutsIn this module you learn how to use concurrent design techniques to

develop models in a top-down design environment. You also learn

how to use layouts to control the design intent of an assembly in a

top-down design environment.

Objectives


• Identify a project’s design intent.

• Use 2-dimensional (2-D) layouts and engineering notebooks to setup and document designs.

• Define assembly structures.

• Create new parts and subassemblies while working in an assembly.

• Copy geometry between assembly components.

• Propagate design intent from top-level data into subassemblies.

• Build a layout or engineering notebook.

• Link parts to layouts.



NOTES

DEFINING TOP-DOWN DESIGN TECHNIQUESPro/ENGINEER offers several methods that you can use to successfullydesign in a top-down environment. It provides you with many tools tointerrogate assemblies and determine how they are built.

Identifying Design IntentUsing Pro/ENGINEER, you can plan your designs before creating anymodels. Before performing any work in Pro/ENGINEER, you can savetime and also increase design accuracy by:

• Sketching preliminary geometry.

• Defining critical sizing and fit information.

• Establishing relationships between model parameters.

• Specifying how components are to be assembled.

You can then use the layout functionality to control the design at all pointsthough out the development process.

Using Assembly StructuresUsing the following techniques, you can define the structure of theassembly prior to creating or assembling all of the components.

Creating New Subassemblies

You use the CREATION OPTIONS dialog box to:

• Copy existing assemblies.

• Place the three default datum planes directly into the assembly withoutmanually adding placement constraints.

• Define only the subassembly’s existence in the assembly structure.


Top-Down Des ign and Layouts Page 10-3

NOTES

Figure 1: Creating an Assembly

Note:

When you select Leave Component Unplaced and CopyFrom Existing or Empty from the CREATION OPTIONSdialog box, the system displays the component in the ModelTree—but not in the actual assembly window—even if thecomponent contains geometry.

Copying Existing Geometry

You can define a new subassembly by copying an existing assembly. Startassembly files are particularly useful if you would like to use thesubassembly immediately; however, you cannot copy the assembly if itcontains any components.

Defining Default Datum Planes

You can create a new subassembly by placing the three default datumplanes directly in the assembly. This technique saves time, because you donot have to start a subassembly in a separate assembly window, and youdo not have to manually add assembly constraints.



NOTES

Defining Empty Subassemblies

You can define the existence of the subassembly in an assembly structure,that is, in the Bill of Materials (BOM) and Model Tree, by creating anassembly that contains no geometry.

Creating Parts without Geometry

Using the same methods described above for creating new subassemblies,you can also create new parts without geometry by defining their existencein the assembly structure.

• Copying Existing Parts – When you copy a start part or otherexisting part, you can use constraints to assemble it or leave itunplaced.

• Locating Default Datums – Without creating the actual partgeometry, you can place the three default datum planes directly in theassembly.

• Empty – The system lists an empty part file in the Model Tree withoutdisplaying any features in the graphics window. You can place theempty part in the default position, or leave it unplaced. This allowsyou to indicate the part’s existence in the assembly BOM.

During or after development of your product model, you can createfeatures in the part by using Modify >Mod Part. Using the Copy FromExisting option, you can copy start part information to obtain theappropriate position and constraints; however, you may need to redefinethe placement of the part.

Placing Components in the Default Position

You can include a component as a member of an assembly withoutactually placing it in the assembly window. This allows you to list thecomponent as a member of the assembly, even if the component is notready to be assembled (for example, it does not have geometry). If you arenot ready to specify constraints yet, you can assemble a componentquickly into a default position to view it in the assembly and Bill ofMaterials. The default position for a component is the point at which itsorigin matches up with the origin of the assembly.

Packaging Components

Using the Package functionality, you can place a component in theassembly window without specifying exact placement constraints.



NOTES

Defining Object Relationships in Pro/INTRALINK

You can use Pro/INTRALINK to set up assembly structures—or virtualassemblies within a workspace.

Using Assembly SkeletonsYou can use skeletons to create a 3D layout of an assembly, simulatemotion, space plan, and to visualize the assembly design withoutdeveloping the components. Later, you can use the skeleton as a centralreference that you can change to update components by passinginformation down through the assembly structure.

To convey design intent from the skeletons to the assembly components,you can:

• Design features in the parts with external references to the skeleton.

• Design features in the parts without external references to theskeletons, but use the skeleton as a guideline.

• Reference higher level skeletons with subassembly skeletons.

• Use relations through the skeleton to control parts, or use relations in alayout to control the skeleton and components.

Concept Blocks

Instead of creating fully developed components and subassemblies toplace in an assembly, you can create simple parts that represent them.Later, you can use these blocks in the assembly to develop space claimstemporarily, while you develop the final models. Using various methods,you can replace the components later in the design.

Copying Reference Geometry between ModelsWhen modifying parts or subassemblies in Assembly mode, you can usethe Copy Geom feature to copy reference geometry from one model toanother.

Using this feature in a top-down design allows you to:

• Control change propagation by redefining the dependency for the copygeometry feature.



NOTES

• Copy skeleton data into parts for feature design in Part mode, or intosubassemblies or their skeletons for design in subassembly windows.

• Create map parts.

• Provide a visible entity for an external reference.

• Consolidate external references into a single feature.

• Copy references to subassemblies that can have external references.

USING PRO/ENGINEER LAYOUTA layout is a centralized location in which you can develop, capture, andcontrol the design intent of your project models. The information that youcan include in a layout is similar to the information that you would find inan engineering notebook, such as:

• 2-D non-parametric sketched geometry

• Design notes

• Global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems forautomatic assembly

• Global dimensions and parameters

• Tabulated data

• Global relations

Using an engineering notebook or layout, you can:

• Access and control several models from one centralized location byconsolidating critical parameters.

• Drive any number of geometric models and drawings.

• Ensure the proper fit and size of design components.

Using the Where Used functionality in the RELATIONS menu, you caneasily determine which parts and assemblies have global datums andparameters that belong to a notebook.



NOTES

Capturing the Design ProcessPro/ENGINEER enables you to capture your design intent and control itthroughout the development of your project.

It is important to add as much information to your layout as possible tomake it easily understandable. If the notebook becomes too complicated,you can create an additional notebook and connect the two.

Creating Engineering NotebooksTo create an engineering notebook, you begin by initializing the layout.The creation of a notebook is similar to that of a production drawing. Youset a sheet size, and add multiple sheets, if necessary.

You can build several notebooks for one design project, and eachnotebook can consist of several sheets. You can create a notebook for theoverall project and additional notebooks for the subassemblies of thedesign.

Sketching DesignsTo sketch your design, you create geometry using the same 2-D draftingtools that are available for production drawings. The geometry can be assimple or as complex as you want it to be. Pro/ENGINEER does not uselayout geometry to create your parts.

Figure 2: Example of Draft Geometry



NOTES

Documenting Components with Balloons

To document your design, you can use balloons to call out thecomponents, and then label them in the lower left corner of your layout.You can also add text notes to display information, such as project name,material, cost.

Figure 3: Adding Balloons and Notes to a Layout

Controlling Designs with Global InformationThe power of a Pro/ENGINEER layout increases with the addition ofparameters. By incorporating global dimensions and parameters into yourlayout, you can control key elements of your design.

Figure 4: Adding Parameter Dimensions



NOTES

To increase the power of your layout and capture your design intent, youcan:

• Use relations to interrelate parameters.

• Use parameter sets to change parameter values automatically.

• Add global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems toenable automatic assembly.

Interrelating Parameters with Relations

By adding relations, you can:

• Increase the level of design intent controlled by the layout.

• Set up global relations, so that one global dimension obtains its valuefrom a relation with another global value.

• Develop the relationships between the parameters, even if thecomponents that they will control do not exist.

Organizing Layouts

You can use tables to organize the parameters and relationships that youadd to the layout.

Figure 5: Adding Parametric Tables



NOTES

Changing Parameter Values Automatically

In the Layout mode, you use parameter sets to change parameter valuesautomatically.

Figure 6: Big Bolt Instance Set Applied

Enabling Automatic Assembly

By adding global datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems to thenotebook, you can set up your layout to enable automatic assembly.

You define all of the surfaces and axes that are necessary to assemble onecomponent to another using the Align command. The system referencesthe features when it assembles a part.

Figure 7: Adding Global Datum Planes and Axes

Note:

A layout limits user access to your design. Once you havecreated a layout to control the geometry of your model, youcannot change it at the part or assembly level. The layoutcontrols the parameters, dimensions, and features. Only userswho can access the layout can make modifications to these keyparameters.



NOTES

Linking Parts to LayoutsWhen you use an engineering notebook to design a part, it is important tounderstand the layout and the global information it contains. For example,if you add a global dimension to a layout, it should indicate to the designerthat this is a critical dimension that should be used in designing the part.

Using Global DimensionsWhen you want a part to reference a global dimension, you must declarethe part to the layout. When you declare a part to a layout, you create adirect connection between them—that is, the part can now reference thelayout for certain values.

Note:

Pro/ENGINEER automatically retrieves the layout into RAMwhen you retrieve a part that has been declared to it.

Writing Assembly Relations

Relations are mathematical equations involving symbolic dimensions andparameters that you can use to capture design intent. They enable you totake advantage of the parametric nature of Pro/ENGINEER.

When you use dimensions in relations, you use them in their symbolicform. Symbolic dimensions at the assembly level have an additional suffixon the end, referred to as a coding symbol. All dimensions with the samecoding symbol (i.e., d0:8, d12:8, d25:8) belong to the same part.

Note:

If the assembly is in RAM, you cannot modify the dependentvariable of the relation, even at the part level. If the assemblyis not in RAM, you can modify it at the part level. Once youretrieve the assembly, the system resets the part to the valuedictated by the relation.



NOTES

The following figure shows an example of an assembly relation. Therelation always makes the hole diameter (d2:0) larger than the shaftdiameter (d0:2) by .005.

Figure 8: Assembly Relation

Capturing Design IntentYou can design a model in various ways. Using any of the followingtechniques, you can capture and preserve design intent with differentresults.

• Making modifications manually – Without using relations or alayout, you must control the design intent and ensure proper fit andfunction when dimensional changes are made to the model.

• Using assembly relations – You can automate the modifications tothe models to ensure proper fit and function.

• Part relations through assembly mode – You must have the drivingpart in RAM, because the driving part controls the dependent partdimensions.

• Part and assembly relations in a notebook – You can make allchanges in the central layout, because all parts and assemblies are tiedto the layout.

d2:0 = d0:2 + .005



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you create and develop layouts in the design process

without modeling a part or assembly.

Methods

In Exercise 1, you use a layout to propagate a change throughout anassembly. The change has such a dramatic effect, it would have been verydifficult to manage manually.

In Exercise 2, you develop a layout to drive the components in an engineassembly to develop parameters and relationships without assemblies andcomponents. You also develop control of existing components in anassembly.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Top-Down Design and Layouts

Icons DescriptionCreate Lines

Select

EXERCISE 1: Using Layouts

Task 1. Open the go-cart assembly.


Note:

To achieve the best performance, you should retrieve the go-cart assembly while in wireframe representation.

2. Open GO_CART.ASM.



NOTES

Task 2. Attempt to change the frame width directly.

1. Click Modify > Mod Part > Sel By Menu.

2. In the SELECTION TOOLS dialog box, select FRAME.PRT andclick Select.

3. Select the feature that controls the frame width. In the GETSELECT menu. Click Sel by menu. Select MAIN_FRAME fromthe SELECTION TOOL dialog box and click Select.

4. All of the dimensions that control the size of the frame now displayas shown in the following figure.

Figure 9: Frame Width Dimension

5. Select the 20.0 dimension controlling the width of the frame.Read the prompt displayed in the MESSAGE AREA. The systeminforms you that this dimension is driven in FRAME by relationD11=frame_width.

Task 3. A layout documents this design and controls it. Open the layout,view all the sheets then change the FRAME_WIDTH parameter.

1. Open GO-CART.LAY. Click File > Open. Select GO-CART.LAY,then click Open. Notice that the first sheet is simply a cover sheetshowing the completed go-cart.



NOTES

2. To view the next sheet, click Sheets > Next. Notice that theSHEET 2 organizes the assembly, and defines the majorcomponents and their placement during the initial development ofthe go-cart.

3. Click Next to view the SHEET 3. Notice that it defines thedimensions governing the size of the go-cart.

4. Click Next to view the SHEET 4. Notice that as the designprogressed, more details were added to the layout to define theposition of the user interface (seat and controls).

5. View the remaining sheets. Notice that, as the design progressed,the layout also progressed.

6. Click Previous several times to go back to SHEET 3. Click SetCurrent, type [3]; then click Done/Return.

Task 4. Change the frame width.

1. Click Edit > Value and select the FRAME_WIDTH dimension fromthe table on the layout. Change its value to 40. In the LAYOUTmenu, click Regenerate. Notice that this causes several errors todisplay in the error box. The errors occurred because the frame istoo wide to allow room for the suspension.

Note:

This type of early error detection is another powerful use oflayouts. Without this detection, you would not discover theerror until you regenerated the assembly and the system placedyou in the Resolve environment.



NOTES

Changeddimension

Figure 10: Modifying FRAME_WIDTH to 40 Produces Errors

2. To correct this problem, make the FRAME_WIDTH value morereasonable. Change the value to 30 and regenerate. The error boxshould now indicate that there are no errors remaining.

Note:

If your error box does not say NO ERRORS, do not proceed.This indicates that you still have a problem and will not beable to regenerate the assembly successfully.

Task 5. Change to the assembly window and regenerate the go-cart toview the effect that takes place.

1. Change to the go-cart assembly window. Click Window >GO_CART.ASM




NOTES

3. Notice that the system completely updated the assembly, includingthe frame and all other affected components, by making thefollowing changes:

• Increased the width of the frame part.

• Replaced the front and rear wishbones with shorter parts.

• Replaced the top suspension links with shorter parts.

• Replaced the tie rod links with shorter parts.

• Replaced the steering rack with a longer rack.

• Replaced the main axle with a longer axle.

• Replaced the half axles with shorter parts.

• Changed the left and right front wings to fit the new frame.

Figure 11: Modified Go-Cart Assembly

4. Erase the assembly and the associated model, click File > Erase

Current. Click > OK.

5. Erase the layout from memory, click File > Erase > Current >Yes.

6. To erase the generic assembly members, click File > Erase > NotDisplayed > OK.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Developing Layouts

Task 1. Start the creation of a layout called ENGINE.

1. Click File > New > Layout. Type [engine] as the name. ClickOK.

2. To specify the drawing sheet size, In the NEW LAYOUT dialogbox, from the STANDARD SIZE list, select A. Click OK. Thedrawing border displays on the screen.

Task 2. Import an IGES file into the layout to initiate the developmentof a figure.

1. To import a file, click Insert > Data from File.

2. Select PARTIAL_SECTION.IGS, then click Open. The sectionrepresents part of a piston assembly, without the piston.

Figure 12: Imported IGES File

Task 3. Develop a 2-D sketch in the layout to represent the piston.

1. Select Sketch > Parametric Sketch.



NOTES

2. Click Utilities > Sketcher Preferences and select the option tosnap to Horizontal/Vertical. Close the window.

3. Create a crossed pair of two construction lines to use as a guide.Click Sketch > Construction Line > Crossed Pair.

4. In the REFERENCES dialog box, click . Select the top vertexand the center of the circle from the imported geometry asreferences. Click Done Sel.

Figure 13: Sketch References

5. Sketch a vertical line from the top vertex to the bottom vertex.

6. Click [Create Lines] and draw a vertical line to represent theleft side of the piston.

Figure 14: Sketching the Piston



NOTES

7. Sketch a horizontal line representing the top of the piston.

8. Sketch another horizontal line to represent the base of the piston.

9. Mirror the vertical line about the vertical construction line. Closethe REFERENCES dialog box. From the LAYOUT menu, clickTools > Mirror. Select the vertical line and click Done Sel. Selectthe vertical construction line.

Smallradius

Figure 15: Mirroring the Vertical Line

10. Trim the lines so that they form a box. Click Trim > Corner.Select the mirrored vertical line and the upper horizontal line.

11. Repeat the same step for the lower horizontal line.

12. Click Done/Return to exit from the TOOLS menu.

Task 4. Clarify what the geometry represents by annotating the drawing.

1. Create balloons attached to the section. Click Insert > Balloon >Leader > Make Note. Select the small radius (as the item to whichthe system should attach the note). Click Done Sel > Done.

2. In the DISPLAY area, select where the balloon should display.

3. Type [crank_shaft] as the name of the component.



NOTES

4. Create another balloon for the piston representation. In the NOTESTYPE menu, retain the selections and click Make Note. Select theright vertical line. Click Done Sel > Done. Select location forballoon, type [piston], and click Done/Return.

Figure 16: Adding the Balloons

5. If necessary, move the balloons. Click . Drag the balloon to thenew location, then click once to place the balloon.

6. If necessary, move the note that documents the names. Click ,press and hold <SHIFT> and select both the text lines that youcreated. Drag the notes.

Task 5. Document the layout of the engine further by addingdimensions to the section.

1. Add a dimension for the diameter of the piston called PISTON_DIAClick Insert > Dimension > New References. Select the top

horizontal line representing the piston. Click to place thedimension.

2. Type [piston_dia] as the name, and type [3.00] as the value.



NOTES

3. To create another dimension for the connecting rod length, Select

the slanted line, then click . Type [rod_length] as the name,and type [5.00] as the value.

4. Create a diameter dimension for the stroke, represented by the

construction circle. Click the circle twice, then click . Type[stroke] as the name, and type [4.00] as the value.

5. Return to the LAYOUT menu.

6. If necessary, move the dimensions. Position the diameterdimension vertically on the screen.

Figure 17: Adding the Dimensions

7. Convert the diameter dimension to linear. Click and select theSTROKE dimension. Right-click the selected dimension. SelectToggle Type from the pop-up menu. The dimension now displayslinear.

8. Remove the diameter symbol from the text line. Right-click andselect Properties from the pop-up menu. Notice that thePROPERTIES dialog box opens. Click the DIMENSION TEXT tab.Using the arrow keys and backspace key, delete the portion of thetext line that reads {0:∅ }. Click OK.



NOTES

9. If necessary, move the dimension value.

Task 6. Organize the layout and make it easier to use by tabulating theparameters that you have created; then select a parameter directly from thetable to modify it’s value.

1. Create a table and locate it to the right of the figure. In theLAYOUT menu, click Table > Create > By Num Chars. Select apoint to define the left vertex of the table. Refer to the followingfigure.

selectthis point

Figure 18: Adding the Table

2. Notice the strings of numerals displayed next to the point that youhave chosen. To define the width of the columns as 15 characters,select the second 5 from the left. For the next column, select thesecond 5 from the left again to define the width of the second

column. Click to finish defining the column.

3. Define six rows to allow for two lines of text. Select 3 from thenumerals displayed on the screen.

4. Repeat the process to define six rows for the table; then click to finish.



NOTES

5. Change the justification of the cells. In the TABLE menu, clickMod Rows/Cols > Justify > Center > Middle. Select a cell ineach column. Read the prompt in the MESSAGE AREA.

6. Merge the cells at the top of the table to create one cell. In theTABLE menu, click Modify Table > Merge. Select the two cellsacross the top of the table.

7. Specify the title of the table. Click Enter Text. Select the top cell.Type [parameters] as the name; then press <ENTER> twice.

8. Using the method outlined in the previous step, type the names inthe left column, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 19: Entering Text

9. Add the parameter values in the right cell. Click Enter Text. Selectthe cell beside the STROKE entry. Type [&stroke] in the cell andpress <ENTER> twice. Notice that the system automatically addsthe parameter to the table.

10. Type the parameter values for ROD_LENGTH and PISTON_DIAusing the same method.

Note:

Do not add the values for CYLINDERS andDISPLACEMENT at this time.



NOTES

11. Click Done/Return to exit the TABLE menu.

Task 7. Add parameters to the layout to determine values for thecylinder and displacement entries in the table.

1. In the LAYOUT menu, click Done/Return > Relation > AddParam > Integer. Type [cylinders] as the name, and type [2] asthe value.

2. Show the existing parameters. Click Show Rel. Notice that theINFORMATION WINDOW lists the cylinder parameter, as well asthe other dimensional parameters. Click Close.

3. Add a parameter named DISPLACEMENT by writing arelationship to determine its value. In the RELATIONS menu, clickAdd and type the following relation:

/* calculate the displacement of the engine

displacement = pi * (( piston_dia/2 )^2 ) *stroke * cylinders

4. Add the new parameters into the table using the & symbol.

5. Confirm that the parameters have the correct values.

Figure 20: The Added Parameters



NOTES

Note:

Keep in mind the layout has no models declared to it yet.

6. Modify the stroke value to six. Click Edit > Value. Select the4.00 value beside the STROKE entry. Type [6.00]. Regeneratethe layout and note the change in the displacement value.

Task 8. Use the layout to drive an existing assembly.

1. Click File > Open to retrieve the ENGINE_LAYOUT.ASM.

2. Modify the length of one of the connecting rods. Click Modify >Mod Part. Select one of the CONNECTING_ROD_LO_PRT entriesfrom the Model Tree. Select the base protrusion and modify itslength from 5 to 10.

3. Regenerate the assembly. Click Regenerate > Automatic. Noticethat the connecting rods have pushed through the tops of thepiston.

4. Drive the connecting rod component using the layout. OpenCONNECTING_ROD_LO.PRT.

5. Show the relations of the model. Click Relations > Show Rel.Notice there are no relations for this model. Click Done.

6. Declare the part to the engine layout. In the PART menu, clickDeclare > Declare Lay. Select the ENGINE layout from themenu.

7. Show the relations of the model again. Click Relations > ShowRel. Notice that the parameters of the layout are now associated tothe part. Close the INFORMATION WINDOW.

8. Add a relationship to drive the length of the connecting rod fromthe layout. Select the base protrusion of the connecting rod. Noticethe dimension parameters that the system displays. Click ADD.Type the following relationship:

/* Length of rod controlled by layout

d83 = ROD_LENGTH



NOTES

Figure 21: Dimensions of the Rod

9. In the MODEL REL menu, click Done.

10. Regenerate the part. Notice that the rod returns back to the 5.00-inch length, since the layout now drives it.

11. Close the window.

Task 9. The piston will not update its location in the assembly becauseit was assembled to a component called a skeleton part instead of theconnecting rod. Change the layout so that it controls both the rod andskeleton, so that the assembly will update correctly.

1. Open LAYOUT_SKELETON.PRT. The system retrieves a modelconsisting of datum curves, axes and planes. Only the curves arevisible; the other features are on a layer and blanked.

2. Declare the model to the layout. Click Set up > Declare >Declare Lay. Select the ENGINE layout. Click Done.

3. Add a relation to the component to drive the stroke represented bythe circle. Click Relations. Select the circle and the bottom curveto show the dimensions. Click Add. Type the following relation ontwo lines:

/*drive the engine stroke from layout engine

d3 = STROKE



NOTES

4. Add another relationship to drive the length of the curve thatrepresents the connecting rod. Type the following two lines:

/*drive connecting rod length from layoutengine

d22 = ROD_LENGTH


Task 10. Drive the diameter of the piston from the layout.

1. Open PISTON_LO.PRT.

2. Declare the piston to the layout. Click Declare > Declare Lay.Select the ENGINE layout.

3. Add a relation to control the piston diameter from the layout. ClickRelations. Select the base protrusion of the piston. Click Add andtype the following:

/*Piston diameter is driven by layout engine

d2 = PISTON_DIA

Figure 22: Driving the Diameter of the Piston from the Layout

4. Save the piston and close the window.



NOTES

Task 11. You have declared the components to the layout and writtenrelations using the layout parameters. Control the assembly from thelayout.

1. Activate the layout window. Click Window > ENGINE.LAY:1.

2. Click Edit > Value. Change the values of STROKE from 6.00 to7.00, PISTON DIA from 3.00 to 4.00, and ROD LENGTH from5.00 to 10.00.

3. Regenerate and save the layout.

4. Activate the engine layout assembly. Click Window >ENGINE_LAYOUT.ASM.

5. Regenerate the assembly. Click Regenerate > Automatic. Noticethat the entire assembly updates correctly.

Original Assembly Modified Assembly

Figure 23: Modifying the Assembly

6. Save the assembly.

7. Erase the assembly and the associated model, click File > Erase

Current. Click > OK.

8. Erase the layout from memory, click File > Erase > Current >Yes.

9. To erase the generic assembly members, click File > Erase > NotDisplayed > OK.



NOTES

MODULE SUMMARYIn this module, you learned that:

• Layouts are useful in documenting the design process.

• Layouts can be created at any time during the design process.

• Layouts can be used to control the design from one central location.

• Models may be changed by changing the layout rather than by openingthe entire model to make a simple change.


Page 11-1

Module

Designing with SkeletonsIn this module you learn how to use skeleton models to develop

products in a top-down design environment.

Objectives


• Create a skeleton part.

• Relate assembly components to a skeleton.

• Use skeleton geometry for modeling.

• Control a skeleton model.

• Use various skeleton properties.



NOTES

USING SKELETON PARTSA skeleton part is a special part model created in the context of anassembly to develop design criteria without having to create componentsand assemble them together. The skeleton part is a 3-D layout of anassembly that is used as the framework to build the assembly.

You can use skeleton parts for:

• Interfaces – Skeletons can be created and employed as designinterfaces between components.

Figure 1: Plastic Container Interfaces

Figure 2: Engine Assembly Interfaces


Des igning w i th Skeletons Page 11-3

NOTES

• Staking Space Claims – Skeletons can be used to create space claimsfor subassemblies, which establishes an interface between the masterassembly and subassemblies in the model.

Figure 3: Space Claims for Subassemblies

• Determining Assembly Motion – Skeletons can specify themovement of an assembly, in order to establish complex linkagemotion before adding components.

Figure 4: Skeleton for Motion of Piston



NOTES

Creating the SkeletonYou can create a skeleton part in the assembly. You have full control ofthe level and the location of its existence.

Notes:

You can only create one skeleton in each assembly, butskeletons can exist in each subassembly that belongs to a top-level assembly. [You can have multiple skeletons in eachassembly with the config option “multiple_skeletons_allowed”set to “yes”].

If you create the skeleton after assembling the components, thesystem automatically redefines the placement of the skeletonas the first component using an “origin to origin” constraint.

To make it easier to use skeletons in your model, you can add layers andmodify the names of features.

Relating Assembly Components to SkeletonsYou can assemble components on to the skeleton part, establishing arelationship between the assembly components and the skeleton models, inorder to:

• Reduce the parent/child hierarchy – The skeleton becomes themaster parent to many of the components in the assembly.

Figure 5: Example of Parent/Child Relationship



NOTES

• Limit the scope for selecting constraints – The Reference Controloption in the Design Manager functionality allows you to assemblemodels only to the skeleton rather than to each other.

• Control component locations – You assemble the components to theskeleton, the system updates the components’ locations automaticallywhen you modify the space claims in the skeleton.

• Control motion at a centralized location – By modifying theskeleton component, you control the motion of a component linkage.

Using Skeleton Geometry for ModelingWhen you create or add a part to an assembly, you can reference skeletongeometry by copying it.

You also have the option to create geometry features. This offers thefollowing advantages over manually copying a skeleton feature:

• You can select different forms of geometry, such as axes, curves, andsurfaces in a single feature.

• The system automatically associates geometry features to layers of thesame name, if the selected feature is associated with a layer in theskeleton.

• The geometry automatically updates when the assembly containing thegeometry feature is in RAM.

• You can turn the dependency on and off, which allows you to controlchange propagation.

Controlling the Skeleton Model

You can control and modify the skeleton model in various ways. UsingModify > Mod Skel, you can modify assembly dimensions, as well as addand define geometry.

Defining Additional Skeleton Properties

The following additional skeleton properties help you to effectively useskeleton models in the development of your design:

• Deleting Skeletons – You can delete a skeleton model from theassembly, but removing it does not remove the skeleton part file fromthe disk.



NOTES

• Filtering the Skeleton from a Bill of Materials – When creating aBill of Materials (BOM) report in a production drawing usingPro/REPORT, Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically filter skeletonmodels from the display.

• Excluding Skeletons from Simplified Representations – You caneasily exclude skeleton models from simplified representations of anassembly. The Model Tree labels a skeleton model with a unique iconto distinguish it from other part models.

• Tracking – Pro/PDM and Pro/INTRALINK do not manage thereferences between the skeleton and the components, only therelationship between the assembly and the components.



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you create a skeleton part that can be used to simulate

motion in an assembly.

Method

In Exercise 1, you build a skeleton to represent the motion of a one-cylinder engine for the go-cart motor.

In Exercise 2, you set up a parent/child relationship between thecomponents and the skeleton model, assemble the crank shaft by copyingthe skeleton geometry, and then modify the crank shaft at the part level.

In Exercise 3, you make modifications to the skeleton assembly, changethe parameters in the associated layout, and verify the parent/childrelationship.

Tools

Table 1: Icons for Skeletons

Icons DescriptionInsert datum curve

Insert datum axis

Insert datum plane

Insert datum points

In Session



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Building the Motor Skeleton

Task 1. Create an assembly. Use a standard part file to create a skeletonmodel as the first part.


2. Create the SKEL_ENGINE.ASM. Click File > New > Assembly.Type [SKEL_ENGINE]. Click OK.

3. Click Component > Create > Skeleton Model > OK. In theCREATION OPTIONS dialog box, click Copy From Existing >Browse. Select the START_PART.PRT. Click Open > OK.

Note:

In the Model Tree, the system lists the skeleton part as the firstcomponent in the assembly. It automatically adds the datumsof the start part to the skeleton part. Notice the skeleton icon inthe Model Tree.

4. Save the assembly, then close the window.

Task 2. Develop the linkage for the crank and piston. Define a curve torepresent the stroke of the engine.

1. Click File > Open. Click . Select SKEL_ENGINE_SKEL.PRTand click OK.

2. Click > Sketch > Done. Select the FRONT datum as thesketching plane and click OKAY

3. Click Top and select the TOP datum plane.

4. Sketch a circle with a diameter of 4.00.

5. Finish creating the sketch and the feature.

6. Change to the DEFAULT view.



NOTES

Figure 6: Sketch for Circle

7. To create an axis, click > Two Planes. Select the SIDE andTOP datum planes.

Task 3. Create a sketched datum curve to represent the crankshaftconnecting rod connection.

1. Create a sketching plane for the curve. Click > Offset. Selectthe FRONT datum plane from which to offset.

2. Click Enter Value and type [1.75] and click Done.

Figure 7: New Sketching Plane



NOTES

3. Create the curve to represent the connection. Click > Sketch >Done.

4. Select DTM1 as the sketching plane and click Okay. Click Top andselect the SIDE datum plane.

5. In the REFERENCES dialog box, delete the F1(SIDE) reference.

6. Define the left side of the datum circle and the datum axis asreferences for sketching.

7. Sketch two lines, as shown in the following figure.

� The first line represents the crank rotation and is 30 degreesfrom the top datum plane.

� The second line represents the rod length and is of 5 length.

Endpoint toDatum AxisA-1

Endpoint tocircular

datumcurve

Endpoint toTOP datum

Figure 8: Sketch for Connecting Rod and Crank

8. Delete the tangent constraint, if there is a conflict.

9. Finish creating the sketch and the feature.

10. Change to the DEFAULT view. The model should appear as shownin the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 9: Connecting Rod Number One

Task 4. To aid in the assembly and component creation process, add adatum axis to represent the joints of the connecting rod and piston.

1. To create datum points through the vertices of the curves, click > On Vertex. Select the two vertices, as shown in the following

figure. Click > .

Select thesevertices.

Figure 10: Creating Datum Axis

2. Create a datum axis through the point PNT0. Click > Pnt Nrm

Pln. Select DTM1 and then select PNT0. Click > .

3. Using the same procedure, create another axis through the pointPNT1.



NOTES

Figure 11: Finished Skeleton

Tips & Techniques:

By setting the configuration file option repeat_datum_createto yes, you can reduce the number of menu selections that youhave to make to create multiple datums.

Task 5. Confirm that the skeleton’s motion is appropriate by modifyingthe angle on the datum curve. Automate the modification by using arelation. The relation should cause the angle to increment by 30 degreeseach time that you regenerate the part.

1. To check the skeleton motion, click Modify. Select a straight line.Change the 30 angle to 75 and regenerate.

2. Click Relations > Add Param > Real Number. Type[crank_angle] as the name. Type [0] as the parameter value.

3. Define the relation. Click Show Dim > , then select the one ofthe straight line. Make note of the symbolic name of the angledimension.



NOTES

4. Click Edit Rel. In the Notepad, type the following:

crank_angle = crank_angle +30

IF crank_angle > 340

crank_angle = 0

ENDIF

D# = crank_angle

[Where D# is the symbolic name for the angle]

In the Notepad, click File > Exit > Yes.

5. To finish defining the relations, click Done in the MODEL RELmenu.

6. Regenerate the model. Continue to regenerate until the sectionrotates back to 30 degrees from the TOP datum plane.

7. Save the part and close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating the Crank Model

Task 1. Investigate the associativity between the skeleton part and theassembly.

1. Open SKEL_ENGINE.ASM.

2. Note the full associativity. The system has updated the assembly toreflect all of the work that you performed in Part mode.

Note:

Once you added the default datums to the skeleton part, youcould create the other geometry in the assembly using Modify> Mod Skel.

Task 2. Set up this assembly such that components are children only tothe skeleton.

1. Click Design Mgr > Ref Control. In the EXTERNAL REFERENCECONTROL dialog box, select Skeleton Model.

2. Click OK > Done/Return.

Task 3. Set up datums in the skeleton so that the crank model retains itsorientation to its own datum planes when it rotates.

1. Click Modify > Mod Skel. Select the skeleton model.

2. To create a datum plane, click > Through. Select axis A_1 inthe skeleton. Click Through again. Select the axis shown in thefollowing figure. Click Done.



NOTES

Figure 12: Adding a Datum Plane

3. To create another datum plane, click > Through. Select axisA_1. Click Normal. Select DTM2 and click Done.

4. Return to the ASSEMBLY menu.

Figure 13: Completed Datums

Task 4. Define the crank shaft within the context of the assembly.

1. Click Component > Create. In the COMPONENT CREATE dialogbox, retain the selection PART and type [sample_shaft]. ClickOK > Locate Default Datums > Three Planes > OK.



NOTES

2. Select DTM3 on the skeleton to define the first plane.

3. Select DTM2 and the FRONT datum as the other two planes on theskeleton.

4. Click Done/Return.

Task 5. Copy references into the part to create the crank.

1. To copy the geometry from the skeleton into the shaft, in the FEATCLASS menu, click Data Sharing> Copy Geom.

2. In the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box, click Misc Ref > Define. Inthe MISC REF dialog box, click Axis. Select the axes shown in thefollowing figure. Click Dtm Plane. Select DTM1 in the skeletonpart. Click Ok.

Select thesetwo axes.

Select thisdatum.

Figure 14: Selecting Features to Copy

3. Click OK from the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box.




NOTES

Task 6. The system automatically adds the geometry to the sample shaftpart. Modify the shaft at the part level.

1. Open SAMPLE_SHAFT.PRT.

2. To create the central shaft of the part, click Insert > Protrusion >Extrude > Solid > Both Sides > Done.

3. Select DTM3 as the sketching plane then click Okay.

4. Click Top then select the DTM2 datum plane.

5. Sketch a circle of 1.25 diameter and finish the sketch.

6. Define the depth as 12.25.

Figure 15: Sketch for Central Shaft

7. Finish defining the protrusion.

8. Create a protrusion on DTM4. Click Insert > Protrusion >Extrude > Solid > Both Sides > Done.

9. Select DTM4 as the sketching plane and click Okay.

10. Click Top and select DTM2.

11. Specify axis A1 and A2 as references.

12. Sketch the section shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 16: Sketch for Crank Lobe

13. Finish defining the feature with depth as 2.

14. Cut away the opening for the connecting rod. Create an extrudedcut on both sides using the same sketching and reference plane.Create a circle for the section as shown in the following figure.Remove the material from the outside of the section. Extrude to adepth of 1.5.

Figure 17: Sketch for Cut



NOTES

Figure 18: The Completed Sample Shaft

15. Save the part file and close the window.

16. Open SKEL_ENGINE.ASM again. Notice that the sample shaftupdated. Regenerate the assembly a few times to confirm that theshaft maintains its relationship with the assembly.

17. Save and the assembly.

18. Erase the assembly and associated models from memory.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Using the Skeleton to Complete theAssembly

Task 1. Make modifications to COMPLETE_SKELETON.ASM.

1. Open COMPLETE_SKELETON.ASM.

2. An assembly cut was added so that you can see the detail in thecomponents.

3. Click Regenerate > Automatic. Notice that the componentsupdate their location because of the relations. Regenerate a fewtimes to observe the changes.

Tips & Techniques:

You may want to turn off the display of axes and points.

Figure 19: Modified Skeleton



NOTES

4. Modify the stroke of the assembly. Click Modify > Mod Skel.Select SAMPLE_MOTOR_SKEL.PRT from the Model Tree. Selectthe circular datum curve. Try to modify the diameter to 5. Read theprompt in the MESSAGE AREA.

Task 2. The layout drives some of the parameters in the assembly.Modify the parameters in the layout table.

1. Open COMPLETE_SKELETON.LAY.

Figure 20: Displacement Layout

2. Click Edit > Value. Select the 4-inch parameter in the table next tothe entry STROKE. Type [5].

3. Select the 5-inch dimension next to the table entry of RODLENGTH. Type [7].

4. Regenerate the layout.

5. Save the layout and close the window.

Task 3. Check the changes that you made to the assembly.

1. Click Window > Activate.



NOTES

2. Regenerate the assembly. Notice that the system updated all of themodels with respect to the skeleton model.

Task 4. Check the parent/child association between components.

1. Suppress the connecting rods in the assembly. Click Component >Suppress. Select the two connecting rods. Regenerate theassembly. Notice that the pistons retain the reference to theskeleton model.

2. Save the assembly and erase all objects from memory. Click File >

Erase > Current. Click > OK.



NOTES


• Skeletons can be used to simulate motion in simple assemblies.

• Skeletons can aid in parent child relationship definition when all of thecomponents are assembled to the skeleton.

• Skeletons can be as simple or as complex as necessary, but aretypically components of surface and datum geometry only.

• Top-down design techniques can be implemented by using the copygeometry features to create new geometry that references the skeleton.



Page 12-1

Module

Skeletons with Mapped GeometryIn this module you learn techniques for sharing information

throughout different design groups, while maintaining associativity

with the top-level assembly.

Objectives


• Construct a skeleton for mapping existing geometry.

• Share associative geometrical information between models.



NOTES

USING SKELETONS WITH MAPPED GEOMETRYUsing a skeleton with mapped geometry in a large design project:

• Provides a mechanism for driving and maintaining form, fit, andfunction in each subassembly that you use at the top level.

• Provides access to top-level information in the subassembly withoutresulting in increased regeneration and repaint time.

• Enables multiple users to accomplish concurrent engineering.

• Reduces assembly-level revision conflicts.

Constructing Mapped SkeletonsYou construct a mapped skeleton in an assembly and locate it to the top-level default datum planes using Component > Create.

Figure 1: Creating Map Skeletons

The following table outlines the steps for creating skeletons with mappedgeometry.


Skeletons wi th Mapped Geomet ry Page 12-3

NOTES

Table 1: Steps for Creating Skeletons with Mapped Geometry

Step Action1 Add the main components to the top-level assembly using typical

assembly techniques.

Note: The assembled components should be those componentsthat define the needed references for the mapped skeleton.

2 Create a new subassembly using a template.

3 Create a skeleton using a template and assemble in the defaultlocation of the subassembly as the first component.

4 Copy needed references into the skeleton using data sharingfeatures—copy geom, shrinkwrap, etc.

5 Use the shared data features in the skeleton to design models inthe subassembly.

Using Model GeometryWhen referencing a mapped skeleton in a large design project, you caneither create individual datum and surface features, or a single feature thatuses all geometric references.

To create or modify the skeleton with mapped geometry in the context ofthe assembly, you can create a Data Sharing feature, such as copy geomand shrinkwrap. This offers the following advantages over manuallycopying a skeleton with mapped geometry:

• You can select different forms of geometry, such as axes, curves, andsurfaces in a single feature.

• The system automatically associates data sharing features to layers ofthe same name if the selected feature is associated to a layer on thecomponent from which you copied the geometry.

• The data sharing feature does not allow you to select references frommore than one component.

• The data sharing feature automatically updates when the assemblywithin which you created the feature is in RAM.

• You can turn the dependency on and off, which allows you to controlchange propagation.



NOTES

Copying Surfaces

Surfaces are infinitely thin features. Using Surface > Copy, you canduplicate any other surface of a feature by selecting only the surfaces thatyou need, such as the mounting face on a flange.

• The yellow edge of a surface denotes a one-sided edge.

• A magenta edge denotes a two-sided edge, tangency line, or silhouetteedge of the surface.

Figure 2: Map Skeleton for Pipe Routing

Note:

You should avoid copying surfaces of components that havebeen assembled to the mapped skeleton. This can create acircular reference.



NOTES

Using the Mapped Skeleton at the SubassemblyLevelOnce surfaces are copied into the subassembly, you can work at thesubassembly level by assembling components to the mapped skeletongeometry.

Figure 3: Piping Added into Subassembly

Figure 4: Pipes Automatically in Top-Level Assembly



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you create a mapped skeleton that captures critical

design criteria. Using a mapped skeleton allows you to have high-level

assembly geometry in session without having the actual large assembly

in RAM.

Method

In Exercise 1, you create geometry based on a large and complexassembly. You use a mapped skeleton to copy only the references that areneeded for the particular component.

In Exercise 2, you create the exhaust reference geometry based on theassembly. To save time, you create a skeleton with mapped geometry todefine the exhaust system references.

Tools

Table 2: Skeletons with Mapped Geometry Icons

Icons DescriptionAssemble at default location

Make selected layers blanked

Repaint the Screen

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Mapped Skeleton

Task 1. The carburetors require an exact fit to the engine. Create amapped skeleton with this information inside a new subassembly.


2. Open M_ENGINE.ASM.



NOTES

Figure 5: The Engine Assembly

Task 2. The screen is fairly cluttered with extraneous parts. Use anexisting layer to blank the components.

1. Click View > Layers. Select CLEAN_UP_DISPLAY; click > > Close.

Figure 6: Engine with Layer Blanked



NOTES

Task 3. Define the subassembly and mapped skeleton for the carburetor.

1. Click Component > Create > SubAssembly. Type[m_carburetor]. Click OK.

2. In the CREATION OPTIONS dialog box, click Copy FromExisting > Browse. Select START_ASM.ASM. Click Open > OK.

3. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click > OK.

Task 4. Start the definition of the mapped skeleton.

1. Click Done/Return to reach the highest level menu. Click Modify> Mod Subasm. Select M_CARBURETOR.ASM.

2. Click Component > Create. Click Skeleton Model from thedialog box. Type [map_carburetor]. Click OK.

3. Click Copy From Existing > Browse. Select START_PART.PRT.Click Open > OK.


Figure 7: M_Carburator Subassembly



NOTES

Task 5. Copy some of the assembly references from the engine into thecarburetor subassembly. Copy the surfaces and axis of the mountinglocations for the carburetor from the engine block.

1. Click Done/Return twice to access the ASSEMBLY menu. ClickModify > Mod Part. Select MAP_CARBURETOR.PRT from theModel Tree.

2. Click Feature > Create > Data Sharing > CopyGeom.

3. In the COPY GEOMETRY dialog box, double-click Surface Refs.

4. Select both mating surfaces for the carburetor, as shown in thefollowing figure. Click Done Sel.

Select these matingsurfaces

Outer edge

Inner edge


5. Click Loop Surfs and select the front surface of one of the partsagain. Select one of the outer edges of the selected surface asshown in the previous figure. Pro/ENGINEER automaticallyselects all of the surfaces that are adjacent to the selected surface.

6. Click Loop Surfs and select the front surface again; then selectone of the inner edges of the surface.

Tips & Techniques:

To confirm which surfaces you selected, use the Show >Mesh option before clicking Done.



NOTES

7. Repeat the process for the second intake port.

8. Click Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Do not click OK yet.

9. Double-click Misc Refs. Click Axis from the ADD ITEM area;select the four axes required to mount the carburetors.Click Done Sel > OK.

10. To finish copying the surfaces, click OK from the dialog box.

11. Save M_ENGINE.ASM.

12. Open M_CARBURETOR.ASM. The assembly should display asshown in the following figure.

Copied surfacesand axes

Figure 9: The Finished Carburetor Map

13. Close all windows.

14. Erase models from memory. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed> OK.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Mapping the Exhaust

Task 1. The exhaust pipes require an exact fit to the engine and framealong with various frame mounting locations. Create a mapped skeletonthat contains this reference geometry.

1. Open the MAP_CART.ASM.

2. Reorient the model to a view that is similar to the one shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 10: The Map View

Task 2. Start a map for the exhaust assembly by defining a subassemblyin the mapped skeleton

1. Click Component > Create > SubAssembly. Type [exhaust].Click OK.

2. Click Copy From Existing > Browse. Select START_ASM.ASM.Click Open > OK.


Task 3. Add the mapped skeleton as the first component in thesubassembly. Create a part in the context of the top-level assembly.

1. Click Done/Return to access the ASSEMBLY menu.



NOTES

2. Click Modify > Mod Subasm. Select EXHAUST.ASM from theModel Tree.

3. Click Component > Create > Skeleton Model. Type[map_exhaust].

4. Click Copy From Existing > Browse. Select START_PART.PRT.Click Open > OK.


Task 4. Add copy data sharing features to create references that you canuse at the subassembly level.

1. Click Done/Return twice to access the ASSEMBLY menu. ClickModify > Mod Part. Select MAP_EXHAUST.PRT from the ModelTree.

Figure 11: Map_Exhaust Part

2. Click Feature > Create > Data Sharing > CopyGeom.

3. Double-click Surface Ref.

4. Select the mating surfaces of the exhaust ports, as shown in thefollowing figure.

5. Use Loop Surfaces to copy the outer and inner loops of surfaces.

6. Click Done from the SURF SELECT menu. Do not click OK yet.



NOTES

Select thesemating surfaces

Select these outerloops

Select these innerloops

Figure 12: Mapping the Port Surfaces

7. Double-click Misc Refs. Click Axis from the ADD ITEM area.Select the four axes required to mount the exhaust pipes.Click Done Sel > OK > OK.

Task 5. Copy the surfaces of the frame around which the exhaustsystem must wrap.

1. Create another data sharing feature for the frame. Click Create >Data Sharing > CopyGeom.

Copy both sidesof these frame

tubes.

Figure 13: Mapping the Frame



NOTES

2. Double-click Surface Refs. Select the surfaces shown in theprevious figure. Remember to select both sides of each cylinder.

3. Click OK from the dialog box.

4. Save the assembly

5. Open MAP_EXHAUST.PRT. The part should display as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 14: The Exhaust Mapped skeleton Shaded

6. Close the windows.

7. Erase models from memory. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed> OK.



NOTES


• How to make high-level assembly information available at thesubassembly level using mapped skeletons.

• How to create Data Sharing features that can be used to copyreferences into mapped skeletons.

• How to create subassemblies within the context of the large assembly.

• How to create parts while in Assembly model.



Page 13-1

Module

Managing ReferencesIn this module you learn how dependencies, known as parent/child

relationships, develop between various objects and features within

Pro/ENGINEER.

Objectives


• Create parent/child dependencies.

• Find dependencies within a design by interrogating parts andassemblies.

• Control dependencies between components.



NOTES

DEFINING THE PARENT/CHILD RELATIONSHIPDuring the Pro/ENGINEER design process, you frequently createdependencies between objects, referred to as parent/child relationships.

To establish effective dependencies throughout your design model and toavoid unwanted ones, you should become familiar with Pro/ENGINEERterminology pertaining to parent/child relationships:

• Reference – an entity used to define a relationship between two items,as when locating or sizing a feature within an assembly.

• External reference – an entity the system uses to locate or size afeature that exists in another model outside the current model.

• Dependency – a relationship between an object and anotherreferenced entity.

Benefits of Designing with External ReferencesCreating external references offers many benefits, such as allowing you todo the following:

• Design features that meet overall design intent by locating to, sizingby, and shaping by geometry in the assembly.

• Establish relationships between models so that if one or more of themchanges, others change automatically.

• Easily copy geometry from one model to another.

• Consolidate control of geometry in skeleton model(s) so that making achange to it ripples down to components that reference it.

Creating DependenciesThe following table lists various ways that you can create parent/childrelationships within a design model.


Managing Refe rences Page 13-3

NOTES

Table 1: Creating Parent/Child Relationships

Dependency Action

Between two features, during partcreation

Select a sketching plane and referenceplane.

Dimension to or reference existinggeometry.

Use the Align constraint

Use Edge or Offset Edge.

Create concentric arcs and circles onlywhen you select existing geometry.

Use the depth options that require you toselect a reference such as a surface, edge,datum, or point (Up to Curve, Up toPoint, Up to Surface, and Thru Until).

Select the placement and dimensionalreferences for select and place features.

Use Dependent when copying a feature.

Between two components in anassembly

Assemble a component to othercomponents in the assembly (thecomponent then depends on the othercomponents for its placement within theassembly).

Use Mirror, Merge, or Cutout to createa dependency between components butnot to the assembly (one part thendepends on another part for its geometry).

Between a component and anassembly

Create or modify part features andreference other components for thesketching plane, horizontal or verticalreference plane, dimensioning reference,aligning reference, etc.

Create an assembly level feature andmake the feature visible at the part level,or you use the New Names option at theassembly level.

Create an assembly level feature andreference a component during featurecreation.



NOTES

INTERROGATING EXISTING OBJECTSBefore making design changes to a model constructed by another user,you should become familiar with the part or assembly and determine howit was constructed. To interrogate existing objects, you can use any of thefollowing three tools.

Info Pull-Down MenuYou can use the Info option to obtain information about regeneration,dependencies, components, models, and Bill of Materials (BOM).

• RegenerationInformation

• Parent/Child

• Component

• Model

• BOM

Model Tree ToolThe Model Tree tool can provide you with dynamic feedback concerningthe creation of an object within Part and Assembly mode. This tool showsonly the regenerated objects in their respective order by default; however,you can customize the format to meet your needs. You can accessinformation about a model by using the TREE pull-down menu.

Figure 1: Model Tree Tool (Separate Window)



NOTES

Global Reference ViewerTo identify internal and external references within a part or assembly,you can interrogate the model using the Global Reference Viewer.

Figure 2: Global Reference Viewer

Listing Parent/Child References

Using this Global Reference Viewer tool, you can list the parent or childreferences of components or features that have internal and/or externalreferences to the active item.

To set a different current item, select a feature, component, or assembly;then click Actions > Set Current. Using the PARENT AND CHILDREFERENCES dialog box, you can interrogate the selected reference todetermine the following:

• Parent or child references based on the creation of features withexternal references

• Models that have parent/child relationships

• Placement constraints that develop parent/child relationships



NOTES

Limiting the Scope of Information

Using the FILTER SETTINGS, you can define the scope of information thatthe Global Reference Viewer provides. You can customize it to show:

• The component you want to view in the initial tree.

• The reference type.

• The objects that have parent relationships rather than objects that havechild references.

Determining Relationship Hierarchy

Using the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER, you can also determine thehierarchy to the references associated with a model.

Figure 3: Relationship Hierarchy

CONTROLLING INTERDEPENDENCIESUsing Utilities > Reference Control, you can define the scope forcreating references to other models in a working session ofPro/ENGINEER.

Setting Object-Specific Reference ControlWhen you specify the scope setting and reference-handling scheme foreach object individually, the system stores the information with the objectand applies it to each assembly in which the object appears.

You can access the REFERENCE CONTROL dialog box using any of thefollowing methods.



NOTES

Table 2: Accessing the Reference Control Dialog Box.

Method: Action:For a particular part orskeleton

Click Part Setup > Ref Control

For a part in theassembly

Click Modify > Mod Part > Ref Control

For a skeleton in theassembly

Click Modify > Mod Skel > Ref Control

For a subassembly Click Modify > Mod Subasm > Design Mgr >Ref Control

For the top-levelassembly of the activeassembly window

Click Assembly > Design Mgr > Ref Control

From the Model Tree Select any object with the right mouse button; thenclick Ref Control from the pop-up menu.

Reference Control SettingsTo specify the scope, you can select settings from the REFERENCECONTROL dialog box.

Figure 4: REFERENCE CONTROL Dialog Box

Reference handling options define the system behavior that should occurwhen you attempt to create an external reference that violates the definedscope. Selection settings provide color feedback for out of scopereferences and selection options for out of scope references.



NOTES

Note:

If you bring into session the model containing the originalreference, but the original reference has been deleted orsuppressed, the system places you in Feature Resolve Mode,even if you have local backup copies of the references.

Using Copy Geometry Features to Track and ControlExternal References

Using the Copy Geom option, you can easily track and control externalreferences by consolidating them into one copy geometry feature.

By changing the Dependency element of the feature, you can specifywhether the system should reflect changes made to the original model inthe copy.

Note:

While assembling components into a subassembly at the top-level assembly, you can specify assembly references (amongthe constraints) that are outside of the subassembly into whichyou are assembling. If you retrieve the subassembly withoutthe top-level assembly in session, component placement failsbecause the references are missing.



NOTES


In this laboratory you investigate a model to determine how it is

constructed and to identify the parent/child relationships.

Method

In Exercise 1, you use the global reference viewer to interrogate the modeland you use Reroute and Redefine to change the references.

In Exercise 2, you investigate the head part to determine how it wasconstructed and identify the parent/child relationships of certain features.

In Exercise 3, you investigate the front suspension assembly to determinehow it was constructed and identify the dependencies that wereestablished.

EXERCISE 1: Modifying the Piston

Task 1. Interrogate the model to determine feature dependencies.Determine how it is being regenerated.


2. Open PISTON_PC.PRT.

3. Investigate the regeneration order. Click Info > Model from themenubar. Notice that the features are listed in the order of creation.Close the window.

4. Click Utilities > Model Player to regenerate the model one featureat a time.

Tips & Techniques:

To obtain more information about the regenerating feature,click Info Feat to display feature information or Show Dimsto view the dimensions used to create the feature.



NOTES

Task 2. Use the Model Tree to interrogate the model, in order todetermine how the part was constructed.

1. Click Utilities >Customize Screen > Options > Display asseparate window > OK.

2. In the MODEL TREE, expand all of the items.

Tips & Techniques:

It is always good practice to use Setup > Name to assignnames to important features.

Figure 5: Expanded Model Tree



NOTES

Task 3. Interrogate the first cut feature to identify any parent/childrelationships.

1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click ROD_PIN_HOLE > Info >Parent/Child Info.

2. Review the REFERENCE INFORMATION WINDOW.

Task 4. Interrogate the individual references.

1. The system lists DTM3 because it is the sketching plane referencefor the feature. Click the + next to PROTRUSION ID 7.

Figure 6: Reference Information Window

2. Select SURFACE ID 13. This highlighted surface is the referenceplane. Also note that AXIS A_1 was referenced.

3. Select EDGE ID 12 and note the dimensional reference to the topfront edge of the piston. Click Close.



NOTES

Tip:

You should avoid selecting edges as references if you canselect a coplanar surface in the model. It would be moreappropriate to dimension to the top piston surface.

Figure 7: The Piston Model

Task 5. Change the dimensional reference for the rod pin hole from theedge to the surface.

1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click ROD_PIN_HOLE > EditReferences. Click Yes to roll back the part.

2. Read the prompt in the MESSAGE AREA and accept the existingsketching plane. Click Same Ref.

3. Click Same Ref to accept the bottom horizontal reference.

4. When AXIS A_1 highlights for the dimensioning reference, clickSame Ref.



NOTES

5. For the next dimensioning reference, click Alternate. Select thetop surface of the piston.

Task 6. Recall that the orientation reference of the model was thebottom of the piston when the dimensional reference was the top of thepiston. This is an unnecessary parent/child relationship. Change thereference.

1. In the Model Tree, right-click Rod_Pin_Hole > Redefine.

2. To change the section, double-click Section from the dialog box.Click Sketch Plane.

3. Click Same Ref to retain DTM3 as the sketching plane.

4. Retain ALTERNATE as the default. Click Top then DTM2.

Task 7. Finish the redefinition of the feature. The system places you inSketcher mode. Pro/ENGINEER automatically regenerates the section todetermine if it is still valid.

1. Click > OK.

Note:

The main difference between redefining and rerouting asketching and reference plane is that redefining automaticallybrings up the dialog box. To avoid Sketcher regeneration, clickReroute.

2. [Optional] Use the information options that you learned previouslyto check the parent/child references.




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Breaking External References

Task 1. It is good practice to determine how a model was constructedbefore making any changes to it. Investigate how the engine head part wascreated.

1. Retrieve HEAD_PC.PRT.

Figure 8: Engine Head Part

2. Click Utilities > Model Player to regenerate the model one featureat a time.

Note:

You do not have to step through every feature usingContinue. If you click Quit, the system completes theregeneration of the model.

Task 2. Use the Info menu to interrogate the model and determinefeature dependencies.

1. Click Info > Global Ref Viewer.



NOTES

2. View individual feature references as shown in the followingfigure. Select the FILTER SETTING bar to expand it. Click Featurein the REF TYPE area. Click All in the REF EXTENT area. Click AllObjects in the DISPLAYED OBJECTS area . Double-clickGASKET_MOUNT to make it the current object.

Figure 9: Global Reference Viewer

3. Note that this feature has an external parent reference toENGINE_PC.ASM.

4. Identify all features that have external references to other parts.Click External in the REF EXTENT area. The GLOBALREFERENCE VIEWER only displays those features with externalreferences.



NOTES

Figure 10: Showing Features with External References

Task 3. Redefine the GASKET_MOUNT feature to be independent of theassembly.

1. Open ENGINE_PC.ASM.

2. Redefine the GASKET_MOUNT cut. Click Modify > Mod Part.Select HEAD_PC from the Model Tree.

3. Click Feature > Redefine. Use the MODEL TREE to select theGASKET_MOUNT. In the MODEL TREE, click Tree > ItemDisplay > Features. Expand the HEAD_PC.PRT using the + iconthen select GASKET_MOUNT.



NOTES

Figure 11: Gasket Mount in Model Tree

4. In the OPEN REP dialog box, click Master Rep > OK.

5. Double-click Section from the CUT: EXTRUDE dialog box; thenclick Sketch.

6. Click Sketch > References from the menu bar. Select allreferences in the dialog box. Click Delete.

7. Specify references for the centerlines to the part datums. SelectDTM3 and DTM2. Click Close.

8. Add two diameter dimensions and a horizontal dimension asshown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 12: Sketcher Dimensions for the Gasket Mount

9. After the section regenerates successfully, click > OK from thedialog box.

10. Save and erase the assembly from memory.

11. Activate the HEAD_PC.PRT window.

12. Use the REFERENCE VIEWER to verify that the system hasremoved the external references for this feature. Click Info >Global Ref Viewer.

13. Set up the filter options to show external feature references. Makesure that Feature, External and All Objects are selected in theREF TYPE, REF EXTENT and DISPLAYED OBJECTS areas.Double-click HEAD_PC.PRT. Notice that HEAD_PC.PRT has noexternal parental references.



NOTES

Figure 13: Global Reference Viewer Dialog Box




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Interrogating the SuspensionAssembly

Task 1. Interrogate the assembly to determine its regeneration order.

1. Open PC_SUSPENSION.ASM.

Figure 14: The Front Suspension

2. Investigate the order in which components regenerate in theassembly.

Task 2. Interrogate the assembly to identify references betweencomponents and determine how components were assembled.

1. Click Info > Component from the menubar.Select PC_SHOCK_RF.ASM.

2. To identify the referenced entities, select the first ALIGN constraintfrom the dialog box. The assembly reference, AXIS A_17,highlights in magenta. The component reference, AXIS A_2,highlights in cyan.

3. Select the other two constraints and observe which componentshighlight on the screen. Close the dialog box.



NOTES

Task 3. Use the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER to interrogatecomponent information.

1. Click Info > Global Reference Viewer menu bar. In the dialogbox; click Component, All, All Objects from REF TYPE, REFEXTENT and DISPLAYED OBJECTS areas.

2. In the MAIN TREE, double-click PC_SHOCK_RF.ASM. Noticethat PC_FRNT_SKEL.PRT is a parent reference. Recall that theA_17 axis is an alignment reference for assembling the component.

Tips & Techniques:

You can use Highlight in the TREE pull-down menu of theGLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER dialog box to select afeature or component and highlight it on the screen.

Task 4. Use the Global Reference Viewer to interrogate modelinformation. Determine why there is an external reference between thePC_WISHBONE.PRT and the PC_WHEEL.ASM. Repeat the process forthe PC_KNUCKLE_LF.PRT.

1. Click Feature from the REF TYPE area.

2. In the MAIN TREE, double-click PC_WISHBONE.PRT.

3. In the PARENT / CHILD TREE, right-click PC_WHEEL.ASM >Info. The INFORMATION WINDOW explains that this componentis part of an interchange assembly. Close the window.

4. Change the current model. Expand PC_WHEEL_HUB_LF.ASM byusing the + icon. Double-click PC_KNUCKLE_LF.PRT.

5. Notice that this component has parent references outside thisassembly.

6. Right-click PC_KNUCKLE_RF.PRT > Full Path. Notice that thePC_KNUCKLE_LF part was created as a mirrored component fromthe component PC_KNUCKLE_RF part, shown in the followingfigures.



NOTES

Figure 15: PC_KNUCKLE_LF Part

Figure 16: PC_KNUCKLE_RF Part

7. [Optional] Use the GLOBAL REFERENCE VIEWER to investigateother components inside this front suspension assembly; todetermine what kind of references were established, as well as howthey were established.

8. Save and erase the entire assembly when you have finished.



NOTES


• Parent Child relationships are an integral part of the design process.You must consider the effects downstream when you establishreferences.

• The Design Manager is an important tool that allows you to controlwhat references you want to retain and those you want to modify ordelete.

• The Global Reference Viewer should be the first tool to use on amodel created by someone else.



Page 14-1

Module

Project Part 1: Design IntentThis is the first of four major stages in a Top-Down Design project

in which you are provided all critical design information without

step-by-step instructions.

The broad focus of Part 1 is on the capture of design intent and the

creation of a product structure.

Objectives

In this module you will complete the following:

• Capture initial project parameters and design intent inPro/ENGINEER using a layout.

• Develop the initial product structure in assembly mode.



NOTES

PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND REQUIREMENTS

ScenarioYou are an engineer at the Faneuil Fan Factory (F3), a well-knowndesign and manufacturing company in Massachusetts.

F3 is committed to creating a new household product design before thecurrent fiscal quarter ends. Creating fans for individual consumer use is anew market area for F3, as they had traditionally manufactured only forthe industrial market.

The rapid development of intelligent Pro/ENGINEER models is critical tocontinued success at F3. Internally, the design is known as the VORTEX-1200, the newest adaptation of F3’s popular VORTEX commercial line ofair management products.

VORTEX 1200 Project Goal

The goal of the entire project is to create a flexible assembly model for theoscillating desk fan (shown in the following figures) using Top-DownDesign techniques.

Figure 1: Completed Fan Model


Project Part I Page 14-3

NOTES

Figure 2: Rear View of the Fan Assembly

Figure 3: Exploded View of Fan Assembly



NOTES

Figure 4: Fan Layout Information

Figure 5: Layout Table



NOTES

Design RequirementsThe following is a list of requirements and parameters defined by theproduct management team at F3.

• The entire Fan model must fit in a 12x12x15 container for shippingand shelf space requirements.

• The Fan will use F3’s standard ¼ HP 110-volt motor/gearboxDrivetrain Assembly as on the VORTEX-1800 model.

• The fan must adapt to use 3, 4, or 5 fan blades. A final decision fromF3’s design team has not been issued.

• The fan blades must fit within a safety cage diameter of 11 inches, anda depth of 2.75.

• As per F3 standards, the blade diameter is defined by the cagediameter. There is a clearance value of [0.50] between the fan tip andthe cage.

• The unit must have a total oscillation spread of at least 45°.

• The height of the fan must be easily modifiable from the base to the tiltaxis and from the tilt axis to the main axis. Initial values are [2.125]and [4.25] respectively. The Tilt axis height may get drasticallymodified for a ‘floor-stand’ version.

• The unit must be able to pivot vertically 90° to allow for the ‘wall-mount’ capability.

• The Fan’s base needs to have a ‘sculpted’ look, according to recentcustomer surveys. Also, the general styling of the fan will have a‘retro’ look and feel.

• The unit will be modeled without wiring or electrical connections. Ahole with a [0.50] diameter (this may change) must be left in the lowerside of the rear housing for the electrical group. They will design thewiring and install a F3 standard cord-mounted switch unit. The switchunit controls power to the fan and can also switch the oscillation onand off with a patented gearbox mounted Electro-clutch.

• All hardware fasteners will be standard from F3’s hardware library,and therefore need not be modeled or assembled at this stage ofdevelopment.



NOTES


In this laboratory you capture the initial project parameters and design

intent in Pro/ENGINEER, and then develop the initial product

structure.

Method

In Exercise 1, you use a layout in Pro/ENGINEER to capture initialproject parameters and design intent.

In Exercise 2, you develop an initial product structure in the assembly.

EXERCISE 1: Capturing Initial Design Intent

Task 1. Prepare for working on the project and create the layout file.

1. Clear all RAM and change the working directory to the PROJECTfolder.

2. Create a new layout named VORTEX-1200.LAY. Use the optionsfor EMPTY and C-SIZE.

Task 2. Setup the layout for sketching.

1. Set the following Sketch preferences.



NOTES

Figure 6: SKETCH PREFERENCES Dialog Box

2. Click View > Draft Grid > Grid Params and set the X&Y Spacingto [0.250].

3. Enable the Parametric Sketch option.

Task 3. Sketch layout geometry.

1. Create the 2D geometry approximately as shown in the followingfigure. The overall size is roughly 8” wide by 12” tall.



NOTES

Figure 7: Creating 2D Geometry

Task 4. Add the details.

1. Add the dimensions and axes. When prompted for values, type [0]temporarily.

Figure 8: Adding Dimensions and Axes



NOTES

Task 5. Create a table of modifiable parameters.

1. Create the table and fill in only the captions (first two rows), asshown in the following figure.

2. Create parameters for MAX_HEIGHT, MAX_WIDTH,MAX_DEPTH, NUM_BLADES, BLADE_CLEARANCE,MIN_OSC_ANGLE, TILT_ANGLE, and ELEC_HOLE_DIA. Use theReal Number option and the values as shown in the table.

3. Modify the CAGE_DEPTH, CAGE_DIA, INTERFACE_HEIGHT,MAIN_HEIGHT, and TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT dimensions to thevalues shown in the table.

4. Create the relation:blade_dia = cage_dia – (blade_clearance*2)

5. Regenerate the Layout.

6. Type the values in the PARAMETER column as plain text.For Example: MAX_HEIGHT.

7. Type the values in the VALUE column as parametric notes.For Example: &MAX_HEIGHT.

8. Type the entries in the NOTES column as plain text.



NOTES

Figure 9: Critical Specifications

Task 6. Finish the layout.

1. Finish the layout, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 10: Completed Layout

2. Save the layout and close the window.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Developing Initial Product Structure

Task 1. Create a new assembly and product structure.

1. Create a new Assembly called VORTEX-1200 using the defaulttemplate.

2. Using the Model Tree and the , create theVORTEX-1200_SKEL part and the FAN_UNIT assembly using thestart models in the PROJECT directory, and default assemblyconstraints. Refer to the following figure.

3. Use the Include option to include the F3_DRIVETRAINassembly. (an existing assembly from the F3 database)

4. Create the remainder of the models in the FAN_UNIT assembly.Note that the F3_CAGE-11, F3_HUB, and F3_BLADE modelsalready exist and are Included.

5. Create the BASE_UNIT assembly and its components using thestart models in the PROJECT directory, and default assemblyconstraints.



NOTES

Figure 11: Model Tree

6. Save the VORTEX-1200 Assembly.



Page 15-1

Module

Project Part II: Skeleton DesignIn part two of the Top-Down Design project, you focus on the

creation of an intelligent skeleton model. The skeleton involves basic

skeleton features, motion, space claims, and interfaces.

Objectives

In this module you will:

• Create basic skeleton features.

• Create skeleton features for motion.

• Create skeleton features for space claims.

• Create skeleton features for interfaces.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating the Basic Skeleton

Task 1. Open the skeleton part and create the initial features.

1. Open the VORTEX-1200_SKEL model.

2. Rename the TOP datum. Click Setup > Name. Select the TOPplane and type [GROUND]. Create the sketched datum curve, asshown in the following figure. Rename the curve to [POST_CRV].

Figure 1: POST_CRV

3. Sketch a datum curve on the GROUND plane. (Or use the pre-saved BASE.SEC file). Rename the curve to [BASE_CRV].

Figure 2: BASE_CRV


Project Part I I Page 15-3

NOTES


In the following exercises, several datum features will becreated and renamed using Setup > Name. Create a mapkeyfor renaming to improve your efficiency.

4. Create the TILT_REF plane through the upper vertex of thePOST_CRV, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3: TILT_REF plane

5. Create the TILT axis (intersection of the TILT_REF and RIGHTplanes), and the TILT_ANG plane (though the TILT axis, angle of15° from TILT_REF).

Figure 4: Creating TILT AXIS and TILT ANG Plane



NOTES

6. Create the INTERFACE and MAIN_DRIVE planes offset [2.125]and [4.50] respectively from TILT_ANG as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 5: Planes Offset from TILT_ANG

7. Create the TILT_PERP plane though the TILT axis and normal tothe TILT_ANG plane, as shown in the following figure. Redefineits attributes to Fit Feature and select the INTERFACE plane.

Figure 6: TILT PERP Plane



NOTES

8. Offset the TILT_PERP plane 1.50 to create the PIVOT_REF plane,as shown in the following figure. Redefine the attributes to FitFeature and select the INTERFACE plane.

Figure 7: Offset PIVOT_REF Plane

9. Create the PIVOT axis at the intersection of PIVOT_REF andFRONT.

Figure 8: Create PIVOT Axis

10. Save the model, and continue to the next exercise.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Skeleton Features forMotion

Task 1. Create datum features that will function as the fixed attachmentpoint for the linkage on the support arm.

1. Create the sketched datum curve on the INTERFACE plane usingPIVOT_REF as the RIGHT reference. Use only the PIVOT axis as areference in sketcher, and rename the curve to FIXED_CRV.

Note:

In this chapter, several figures have been created with someDatum planes removed from display with the Hide option forclarity.

Figure 9: FIXED_CRV

2. Return to the default view. Create a datum point on the nearestvertex of the FIXED_CRV you just created.

3. Create an axis Through the point just created and Normal to theINTERFACE plane. Rename the axis to LINK_FIXED.



NOTES

Figure 10: Create LINK_FIXED Axis

Task 2. Create datum curves to represent the linkage.

1. Create the sketched datum curve shown below on the INTERFACEplane using PIVOT_REF as the RIGHT reference. Use only thePIVOT and LINK_FIXED axes as references in Sketcher, andrename the curve to LINKAGE. Sketch 3 lines and a constructioncircle.

Figure 11: Sketching LINKAGE curve

2. Using the thumbwheel, drag the angle value from 5-355°. Thecurve should move freely in an oscillating motion.

3. Create a YES/NO Parameter named OSCILLATE. Set the initialvalue to YES.

4. Set the CONFIG option shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 12: Setting Config Options

5. Click Relations > . Select the datum curve, and note thedimension number, d31 in this example. Then type the relation, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 13: Entering Relation

6. After exiting the RELATIONS EDITOR, regenerate the modelseveral times to test the operation of the linkage. Return thelinkage to the starting position of approximately 85°.

Note:

For future use, the OSCILLATE parameter may be toggled toYES or NO to toggle the linkage rotation on and off.

7. Create another sketched curve using the same references, as shownin the following figure. Name this curve RT_ANG_CRV. (Sketchtwo lines.)



NOTES

Figure 14: Create RT_ANG_CRV Curve

Task 3. Create additional datum features using the linkage as references.

1. Create a plane through the curve segment shown below, andthrough the PIVOT axis. Name the plane MAIN_FRONT and resizeit to the RT_ANG_CRV feature.

Figure 15: Create MAIN_FRONT Plane

2. Create the MAIN_PERP plane through the pivot axis and normal tothe MAIN_FRONT plane, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 16: Create MAIN_PERP Plane

3. Create an axis named MAIN at the intersection of theMAIN_DRIVE and MAIN_FRONT planes, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 17: Create MAIN Axis

4. Create a datum point feature named LINKAGE_PTS at the linkagevertices, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 18: Create LINKAGE_PTS Datum Point



NOTES

5. Create the AUX_ROTATE and the AUX_ARM axes through theprevious points and normal to the INTERFACE plane.

Figure 19: AUX_ROTATE and AUX_ARM Axes

6. Create the SKEL_MAIN coordinate system at the intersection of theMAIN_DRIVE, MAIN_PERP, and MAIN_FRONT planes. Orient theX, Y and Z axes as shown in the following figure.

Figure 20: SKEL_MAIN Coord System

7. Delete all default layers and create three new layers named BASE,FAN, and LINKAGE to control the display of the many skeletonfeatures.

8. Add items to the layers as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 21: New Layers

9. Save the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Skeleton Features for SpaceClaims

NOTE:

When using the finished version of this skeleton, first open theDrivetrain assembly to allow the shrinkwrap feature toregenerate properly.

Task 1. Create a space claim for the base, using an extruded surface.

1. Create an extruded surface using the BASE datum curve, as shownin the following figure. Use the option for Capped Ends andextrude upward [2.0].

Figure 22: Extruding Surface

Task 2. Create a space claim for the already-designed F3 drivetrainassembly by using an external shrinkwrap.

1. Open and examine the DRIVETRAIN assembly. Then close thewindow.

2. Click Insert > Shared Data > Shrinkwrap from Other Model >Open. Select the F3_DRIVETRAIN.ASM.

3. Click Coord Sys > Sel By Menu > dt_main > Select. Then selectthe SKEL_MAIN coordinate system.

4. Increase the Quality Level to and set .Then click Done > OK.



NOTES

Figure 23: Drivetrain Shrinkwrap

Task 3. Create a space claim for the cage and fan blades.

1. Create an extruded surface using the Both Sides and Open Endsoptions. Select the surface shown as the sketching plane and usethe INTERFACE datum as the TOP reference. Refer to thefollowing figure

Figure 24: Selecting Sketching Plane

2. Sketch circle of diameter 11.0, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 25: Sketching Circle

3. Use Blind for the depth option and type [1.375] for the depth.

Figure 26: Completed surface



NOTES

Task 4. Test the skeleton operation.

1. Test the oscillation of the skeleton by regenerating through onecomplete rotation of the linkage, 360°.

2. Test the tilt action by modifying the TILT_ANG plane to 45°. Thenmodify to 90°.

3. Test the oscillation at 90°, and then modify the TILT_ANG planeback to 15°.

4. Rename the three space claim surfaces to BASE_CLAIM,DRIVE_CLAIM, and BLADE_CLAIM respectively. Add thesefeatures to the BASE and FAN layers accordingly.

5. Save the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Creating Skeleton Features forInterfaces

NOTE:

When using the finished version of this skeleton, open theDrivetrain assembly first to allow the shrinkwrap feature toregenerate properly.

Task 1. Create the first interface between the base and support arm.

1. Set the layer display, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 27: Setting Layer Display

2. Create a flat surface sketched on the FRONT plane, using GROUNDas a TOP reference, and the TILT axis as the only Sketcherreference, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 28: Flat Surface



NOTES

Task 2. Create the second interface between the fan and base assembliesat the pivot axis.

1. Create a flat surface sketched on the INTERFACE plane, usingFRONT as a bottom reference, and the PIVOT and LINK_FIXEDaxes as the only Sketcher references, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 29: Second Flat Surface

2. Name the two interface surfaces BASE_INTF and PIVOT_INTFrespectively, and add only the BASE_INTF surface to the BASElayer.

Task 3. Create the interface between the drive arm and link

1. Set the layer display, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 30: Setting Layer Status

2. Create a flat surface with the Use Prev option. Reference theAUX_ARM axis as the only Sketcher reference, as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 31: Creating third Flat Surface

3. Name the surface TEMP.

4. Offset the TEMP surface upward 0.125. Name the offset surfaceARM_LINK_INTF.

5. Add the TEMP surface to the BASE layer and theARM_LINK_INTF surface to the LINKAGE layer.

6. Display all layers.

Figure 32: All surfaces displayed

7. Modify the TILT_ANG plane to 0° and test the oscillation of theskeleton. Notice the circular space claim for the blades is veryclose to the base. Modify the height of the BASE_CLAIM to1.25.



NOTES

Note:

Notice how one interface is completely stationary(BASE_INTF), one will tilt but not oscillate (PIVOT_INTF)and one tilts and oscillates (ARM_LINK_INTF).

8. Return the TILT_ANG plane to 15°.

9. Save the model.


Page 16-1

Module

Project Part III: Creating ComponentsIn Project Part III, you focus on the communication of geometrical

and parametric information to create individual components in the

assembly.

Objectives

In this module you will complete the following::

• Communicate Layout information to the skeleton.

• Communicate Skeleton information to components.

• Build components using skeleton information.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Communicating Layout Informationto the Skeleton

Task 1. Declare the skeleton to the layout and then link some of theLayout parameters to skeleton dimensions.

1. Open the Layout, then open the Skeleton.

2. Click Setup > Declare > Declare Lay > Vortex-1200.

3. Modify the POST_CRV, and select the 3.50 dimension.

4. When prompted for a dimension value, type[tilt_axis_height], and click Yes.

5. Modify the MAIN_DRIVE plane and select the height dimension.Enter MAIN_HEIGHT for the value and click Yes.

6. Repeat for the INTERFACE plane and the INTERFACE_HEIGHTparameter.

7. Repeat for the CAGE_DIA and CAGE_DEPTH parameters bymodifying the BLADE_CLAIM surface.

8. Repeat for the TILT_ANGLE parameter by modifying theTILT_ANG plane.

Notes:

Other Layout parameters will be declared later in the project.

The following exercises outline the communication of datafrom skeleton to part models.

The part models you create in this module do not need to beexactly as shown in the figures. But the interfaces betweenmodeled components should interact properly.

If you are short on time you can:

1. Create the part models with fewer and simpler featuresthan shown.

2. Assemble the finished models to the skeleton instead.


Project Part I I I Page 16-3

NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Creating Features in the Main BasePart

Task 1. Communicate skeleton geometry to the model.

1. Open the top-level assembly.

2. Select the MAIN_BASE part from the Model Tree and redefine it.Notice the DEFAULT constraint. Since this is a stationarycomponent, it is acceptable to leave the default constraint.

3. Select the MAIN_BASE part from the Model Tree.

Click > Insert Feature > Data Sharing > Copy Geom.

4. Using the Surface Refs, Curve Refs and Misc Refs optionsappropriately, select the geometry as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 1: Selecting Geometry

5. Create a second Copy Geom feature referencing the largeBASE_CLAIM surface.



NOTES

NOTE:

For this project, the geometry is transferred directly from theskeleton to the part models, even though they are actually insubassemblies.

If time constraints of the class were not an issue, best practicewould be to first transfer the geometry to separate skeletons ateach subassembly level, and then transfer again to theindividual models.

In addition, features are copied directly with CopyGeometry features. In order to keep references organized,you could have first created Publish Geometry features atthe skeleton level to make the selection of geometry easierwith subsequent Copy Geometry features.

Task 2. Create basic features to form the post.

1. Open the MAIN_BASE part and Hide the Copy Geom of theBASE_CLAIM surface.

Note:

The following series of figures illustrate one way to createfeatures in this model. Create protrusions and other featuresapproximately as shown, or use your own methods. As long asthe geometry maps to the copied skeleton geometryappropriately, the overall goal will be met.

2. Create a protrusion to reference the circular interface surface andextrude both sides, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 2: Creating a Protrusion

3. Create a cut referencing the interface surface.

Figure 3: Creating Cut

4. Create another cut referencing the interface surface and a fullround.

Figure 4: Creating Cut and Full Round

5. Round the backside.



NOTES

Figure 5: Rounded Back Side

6. Add a variable radius round on the front side. (Hint: A datum pointwas used at the apex of the round.)

Figure 6: Variable Radius

Task 3. Create an extruded surface to merge with the BASE_CLAIM.

1. Create an extruded surface using a spline, as shown in thefollowing figure. Be sure that it overhangs the BASE_CLAIMsurface in width and depth.

Figure 7: Overhanging Extruded Surface

2. Merge this surface with the BASE_CLAIM surface.



NOTES

Figure 8: Merging Surfaces

3. Create a variable radius round.

Figure 9: Variable Radius Round

4. Create a protrusion with the Use Quilt option to ‘fill’ the enclosedsurface quilt.

5. Add a final round and blank all unneeded layers. Refer to thefollowing figure.

6. There is a palette of colors stored in your PROJECT directory. Loadthe PROJECT_COLORS.MAP file.

7. Color all surfaces using the defined LT_BROWN appearance.

Figure 10: Coloring Surfaces




NOTES

EXERCISE 3: Creating Features in theSupport_Arm Part



2. Select the SUPPORT_ARM part from the Model Tree and redefineit. Notice the default constraint. Since this is a moving component,you cannot accept the default constraint.

3. Remove the default constraint.

4. Add three Align Coincident constraints between the FRONT,TOP, and RIGHT planes in the part to the FRONT, TILT_ANG,and TILT_PERP planes in the skeleton respectively.

5. Select the SUPPORT_ARM part from the Model Tree.

Click > Insert Feature > Data Sharing > Copy Geom.

6. Using Surface Refs and Misc Refs appropriately, select thegeometry (2 surfaces and 2 axes) as shown in the following figure.

Figure 11: Selecting Geometry



NOTES

Note:

The following series of figures illustrate one way to createfeatures in this model. Create protrusions and other featuresapproximately as shown, or use your own methods. As long asthe geometry maps to the copied skeleton geometryappropriately, the overall goal will be met.

7. Open the SUPPORT_ARM and create two protrusions thatreference the lower interface surface, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 12: Creating Protrusions Referencing Interface Surfaces

8. Then create two planar datum curves. Each is sketched on an offsetplane from the neighboring geometry.

Figure 13: Creating Planar Datum Curves

9. Create a series of general blends by selecting sections. Use theTangency option for smooth transitions.



NOTES

Figure 14: Creating Blend

10. Create rounds at the lower end of the model.

Figure 15: Creating Rounds

11. Create a through cut (bottom) and two blind holes (top) referencingthe interface geometry.

Figure 16: Creating Cut and Blind Holes



NOTES

12. Blank any unnecessary layers and color all surfaces using thedefined LT_BROWN appearance.

Figure 17: Coloring Surfaces

13. Save the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 4: Creating Features in the Link Part


1. Open the top-level assembly, and then open the Skeleton.

2. Create a Coordinate System using the 2Axes option. Select theaxis and curve as shown in the following figure and click Y > X >Done.

Figure 18: Selecting Axis and Curve

3. Rename the feature to LINK_CSYS.

Figure 19: The LINK_CSYS

4. Open the top-level assembly window.

5. Select the LINK part from the Model Tree and redefine it. Sincethis is a moving component, delete the default constraint.

6. Add a CoordSys constraint between the LINK_CSYS in theskeleton and the default Csys in the LINK part.


The selection of Coordinate Systems will be common inupcoming exercise tasks. To easily select them, useSel By Menu rather than un-blanking layers.



NOTES

7. Create a Copy Geom feature in the link part (2 axes and 3surfaces) as shown in the following figure. Open the model.

Figure 20: Copy Geom Feature in Link Part

8. Create the protrusion referencing the copy geometry features, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 21: Creating Protrusion

9. Create two holes referencing the copy geometry.

Figure 22: Creating Holes

10. Blank any unnecessary layers, and color the part using theDK_GREY appearance.



NOTES

Figure 23: Coloring Part

11. Save the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 5: Creating Features in the Drive_ArmPart


1. Open the top-level assembly, and then open the Skeleton.

2. Create a Coordinate System using the 2Axes option. Select theaxis and curve shown, then click Y > X > Done, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 24: Creating the ARM_CSYS

3. Rename the feature to ARM_CSYS.

4. Open the top-level assembly window.

5. Select the ARM part from the Model Tree and redefine it. Removethe default constraint, and add a COORDSYS constraint betweenthe ARM_CSYS in the skeleton and the default CSYS in theDRIVE_ARM part.

6. Create a Copy Geom feature in the DRIVE_ARM part consisting of3 surfaces and 2 axes, as shown in the following figure.

7. Open the model.

Figure 25: Creating Copy Geom Feature in Drive Arm Part



NOTES

8. Create the protrusion referencing the copy geometry, as shown inthe following figure. The base of the protrusion should be flushwith the ‘doughnut’ shaped surface.

Figure 26: Creating Protrusion

9. Create a second protrusion.

Figure 27: Creating Second Protrusion

10. Create a cut using the Use Quilt option, and a second cutreferencing the copy geom.

Figure 28: Creating Cuts

11. Blank any unnecessary layers, and color the part using theLT_GREY appearance.



NOTES

Figure 29: Finished Part

12. Save the model



Page 17-1

Module

Project Part IV: Completing the AssemblyIn Project Part IV, you complete the communication of geometrical

and parametric information, populate the assembly, and add

finishing touches.

Objectives

In this module you will complete the following:

• Communicate Skeleton information to components.

• Build components using skeleton information.

• Populate the assembly with existing components.



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating Features in theHousing_Rear Part



2. Select the HOUSING_REAR part from the Model Tree and redefineit. Remove the default constraint. Add a COORDSYS constraintbetween the SKEL_MAIN Csys in the skeleton and the default Csysin the HOUSING_REAR part.


Use Sel By Menu to select blanked Coordinate systems.

3. Open the HOUSING_REAR model.

Figure 1: Housing Rear Model

Task 2. Use an Inheritance feature to transfer geometry from thestandard F3 rear housing to the current model.

1. Click Insert > Shared Data > Inheritance > Open

2. Select the f3_rear_hsg.prt and click Open > Default.

3. This housing should be independent from the original. SelectDependency > Define > Independent > Ok > Ok.


Project Part IV Page 17-3

NOTES

Figure 2: Inheritance feature created.

Task 3. Customize the housing to fit in this assembly.

1. Return to the top level assembly and notice that the gearboxinterferes with the rear housing.

2. Create a copy geometry feature in the rear housing consisting ofthe two 180° cylindrical surfaces from the gearbox, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 3: Creating Copy Geometry



NOTES

3. Return to the Rear Housing part window.

4. Offset the surface outward [0.10], as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 4: Offsetting Surface

5. Hide the original copy geom surface.

6. Create a cut with the Use Quilt option, selecting the offset surface.Be sure to remove material on the inside of the surface.

7. Color the model using the DK_BROWN appearance.

Figure 5: Housing with Cut.

8. Blank any unnecessary layers and Save Status.

9. Save the model.



NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Completing the Assembly Population

Task 1. Assemble the DRIVETRAIN.

1. Open the top-level assembly and hide the skeleton.

Figure 6: Top-Level Assembly without Skeleton

2. Test the operation of the assembly by regenerating the assemblyseveral times.

3. Redefine the DRIVETRAIN assembly. Add a COORD SYSconstraint as the only constraint between the DT_MAIN Csys in theDRIVETRAIN and the SKEL_MAIN Csys in the skeleton.



NOTES

Figure 7: Redefining Assembly

Task 2. Assemble the hub and blades.

1. Open the DRIVETRAIN assembly.

Figure 8: Drivetrain Assembly

2. Regenerate the assembly a few times and watch the driveshaftrotate. This is accomplished by assembling the driveshaft on anangled datum, and using a relation similar to that in the linkage.

3. Close the DRIVETRAIN assembly and return to the top-levelassembly.

4. Redefine the F3_HUB and assemble as shown in the followingfigure. Be sure to use the flat on the shaft during assembly, so thatthe hub will rotate with the shaft.



NOTES

Figure 9: Assembling Hub

5. Redefine the F3_BLADE, and assemble using a Csys constraintbetween the default Csys in the F3_BLADE and the Csys on theleader ear of the F3_HUB pattern.

Figure 10: Redefining and Assembling Blade

6. Reference pattern the blades around the hub.



NOTES

Figure 11: Blades Reference Patterned

Task 3. Assemble the cage.

1. Redefine the F3_CAGE-11 part, and assemble, as shown in thefollowing figure. Use INSERT constraints to center the wire loopson the cage with the holes in the cover. Then use a TANGENTconstraint to make the cage flush with the cover.

Figure 12: Assembling Cage



NOTES


3. Set the OSCILLATE parameter in the skeleton to NO. Test therotation of the hub and blades by regenerating.

4. Set the OSCILLATE parameter in the skeleton to YES. Test the fullmotion of the assembly.




NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISESThe following exercises are optional. Complete as many as you have

time for, in any order you wish.

1. Trim the blades to fit in the cage and change the number of bladesusing the layout.

2. Use BMX to examine the oscillation angle. Also flex the model totest design variations.

3. Create the ‘missing’ pedestal part.

4. Finish the rear cover, main base, and the support arm.

5. Create exploded states.

6. Check the size requirements from the Layout.

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the Blades

Task 1. Trim the blades to meet the size requirements.

1. Open the skeleton and create a surface as shown in the followingfigure. Sketch on the tip of the driveshaft and extrude Both Sides.

2. Rename the surface to BLADE_DIA_SRF.

Figure 13: Creating the BLADE_DIA_SRF



NOTES

3. Link the two dimensions to the BLADE_DIA and CAGE_DEPTHLayout parameters respectively.

4. Regenerate the skeleton. Open the assembly and note that theblades extend past the BLADE_DIA_SRF surface.

Figure 14: Oversized Blades

5. Use Copy Geom to copy the BLADE_DIA_SRF to the leader of theblade pattern, and then open the blade.

Figure 15: First Blade

6. Reorder the new Copy Geometry feature before theBLADE_OUTLINE cut feature.

Task 2. Change the shape and size of the blades

1. Modify the RIDGE_POINTS datum point feature to change thecurvature of the ridge. Modify only the four horizontal dimensionsand the .74 REL dimension as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 16: Modifying Ridge Curvature

2. Redefine the BLADE_OUTLINE cut. Manipulate the sketchedspline, so that it is within the BLADE_DIA_SRF surface.

Figure 17: Redefining Blade Cut

3. Finish redefining the cut.

4. Add the new Copy Geometry to the ALL_SURFS layer, and blankall layers.

5. Save the blade and return to the assembly.



NOTES

6. Notice the BLADES are now within their specified clearance. Hidethe skeleton.

Figure 18: Corrected Blade Clearance

Task 3. Communicate the NUM_BLADES parameter.

1. Declare the F3_HUB and top-level assembly (if necessary) to theLayout.

2. Open the hub and write a relation similar to: p49 = NUM_BLADES.

3. Modify the NUM_BLADES parameter in the layout to [4].

4. Regenerate the assembly.

Figure 19: Assembly Regenerated



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Using BehavioralModeling

Task 1. Test the assembly against initial design specs for oscillationangle using Behavioral Modeling (BMX).

1. Save the top-level assembly, and create a copy of the skeletoncalled SKEL_ANALYSIS. (There is also a saved SKEL_ANAL youcan use)

2. Open SKEL_ANALYSIS.

3. Create a datum analysis feature, which measures the angle fromthe MAIN_FRONT plane to the FRONT plane, and outputs anANGLE parameter.

4. Enter the relations editor and delete the highlighted selectionshown in the following figure. Note the number of your angledimension (d31 in this example).

Figure 20: Deleting Relations

5. Setup a Sensitivity Analysis as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 21: Sensitivity Analysis

6. Compute the Sensitivity Analysis, and study the output graph.

Figure 22: Output Graph

7. Notice that the angle values on the graph are absolute, and show anoscillation of approximately +/-35°. Therefore, the totaloscillation is close to 75°. The fan passes the minimum of 45°.

Task 2. Test the assembly against initial design specs for designvariations.

1. Modify parameters in the Layout to test the wall-mount version ofthe fan by modifying the TILT_ANGLE parameter to 90°.



NOTES

Figure 23: Wall-Mounting the Fan

2. Reset the angle, and modify the TILT_AXIS_HEIGHT to 24.0.

Figure 24: Modifying Height

3. Reset the height value to 3.50.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 3: Creating a Pedestal Part

Task 1. Create a Pedestal part.

1. Zoom in under the fan. Notice there is actually no model mountingthe fan assembly to the SUPPORT_ARM.

2. Using your own techniques, create a model called pedestal. Be sureto create it in the context of the proper subassembly and to use topdown design techniques to help create the geometry.


This model oscillates with the Fan Unit. Assemble the modelaccordingly before creating Copy Geom features.

3. One possibility for this model is shown in the following figures.

Figure 25: Creating Pedestal

Figure 26: Possible Pedestal Shape



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 4: Finishing a Model

Task 1. Create finishing geometry features on the rear cover.

1. Creating a cylindrical surface in the skeleton to represent theelectrical access hole. Make sure to reference it appropriately so itwill oscillate freely with the skeleton.

Figure 27: New Cylindrical surface

2. Link the diameter of the cylinder to the ELEC_HOLE_DIA layoutparameter, and Regenerate.

3. Use a Copy Geom feature to copy this surface to the cover

4. Use the surface to create a cut as shown in the following figure.

Figure 28: Creating Electrical Access Hole

Task 2. Complete the base part.

1. Add three swept protrusions to form stylish ribs on the base.



NOTES

Figure 29: Creating Stylish Ribs

Task 3. Complete the support arm.

1. Add a round to the support arm, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 30: Rounding Support Arm



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 5: Creating Exploded States

Task 1. Create exploded states.

1. Create the exploded state EXP_ALL

Figure 31: Explode State EXP_ALL

2. Create the exploded state EXP_SUB.

Figure 32: Explode State EXP_SUB



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 6: Testing SizeRequirements

Task 1. Test the assembly against initial design specs for overall size.

1. Open the BOX part.

2. Declare the BOX part to the Layout and link the values for maxheight, width, and depth to the appropriate dimensions of the box.

3. Regenerate the model.

4. Assemble the box to the top-level assembly. Use an Automaticconstraint on the base, and then use the dynamic componentplacement functions to see if the assembly will ‘fit’ in the box.

Figure 33: Using Dynamic Component Placement Functions



NOTES

Figure 34: Completing Placement

5. Complete placement using a fix constraint, and then suppress theBOX part.

Task 2. Save the project.

1. Blank any unneeded layers and Save Status.

2. Save the completed assembly.


Page 18-1

Module

Resolving FailuresIn this module you learn about the Resolve Environment and

Pro/ENGINEER’s solutions for regenerating a failed feature.

Objectives


• Diagnose the cause of a regeneration failure.

• Fix the regeneration failure.



NOTES

DEFINING REGENERATION FAILUREBecause of Pro/ENGINEER’s parametric nature, when you make a changein your design at any level in the model, it automatically propagatesthroughout the entire assembly. This creates dependencies known asparent/child relationships. If a conflict develops or the relationship isviolated, regeneration failure occurs.

When Pro/ENGINEER is unable to regenerate a feature, it cannotconstruct the model geometry. Usually the problem occurs because afeature was changed and now conflicts with or invalidates other features,as would be the case in the following:

• A feature is improperly defined causing it to be unattached.

• A feature is resumed that now conflicts with another.

• The feature intersection is no longer valid because dimensionalchanges have moved the intersecting surfaces.

• A reference is missing because you have redefined or deleted theparent features or components.

• The feature is defined improperly.

• The model no longer satisfies the pattern restrictions.

• The new geometry is invalid due to feature definition.

• Component is missing.

USING THE RESOLVE ENVIRONMENTPro/ENGINEER always checks the model geometry as it regeneratesfeatures. When a regeneration failure occurs, you must resolve theproblem before continuing with normal model processing to protect thedesign intent of the model.

Using the Resolve Environment, you can address the failure problemusing any of the following methods:

• Undo all of the changes that you have made since the last successfulregeneration.

• Diagnose the cause of the model failure using the current (failed)model or the backup model.


Reso lv ing Fa i lu res Page 18-3

NOTES

• Attempt a quick fix of the problem using shortcuts for performingstandard operations on the failed feature only.

• Change the failed model or a backup model using standard part orassembly functionality.

Diagnosing the Failure

Often, the most challenging task that you must perform in order to solveregeneration problems is determining why the feature failed regeneration.If the information the system provides in the DIAGNOSTICS window isnot sufficient, you can use the INVESTIGATE menu to access other toolsthat can assist you in determining the cause.

In addition to using these tools, you must determine how the failed itemwas constructed, the potential limitations of the method that was used, andwhich of these areas is the source of the failure.

Fixing the Failure

The method that you use to resolve the regeneration failure depends uponthe information that you obtain through your investigation of the problem.If you determine that you should not have made the original modification,you can use the Fix Model or Quick Fix option to undo any changes andreturn your model to its original state.

Working on the Failed Feature Only

The Quick Fix option allows you to use a shortcut method to work on thefailed feature only. Using the QUICK FIX menu, you can redefine, reroute,delete, or suppress the feature.

Note:

Suppressing features and components is an easy way to exitout of the RESOLVE menu. However, you must correct theproblem in order to resume the suppressed features orcomponents and continue with the project.

Working on Any Feature

The Fix Model option allows you to work on any feature in the currentmodel or the backup model.



NOTES

Examples of Regeneration ProblemsTable 1 lists eight typical failure scenarios and a possible resolution foreach. The example that follows illustrates how to resolve a failureresulting from a missing component and missing feature references.

Table 1: Regeneration Failures with Possible Solutions

Type of Failure: Possible Solution:

Unattached feature: direction of featurecreation is away from the solid.

Redefine the direction of the feature sothat it points into the solid.

Unattached feature: open sectionprotrusion falls off the bounding surface.

Redefine the section of the feature tomake it a closed section.

System resumes feature that conflictswith another feature.

Use Fix Model to suppress or delete thefirst regenerated feature or use QuickFix to suppress or delete the second one.

Intersection of features is no longer valid. Use Quick Fix and Reroute to changethe reference to the new reference.

References are missing due to theredefinition or the deletion of the parentcomponent or feature.

Use Investigate to find whichreferences are missing. Use Quick Fixand Reroute or Redefine to select newreferences.

Improper feature definition: shellthickness is larger than the radius ofcurvature of the surface.

Use the Info menu and create an offsetmesh to determine maximum allowedthickness. Use Quick Fix to change thethickness of the shell. Use Fix Model tomodify the radius of curvature of thefeature.

Pattern restrictions are no longer satisfied. Use Quick Fix and Redefine tochange the pattern option to Varying orGeneral.

Component is missing. Use Quick Fix and Find Componentfor retrieving the missed component.

Use Quick Fix and Quit Retr to stopretrieving the assembly; then find thecomponent file and retrieve it intosession, or move the file into theassembly directory. Set up a search pathto the failing component.



NOTES

Figure 1: Valve Assembly

The following figure shows a valve assembly that was created by anotheruser. When you retrieve it to make changes, the system automaticallyplaces you in the Resolve Environment.

Figure 2: Failure Due to Missing Component

The FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window identifies the cause of the failure tobe a missing component. When you retrieve the assembly again, theFAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window displays, as shown in the followingfigure. The system identifies the cause of this failure to be the thirdcomponent because its feature references are missing.



NOTES

Figure 3: Failure Due to Missing Feature References

When you use Redefine in the QUICK FIX menu to change the referenceto the surface of the shaft, the second constraint shows a missingreference. Once you define the missing assembly reference, the assemblyregenerates successfully.



NOTES

Figure 4: COMPONENT PLACEMENT Dialog Box



NOTES


Goal

In this laboratory you use the Resolve mode to investigate failing feature

in a model.

Method

In the following exercises you will perform operations that will cause themodel to fail. You should focus on how to investigate why the failureoccurred and then use the tools available to correct the problem.

Tools

Table 2: Resolving Failures Icons

Icons DescriptionSelect

Step Forward

Done

Trim Entities

EXERCISE 1: Resolving Failures

Figure 5: Air-Cleaner RS Part Before and After Changes



NOTES

Task 1. Retrieve the air cleaner and determine how it was created.


2. Open AIR_CLEANER_RS.PRT.

3. Click Utilities > Model Player to step through the model. Click

then select BASE-PROTRUSION from screen or model tree.

Then select to step forward.

Figure 6: Model Player

4. After reviewing the model, close the MODEL PLAYER dialog box.

Task 2. Change the base solid by replacing the tangent arcs with non-tangent arcs.

1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click BASE-PROTRUSION >Redefine.

2. Double-click Section. Click Sketch.

3. Delete the two tangent end arcs. Select one of the arcs. Press<DELETE>. Click Yes in the message area and continue. Deletethe other arc. Click Yes to delete the reference.

4. Sketch two new 3-point arcs that are non-tangent and dimensionthem accordingly.



NOTES

Figure 7: Changing the Section

5. Click View > Default Orientation.

Tips & Techniques:

To quickly change to the default view, you can press <CTRL><D>.

6. Finish the redefinition. Click > OK.

Task 3. The model fails regeneration. Determine what has failed and thecause.

1. Review the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. Read theinformation that Pro/ENGINEER provides concerning the failedfeature.

2. Interrogate further by extracting feature information. ClickFeature Info from the FAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window. Reviewthe various elements of the feature. Notice that the round’sreferences are missing.



NOTES

Task 4. The failed feature is the edge round. It is sometimes beneficialto work with a backup model to investigate and even resolve the failure ofthe model. Use a backup to resolve the failure.

1. In the RESOLVE FEAT menu, click Investigate > Backup Model> Confirm. An OPEN dialog box displays. Double clickAIR_CLEANER_RS.PRT. Click Roll Model > Before Fail.

2. Show the references used for the failing feature. Click Show Ref.Expand the BASE-PROTRUSION using + icon.

Figure 8: Investigating the References

3. Select EDGE ID 223. Notice that the edge highlights on the model.

4. Right-click Edge id 223 > Info. Close the Information Window.

5. Right-click Edge id 34 > Entity Info. Close the InformationWindow.



NOTES

6. The circular edges do not highlight when selected because they aremissing references. Close the dialog box.

Task 5. The round failed because you deleted the circular edges thatwere referenced and re-sketched new ones. Change the round so that itreferences these new edges.

1. Redefine the references used by the round. Click Quick Fix >Redefine > Confirm.

2. Double-click References. Click Confirm.

3. Select the arc edges that are not highlighted. Click Done.

4. Type [.4]. Select Preview; then OK.

Task 6. The round feature successfully regenerates, but the next featurein the regeneration cycle fails. Determine the reason for the failure.

1. Click Investigate > Backup Modl > Roll Model > Failed Feat >Show Ref. The A_2 datum axis was created through the cylindricalend surface on the part. Notice that four holes are children of thisfeature and cannot be regenerated.

Figure 9: References of the Backup-model



NOTES

2. Close the Reference Information Window.

3. Click Investigate> Current Modl > Show Ref to see thedifference. The reference of axis A_2 is now marked as missing.

Figure 10: References of the Current-model

4. Click Quick Fix > Reroute > Missing Refs > Done. Select therevolved surface for the axis reference on the left side of the part.

5. Automatically reroute all of the children features. Click AllChildren.

Task 7. The identical pattern now fails. Change the pattern type.

1. Click Fix Model > Modify > Value. Select the first Pattern(Cut)feature from the Model Tree. Select the cut offset dimension (1.50),and change it to 0.75. Also modify the number of pattern cuts from5 to 3.



NOTES

Figure 11: Modifying the Pattern

2. Click Regenerate.

Task 8. Change the pattern options using Resolve.

1. Do not exit from the Resolve environment. Click No to re-enter theRESOLVE menu.

2. Click Fix Model > Feature > Redefine. Select the pattern cut fromthe model tree.

3. From the dialog box, double-click Pattern. Click Pat Options >Varying > Done > Done/Return > OK.

4. Click Done/Return to exit RESOLVE mode.

Task 9. You could have avoided entering the Resolve environment ifyou had heeded the system’s warning when deleting the arcs. Instead,replace the old referenced section entities with newly sketched entities.Return the base protrusion to its original shape.

1. In the MODEL TREE, right-click BASE-PROTRUSION >Redefine.


3. Sketch the two tangent end arcs as shown in the following figure,but do not delete the non-tangent arcs.



NOTES

Figure 12: Sketching for Replacement

4. Click Edit > Replace. Select one of the newly created arcs; thenselect the closest non-tangent arc. Click Yes, if asked to deletedimensions. Notice that Sketcher automatically deleted the originalarc.

Note:

One arc has a radius dimension. When you select that arc, youmust click Yes to confirm the removal of the dimension.

5. Replace the other arc and finish the redefine.

6. Click > OK.




NOTES

EXERCISE 2: Resolving Assembly Failures

Task 1. Open the carburetor assembly. As the system retrieves theassembly into memory, it reports any problems in the message area. AFAILURE DIAGNOSTICS window displays at the top of the screen.Review the information in the window.

1. Open CARBURETOR_RESOLVE.ASM.

2. Click Feature Info. The system indicates that the failedcomponent is CARB_BOWL.PRT and why it failed.

Task 2. The component failed because the component model is missing.The part is not in the current directory, nor is there a search path set for thedirectory in which it resides. Locate the missing component, retrieve itmanually and back it up to the RESOLVE directory.

1. Click Quick Fix > Find Component.

2. Open CARB_BOWL.PRT from the MOVED_COMP directory.

3. Click Yes. Now the retrieval of the assembly is completed.

4. Open CARB_BOWL.PRT with right-click in the model tree. Thenclick File > Backup. Make sure that the current directorycorresponds to the name of the current module. Click OK.

5. Close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not Displayed >OK.

Task 3. Since the part is in the same directory asRESOLVE_CARBURETOR.ASM, there will be no failure when youretrieve the assembly again.

1. Open CARBURETOR_RESOLVE.ASM again.

2. Click > LEFT. The model should display as shown in thefollowing figure. The shape of the backing plate should match theshape of the air cleaner on the sides, but it does not.



NOTES

Figure 13: Setting the View

Note:

Notice that the shape of the backing plate does not match theair cleaner in the preceding figure.


Task 4. The assembly fails regeneration. Investigate the reason forfailure.

1. Read the DIAGNOSTICS window. It states that the backing platecomponent has an invalid external reference. Determine why itfailed. Click Investigate from the RESOLVE FEAT menu.

2. Identify the references for the feature. Click Show Ref.



NOTES

Figure 14: Missing References

3. Select the valid references in the PARENTS window. Notice thatthere are two missing references.

4. Close the dialog box.

Task 5. Redefine the failed feature’s section.

1. Click Quick Fix > Redefine > Confirm.


Task 6. The system dipslays a reference window with existing andmissing references. Pro/ENGINEER cannot find the external reference forthese arcs because the air cleaner base feature was redefined outside thecontext of the assembly. Change the section to reference the shape of theair cleaner.



NOTES

1. Select the two MISSING REFERENCES in the dialog box andclick Delete. Click on the remaining two references, then clickUpdate. Select the two edges as additional references, as shown inthe following figure. Close the dialog box.

Pick the inside edges ofthe shell

Figure 15: Using the Edge of the Air Cleaner

2. Replace the tangent arcs with the non-tangent arcs in the sketch.Zoom into the left side of the model.

Sketch this3 point arc

Figure 16: Left Side of Model

3. Sketch a 3 point arc on top of this reference.



NOTES

4. Repeat the process for the right side of the model.

Sketch this 3-point arc

Figure 17: Specify the right side reference

5. Click Edit > Replace. Select the newly sketched arc; select theoriginal tangent arc. Click Yes.

6. Repeat the process for the left side.

7. Trim the horizontal lines to the new non-tangent arcs. Click .

8. Select the new arc and line at the four corners to generate a closedloop.

9. Click > OK.

10. Click Yes to exit the Resolve environment.

Figure 18: The Finished Section



NOTES

Note:

The Replace option replaces internal references within thepart, as well as external references.

11. Save the model, close all windows, and click File > Erase > NotDisplayed >OK.



NOTES


• How to investigate why features fail.

• How to resolve feature failures in part and assembly mode.

• How to prevent features from failing using the Regeneration.


Page 19-1

Module

Pro/PROGRAMIn this module you learn how to use Pro/PROGRAM to automate

your design and build variations by incorporating user prompts into

the model regeneration cycle.

Objectives


• Automate the part and assembly design process in Pro/PROGRAM.

• Incorporate changes into the program.

• Run and edit the program.

• Use Pro/PROGRAM to manipulate part features from an assembly.



NOTES

USING Pro/PROGRAMFamily tables are effective when you know the variations of the design, orare sure that they are not going to change, as in part libraries.

Pro/PROGRAM is particularly useful when you do not know thevariations of a design in advance.

Figure 1: Custom Cabinet Variations

Defining the Program StructurePro/ENGINEER writes a program for every part and assembly as youbuild the model. The program is actually a script of Pro/ENGINEER’sactions as it regenerates. To build variations of your design, you canaccess this program and manipulate it. Every program has five sections:

• Header

• Input

• Relations

• Model Section

• Massprops

Automating the Part Design ProcessTo use Pro/PROGRAM to automate the design process for a part, youmust first create a generic model as the basis for the design variation andinclude all of the features needed for any of the design variations.

Perform these tasks to set up for part design automation:


Pro/PROGRAM Page 19-3

NOTES

• Add input statements. Using the Input section of the program, createprompts to supply the appropriate information using this standardformat:

Parameter_Name Parameter_Type

“prompt that you want displayed in themessage window”

• Write relations. Using relations, you can control the model andconvey information from the input statements to the model parameters.

Edit the model section. You can edit by adding logic statements.Generally, you add “if” statements to model features based on the inputstatements and relations.

The following is an example of an edited program file. The additions tothe program are denoted with a “•”.

Listing for Part Side_Panel

INPUT

• HEIGHT NUMBER

• "WHAT IS THE SIDE PANEL HEIGHT"

• D2 NUMBER

• "WHAT IS THE SIDE PANEL WIDTH"

• MATERIAL STRING

• "WHAT TYPE OF WOOD IS THE SIDE PANEL"

• DRAWER_CUT YES_NO

• "DOES THE SIDE PANEL SUPPORT A DRAWER"

END INPUT

RELATIONS

• D3=HEIGHT



NOTES

END RELATIONS

ADD FEATURE (initial number 1)

INTERNAL FEATURE ID 1

TYPE = DATUM PLANE

NAME = DTM1

END ADD



TYPE = DATUM PLANE

NAME = DTM2

END ADD



TYPE = DATUM PLANE

NAME = DTM3

END ADD



PARENTS = 1(#1) 5(#3) 3(#2)

PROTRUSION: Extrude

NO. ELEMENT NAME INFOSTATUS

--- ------------ -----------------



NOTES

1 Attributes One SideDefined

2 Section Sk. plane - Surface DTM2Defined

3 DirectionDefined

4 Depth Blind, depth = 1Defined

SECTION NAME = S2D0015

FEATURE’S DIMENSIONS:

d2 = 18.00

d3 = 30.00

d4 = 1.00

END ADD

• IF DRAWER_CUT==YES



PARENTS = 1(#1) 5(#3) 7(#4)

CUT: Extrude

NO. ELEMENT NAME INFO STATUS

--- ------------ ------------

1 Attributes One SideDefined

2 Section Sk.plane - Surface feat #4Defined

3 MaterialSide Inside sectionDefined

4 DirectionDefined



NOTES

5 Depth Blind, depth = 0.25Defined

SECTION NAME = S2D0016

FEATURE’S DIMENSIONS:

d6 = 2.00

d7 = 4.00

d8 = 2.00

d9 = .25

END ADD

• ENDIF

MASSPROP

END MASSPROP

Figure 2: Edited Program for Side Panel

Automating the Assembly Design ProcessUsing programs for the regeneration cycle of the assembly, you canexchange different components and communicate information to partprograms. To set up assembly design automation, perform the same tasksthat you would perform to automate part design as shown:

• Add input statements.

• Write relations.

• Edit the model section.

WIDTH NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE WIDTH OF THE CABINET"

HEIGHT NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE HEIGHT OF THE CABINET"



NOTES

DEPTH NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE DEPTH OF THE CABINET"

WOOD_TYPE STRING

"WHAT TYPE OF WOOD IS THE CABINET"

DRAWER YES_NO

"DOES THE CABINET HAVE A DRAWER"

IF DRAWER==YES

D_SIZE STRING

"WHICH DRAWER SIZE (DR_8, DR_12, OR DR_16)"

END IF

Figure 3: Input for Cabinet

Executing a Lower Level Program

You can use the EXECUTE…END EXECUTE statement to run a lowerlevel program (part or subassembly) from within the top-level assembly.The following is an example of communicating parameters using theexecute statement.

EXECUTE PART SIDE_PANEL

HEIGHT = HEIGHT

D2 = DEPTH

MATERIAL = WOOD_TYPE

DRAWER_CUT = DRAWER

END EXECUTE

Figure 4: Executing the Side Panel Program

Interchanging Components

When replacing one component with another, you can use family tableinstances of a component or subassembly to replace the generic modelwith any of its instances, as shown:



NOTES

Figure 5: Family Table for Drawer

By setting up a parameter and using it in the program, the systemautomatically selects the proper instance. You also add an input statementso that the system manually prompts you to specify an instance when youexecute the program. The following is an example with the inputparameter specifying size to determine the proper instance.

ADD PART (D_SIZE)

INTERNAL COMPONENT ID 27

PARENTS = 15(#9) 11(#5)

END ADD

Figure 6: Adding Correct Instance of the Drawer Part

Incorporating Changes into the ProgramWhen you exit from the editor after making changes to the program, thesystem automatically verifies that you have used proper syntax. If it findsan error, it requires you to correct it by re-editing the program.



NOTES

Running the ProgramOnce you have incorporated the program, Pro/ENGINEER automaticallyruns it. However, you can run it at any time simply by regenerating themodel since it is simply a script of the regeneration steps. Because theinput section is no longer empty, the system asks you to specify one of thefollowing methods to obtain the prompt values:

• Typing new values.

• Maintaining the current values.

• Reading values from a text file.

Note:

Once you have run a program, you can permanently save thatversion of the model by using the Instantiate option in thePROGRAM menu. The system adds an instance to the familytable for that version.

Editing the ProgramTo make troubleshooting easier, work with one task at a time. Incorporatechanges and then run the program to test each step. To make editingeasier, use these techniques:

• When renaming features, use the Names option in the SETUP menu.The system then shows the name in the section for that feature. Youcan use the editor’s search/find functionality to locate the feature.

• To change the symbol name for a dimension, use the Symbol option inthe DIM COSMETICS menu. This makes relations easier to write andinterpret.

• Add comment lines to the program using /*. Any comment lines thatyou add between the ADD and END ADD lines appear in the Feat Infowindow for that feature.



NOTES

Manipulating Features Using Pro/PROGRAMYou can also use Pro/PROGRAM to manipulate a feature within themodel in the following ways:

• Delete a feature or component. Delete all lines between andincluding the ADD and END ADD for that feature or component.

• Reorder a feature or component. Cut all lines between andincluding the ADD and END ADD for that feature or component, andpaste it in another location in the program.

• Suppress a feature or component. Add the word SUPPRESSEDafter the word ADD for that feature or component.

• Resume a feature or component. Delete the word SUPPRESSED inthe ADD statement for that feature/component.

• Modify a dimension. Add the word MODIFY before that dimension inthe model portion of the program, and then type the new value for thatdimension.

• Pause the regeneration. Add the INTERACT statement anywhere inthe model section. When Pro/ENGINEER regenerates the model, itpauses at the interact statement to ask you if you want to add otherfeatures to the model.



NOTES


In this laboratory you implement Pro/Program in the design process.

You also learn how to edit the existing program in a part and an

assembly to vary designs.

Method

In Exercises 1, you access the program, and manipulate the program tovary the styles of the rim part. The rims have different sizes, spoke styles,and mounting types.

EXERCISE 1: Automating Part Design

Figure 7: Start Part

Task 1. Open the rim part and investigate the work that has already beendone with the rim model’s program.


2. Open PGM_RIM.PRT.

3. Click Regenerate > Enter > Select All > Done Sel.

� To define the Rim Diameter, accept the default value and click

.



NOTES

� To define the Rim Width, accept the default value and click

� To include the Straight Spokes click No.

� To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes click Yes.

� To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes click No.

� To define the radius of the Spokes, accept the default value and

click

4. Wait until system regenerates the model.

Figure 8: Variation with Default Values

5. To generate a different variation, repeat Step 3 and respond to theprompts by typing your own values.

6. Repeat Step 3 to build several variations of rims.

7. Erase the model from memory. Click File > Erase > Current >Yes.

8. Open PGM_RIM.PRT again.

Note:

You must perform Step 5 to maintain consistent featurenumbering for the remainder of this exercise.

Task 2. Create a prompt for the mounting type. The rim will either uselug nuts or a spindle mount. Notice that all of the holes for either type areincluded in the model.

1. Click Program > Edit Design. Notice that system opens up theNotepad.



NOTES

2. In the Notepad, add the input statement to ask for the mountingtype. Locate the entry END INPUT and type the followingstatements before the entry. (Type only the statements that aregiven under parenthesis and are bold. Other entries are shown foryour convenience to easily locate the position where you have totype).

CURVE_RAD NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE RADIUS OF THE CURVED SPOKES?"

END IF

[MOUNT STRING]

["WHAT MOUNTING TYPE IS USED (LUG, SPINDLE)?"]

END INPUT

Note:

If you are using a Unix machine, you may need to use the vieditor. Refer to Appendix B of this guide for the most commonvi commands. To use another editor, you can set theconfiguration file option “pro_editor_command.”

3. Add an “if-else-endif” statement around the hole features.

� Scroll down and locate the entry ADD FEATURE (initialnumber 13). Type the following statement above the entry.Refer to the following paragraph.

MAIN PATTERN DIMENSIONS:

INCREMENTAL PATTERN DIMENSIONS:

d76 = 30.0

d79 = 3.50R

d80 = .75

d81 = .75

END ADD

END IF

[IF MOUNT=="LUG"]



NOTES



PARENTS = 88(#5) 4(#2) 14(#4)

� Type the following statement at the location shown in thefollowing paragraph.

END ADD

[ELSE]



PARENTS = 14(#4) 88(#5)

� Type the following statement at the location shown in thefollowing paragraph.

END ADD

[END IF]



PARENTS = 14(#4) 4(#2) 6(#3)

4. Exit the editor, click Yes to save the file.

5. Click Yes to incorporate your changes into the model.

Task 3. Study the changes that you have made in the program.

1. In the GET INPUT menu, click Enter.

2. Select Mount then click Done Sel. To specify the mounting type

accept the default SPINDLE and click .



NOTES

Figure 9

Task 4. Add a prompt to specify the number of lug nut holes needed.Since the prompt is only necessary when you select “LUG” as themounting type, use an IF statement in the input section after the input thatyou added earlier.

1. Click Program > Edit Design. Add the input statement for thenumber of holes. Type the following, just above the END INPUTentry.

MOUNT STRING

"WHAT MOUNTING TYPE IS USED (LUG, SPINDLE)?"

[IF MOUNT=="LUG"]

[NUM_HOLES NUMBER]

["HOW MANY MOUNTING HOLES ARE NEEDED?"]

[END IF]

END INPUT

2. Before the END RELATIONS entry, add a relation to set thenumber of instances in the pattern (P1) equal to the inputparameter (NUM_HOLES).

[/* SET THE NUMBER OF MOUNTING HOLES]

[P1=NUM_HOLES]



NOTES

[/* SET SPACING OF BOLT HOLES]

[D39=360/P1]

END RELATIONS

3. Exit the editor and click Yes to save the changes.

4. Click Yes to incorporate your changes into the model.

Task 5. Permanently save some rim variations for future use.

1. Regenerate the model.

2. Click Enter > Select All > Done Sel.

3. Provide the following input:

� To define Rim Diameter, accept the default [12].

� To define Rim Width, type [6].

� For Straight Spokes, click Yes.

� To select between right or left handed spokes, type [R].

� To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].

� To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].

� To select the Mounting, type [Lug]

� For number of holes, type [4]

Figure 10

4. Click Program > Instantiate to save the variation. Type [12X6-AR-4N].



NOTES

5. Regenerate again.

6. Click Enter. Select SIDE. Click Done Sel.

7. Type [L] for the side.

Figure 11

8. Click Program > Instantiate. Type [12X6-AL-4N] as the instancename.

Task 6. Create two more variations and save them as instances.

1. Using the procedure outlined in the previous task, create anothervariation and save the following configuration as 12X8-BR-SP.



� For Straight Spokes, click No.

� To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [Y].

� To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].

� Define the Curve Radius as [3.5].

� To select the Mounting, type [Spindle]



NOTES

Figure 12

2. Create another variation and save the following configuration as12X8-BL-SP.



� For Straight Spokes, click No.

� To include the Right Hand Curved Spokes, type [N].

� To include the Left Hand Curved Spokes, type [Y].

� Define the Curve Radius as [3.5].

� To select the Mounting, type [Spindle]

3. This has created instances in a family table. Look at the table.Select Family Tab. Close the editor when you have finished.



NOTES

Figure 13

4. Save the model and erase it from memory.



NOTES



OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Automating AssemblyDesign

Task 1. Create a prompt asking for the suspension offset values for eachside; then pass the values down to the front suspension skeleton with anexecute statement.

1. Open PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL.PRT. Display the model in HiddenLine mode.

Figure 14

2. Change to the RIGHT view.

3. Regenerate the part. Notice that some work has already been donein the program.

4. Click Enter > Select All > Done Sel. Type [6] and [–3] forR_OFFSET and L_OFFSET. The suspension changes to show thesuspension linkage motion.

5. Close the window.

6. Open PGM_FRT_SUSP.ASM. Notice that the changes made in theskeleton model reflect in the assembly.



NOTES

Figure 15

Task 2. It is more practical to control the program in the suspensionskeleton at the suspension assembly level. Use an execute statement topass down information from the assembly.

1. Click Program > Edit Design.

2. Type the input statements for the left and right offsets between theinput entry and the end input entry of the program.

INPUT

[R_OFFSET NUMBER]

[“WHAT IS THE RIGHT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO–9)”]

[L_OFFSET NUMBER]

[“WHAT IS THE LEFT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO –9)”]

END INPUT

3. Type an execute statement for the PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL.PRT. Inthis execute statement, pass the values of the assembly parametersR_OFFSET and L_OFFSET to the skeleton parameters of the samename. Type the statement immediately before the skeletoncomponent is added to the assembly. See the following:

RELATIONS

END RELATIONS



NOTES

[EXECUTE PART PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL]

[R_OFFSET = R_OFFSET]

[L_OFFSET = L_OFFSET]

[END EXECUTE]

ADD SKELETON MODEL PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL

4. Exit the editor save the changes.

5. Click Yes to incorporate the changes.

Task 3. Test the program.

1. In the GET INPUT menu, click Enter > Select All > Done Sel.

2. Enter any value between 10 to –9 for the Right Suspension Offset.

3. Enter any value between 10 to –9 for the Left Suspension Offset.

4. Notice the change and click Done Return.

Task 4. Use the program to automatically “swap out” components in theassembly. Create a prompt to ask which disks to use for the brakes. Twostyles are available, solid and vented. A functional interchange alreadyexists between the two.

1. Open PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB.ASM.

2. Type the input prompt for the disk type in the assembly program.Click Program > Edit Design.

INPUT

[BRAKES STRING]

["WHICH DISK DO YOU WANT (PGM_DISK_SOLID,PGM_DISK_VENTED)?"]

END INPUT



NOTES

3. Scroll down to the entry ADD PART PGM_DISK_SOLID. Add theEXECUTE and END EXECUTE lines to the program above theADD PGM_DISK_SOLID line. Delete the part namePGM_DISK_SOLID and type in [(BRAKES)] in its place.

END ADD

[EXECUTE ASSEMBLY PGM_BRAKES]

[END EXECUTE]

[ADD PART (BRAKES)]

INTERNAL COMPONENT ID 19

PARENTS = 16(#4) 18(#5)

Note:

The execute statement retrieves the interchange assembly intomemory so that the interchange can occur between the twocomponents.

4. Exit the editor and save the changes.

5. Click Yes incorporate the changes.

6. To test the program, click Enter > BRAKES > Done Sel. Type

[PGM_DISK_VENTED] and click .

Figure 16



NOTES

Task 5. Add a prompt asking for the style of brakes in the frontsuspension assembly; then pass this value down to the two wheel_hubassemblies.

1. Activate the PGM_FRT_SUSP.ASM window.

2. Click Program > Edit Design.

3. Add the input prompt for the brake style. It should be identical tothe input statement in the PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB.ASM. Youmust complete this step before adding the execute statement.

INPUT

R_OFFSET NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE RIGHT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO-9)"

L_OFFSET NUMBER

"WHAT IS THE LEFT SUSPENSION OFFSET? (10 TO -9)"

[BRAKES STRING]

["WHICH DISK DO YOU WANT (PGM_DISK_SOLID,PGM_DISK_VENTED)?"]

END INPUT

4. Just after END RELATIONS add an execute statements to pass thevalue to the PGM_WHEEL_RF_HUB subassembly.

END INPUT

RELATIONS

END RELATIONS

[EXECUTE ASSEMBLY PGM_RF_WHEEL_HUB]

[BRAKES = BRAKES]

[END EXECUTE]

EXECUTE PART PGM_FRT_SUSP_SKEL

R_OFFSET = R_OFFSET



NOTES

L_OFFSET = L_OFFSET

END EXECUTE

5. Exit the editor and incorporate the changes.

6. To test the program, click Enter > BRAKES > Done Sel. Type

[PGM_DISK_SOLID] and click .

7. Regenerate to build different suspension configurations.


9. {Optional} Set up parameter BRAKES in thePGM_LF_WHEEL_HUB assembly as you did for the right frontassembly; then add an execute statement in the front suspensionassembly to pass down the parameter information.

10. Save the assembly and erase all models from memory when youhave finished (use Current and Not Displayed).



NOTES


• How to automate the design process to generate different variations ofthe model at the part and the assembly level.

• How to run the program using Regenerate.

• How to access the program using Edit Design.

• How to incorporate the program’s changes into the model.

• How to vary the design in the assembly and part modes.

• How to create family table instances from the variations.

• How to use Pro/Program to manipulate features.


Page 20-1

Module

Mechanism & Design AnimationIn this module you learn the process for implementing Mechanism

Design and Design Animation.

Mechanism (MDX) allows you to test and showcase motion and

flexibility of finished parts in an assembly.

Design animation (DAO) gives you the capability of creating custom

animations such as exploding/unexploding sequences, views, and

mechanism motion.

Objectives


• Describe the applications of Mechanism Design.

• Describe the major steps of implementing Mechanism Design.

• Create a simple mechanism.

• List the capabilities of Design Animation.

• Create a simple animation.

• Export an animated MPEG movie.



NOTES

DEFINING MECHANISM ANIMATIONThe Pro/ENGINEER Mechanism Design Extension (MDX) is a kinematicmotion simulation package that provides behavioral insight into theassembly. Through easily defined connections during assembly creation,MDX enables you to build “kinematic intelligence” into your assembly atthe very beginning of the product development process. Once assembled,you can investigate your design by animating the mechanism throughoutthe range of motion.

The results of the motion animation not only provide graphical illustrationof the mechanism, but also yield engineering information that canfacilitate the design, such as interference analysis and cam profilesynthesis. When used in conjunction with Behavioral Modeling Extension(BMX), MDX can be used to create optimized design based on measuredgeometry information. When a full dynamics simulation is needed,assemblies created using MDX be easily reused in

Figure 1: Mechanism Design Window


Mechan ism & Design An imat ion Page 20-3

NOTES

CREATING MECHANISM ASSEMBLIESOne of the first steps in mechanism design is to simulate assembly motion.By assembling the movable components using connections, you can createa movable system instead of one rigid body.

Comparing Connections to ConstraintsSimilar to assembly constraints, assembly connections are used to connectcomponents together. The connection types are defined by using the samekind of assembly components that you would use in a real-world situation.These assembly components include pins, bearings, and so on.

Each connection type is associated with a unique set of geometricconstraints that are based on existing constraints used in Pro/ENGINEERAssembly mode. For example, a pin connection contains two geometricconstraints: an axis alignment constraint and a plane alignment constraint.

Selecting a Connection TypeThe following table lists the eight available connection types on theComponent Placement dialog box, as well as the icons and DOFs:

Table 1: Connection Types

ConnectionType

Icon in GraphicWindow

Icon in theModel Tree

DOFs

Pin 1

Cylinder 2

Slider 1

Planar 3

Weld 0

Ball 3

Bearing 4

Rigid

Note:

In addition to these types of connections, advancedconnections such as cam and slot are also available.



NOTES

SIMULATING MOTION

Dragging Assembly ComponentsDragging is a powerful way to move your mechanism through anallowable range of motion. Using the drag icons in the DRAG dialog box,you can select a body that is not defined as ground and drag it with themouse. You can also have a body translate along or rotate about the axisof a coordinate system.

Figure 2: Snapshots and Constraints in the DRAG Dialog Box

Drivers and MotionAs part of your mechanism analysis, you can use a driver to studykinematic behavior in your designs. Drivers behave like motors in thatthey exert forces between two bodies within a single degree of freedom(DOF). You can add drivers to your model to prepare it for a motionstudy.



NOTES

When configuring a driver you specify:

• Driver Type: Translation or Rotation.

• Profile Specification: Position, Velocity or Acceleration.

• Profile Magnitude: Constant, Ramp, Cosine, Sine Constant CosineAcceleration, Cycloidal, Parabolic, Polynomial, or Table driven.

Each profile magnitude will require different inputs for values. The profilemagnitude can then be graphed using the inputted values for visualrepresentation. The following example is for a Ramp driver.

Figure 3: Ramp Driver Graph

Selecting a DriverYou can impose drivers on joint axes or on geometric entities such aspoints, planar surfaces, and datum planes.

Joint Axis Drivers

Joint axis drivers are used to define the relative motion between twobodies in the joint axis direction.



NOTES

Geometric Drivers

Geometric drivers are used to define motion (rotation or translation) onpoints or planes. They are useful when the motion cannot be defined usinga joint axis, for example:

• The two bodies involved in the motion are not directly connected by ajoint.

• DOF needed cannot be satisfied by any existing connection.

• Complex 3-D motions as opposed to single translation or rotation isneeded.

IMPLEMENTING MECHANISMUsing Mechanism Design involves two fundamental steps: defining amechanism and making it move. Depending on whether there are cam andslot connections in the mechanism, the major steps of implementingmechanism design is slightly different.

Mechanism Design without Cam and SlotConnections• Creating assembly connections� ��

are intended to move by using connections enables you to create amovable system instead of one rigid body.



NOTES

• Defining Joint Axis Settings� ��quantitatively describe the displacement, set the range of the motionand choose the default configuration used in regeneration.

• Moving the assembly

� �� !��"�� Using the Drag functionality, you can move the mechanismthrough an allowable range of motion interactively.

� #�� $��%�� to impose a particular motion on a mechanism. The mechanismwill move according to your design intent that has been build in theconnections, the joint axis settings and the drivers.

• Applying the results� �&��'� ��perform various engineering studies, as well as generate movie andimage files for visualization purposes.

� Generate movie/image output

� Interference study

� Generate Motion Envelope

� Create Trace curve/Cam synthesis curve

� Graph measure results



NOTES

• Perform Sensitivity and Optimization studies in conjunction withBMX� �(�� the workload when setting up for performing studies, as opposed tocreating assembly skeletons. The build in functionality allows you tocontinuously monitor parameters within the motion range.

Mechanism Design with Cam and Slot ConnectionsYou can create the advanced cam and slot connections in a similar fashionafter you first assemble the component into the assembly using the regularconnections. Using cam and slot connections, you can capture motionsthat are very difficult to accomplish using the regular connections orskeletons.

Figure 4: CAM and SLOT FOLLOWER CONNECTIONS Dialog Boxes



NOTES

DEFINING DESIGN ANIMATIONThe Pro/ENGINEER® Design Animation Option enables the creation ofanimation sequences within Pro/ENGINEER, using parts, assemblies, andmechanisms.

Using key frames, drivers and inherited mechanism joints, animations canbe created and manipulated with ease. These animation sequences can beused as:

• Away convey complex information about a product or process.

• Animated guides to assembly and disassembly.

• Guides for maintenance procedures.

• Concept communication tools for sales and marketing, managementmeetings, design reviews.

• A method for remote communication of information.

Design Animation is associative, so that any changes made to thePro/ENGINEER design are fully propagated throughout the animation—making sure the animation presented is always up-to-date and correct.

Photorealistic animations can also be created combining Pro/ENGINEER'sphotorendering technology with Design Animation.



NOTES

Figure 5: Design Animation of Assembly

DESIGN ANIMATION CAPABILITIES

Integrated and associativeDesign Animation is an integrated part of Pro/ENGINEER, so there are nodata transfer problems usually found with 3rd party animation packages,and users benefit from full associativity and interoperability with otherPTC products and data management tools. If the design of parts orassemblies change, the animation will update automatically.

Key frame sequencesThe user defines the key frame sequences that describe the position andorientation of parts and assemblies at specified times. Design Animationinterpolates between these key frames to produce a smooth animation.

Simply snapping current positions and orientations in Pro/ENGINEER caneasily create Key frames.



NOTES

Figure 6: Key Frame Sequence Dialog Box

Animation ToolsDesign Animation delivers powerful assembly manipulation functionalityto help quickly set up key frames by allowing the user to specifygeometric constraints, translational and rotational dragging, body lockingand other tools. This allows for rapid manipulation of part positions toquickly build key frame sequences and animations.



NOTES

Figure 7: DRAG Dialog Box

Animation ManagerEvents, key frames, and sub-animations are displayed and controlled bythe easy-to-use animation manager. From this one panel, users can quicklyand easily define, manipulate, and change any aspect of the animation.

Figure 8: Managing Animation

Mechanism Re-useThe mechanism joints used to create and move assemblies in MechanismDesign are re-used by Design Animation where they can be selectivelyactivated and de-activated at any stage during animation sequences.



NOTES

LABORATORY EXERCISES

Goal

In this laboratory you practice with the fundamental mechanism and

design animation functionality.

Method

In Exercise 1, you create a mechanism of the Fan project assembly.

Tools

Table 2: Icons for Mechanism and Animation

Icons DescriptionSnapshot

Set coordinate system

Select and drag geometry

Drag link

Select connections

Add constraint

Align constraint

Body lock constraint

Animation icons display

Assemble default constraint



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Creating a Basic Mechanism

Task 1. Prepare for creating the mechanism, and view the exercise goal.


2. Use windows to navigate to thefund_design_320/20_mechnism_animation directory. Double-click FINISHED_MECHANISM mpg file to use your computersdefault mpeg player. (Or, you may double-click theMPEG_PLAYER.EXE file and use it to play the mpeg). Review themotion.

3. After viewing the FINISHED_ANIMATION mpeg, close the playerand return to Pro/ENGINEER..

Task 2. Create a new assembly and assemble the base subassembly.

1. Create a new assembly called MECHANISM using the defaulttemplate.

2. Assemble the MECH_BASE assembly with a default constraint.

Figure 9: Assembling Base



NOTES

3. Open the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly, and suppress the HUB,BLADES, and CAGE.

Figure 10: Suppressing Features

4. Close the MECH_OSCILLATE window.

5. Activate the MECHANISM window.

Task 3. Assemble the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly using a connection.

1. Begin to assemble the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly. Use themouse to position approximately, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 11: Positioning

2. In the COMPONENT PLACEMENT dialog box, click Connectionsto expand the dialog box. Notice that it enables you to usemechanism connections instead of typical constraints.

3. Notice the default connection is a PIN joint. Select the two surfacesshown in the following figure to satisfy the Axis Alignment.



NOTES

Figure 12: Selecting Surfaces for Axis Alignment

4. Select the two surfaces shown in the following figure to satisfy theTranslation requirement. (This will effectively mate the surfaces.)

Figure 13: Mating Surfaces

5. Click OK > Done Return.

Task 4. Dynamically drag the assembly.

1. In the ASSEMBLY menu, click Mechanism > Drag, and select onthe tip of the main driveshaft.

2. Move the mouse and notice how the pin joint has constrained thesubassembly. Position as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 14: Positioning Subassemblies


Task 5. Assemble the DRIVE_ARM using a connection.

1. Assemble the DRIVE_ARM. Establish the connection using a Pinjoint.

2. Using Mechanism > Drag, drag the part and locate it to theposition shown in the following figure.

Note:

Be careful when dragging the drive arm since you are also ableto drag the MECH_OSCILLATE assembly. An alternatetechnique is to use the Move tab from the ComponentPlacement dialog box, as this will only move the currentcomponent.

Figure 15: Drag to Position



NOTES


Task 6. Create the first driver.

1. In the MECHANISM dialog box, click Model > Drivers > Add ,and select the joint axis, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 16: Selecting Joint Axis

2. In the DRIVE EDITOR dialog box, click the Profile tab and set theSpecification to Velocity.

3. Leave the MAGNITUDE set to Constant and type [36.0] as thevalue for A.

4. Click Graph to view the function to be applied to this driver. Closethe Driver Profile and Graph Options windows.

5. Name the Driver [AUX] and click OK > Close.

Task 7. Run the mechanism.

1. In the MECHANISM dialog box, click Connect > Run >Yes.

2. Click Run Motion > Add, and type [FAN] as the name. Notice thetime length of 10 seconds. Leave all the default values and clickOK.

Note:

We entered 36 deg/sec for the velocity and 10 seconds timeduration. Therefore we will have 36x10 = 360° of angularmotion.

3. Zoom in to the DRIVE_ARM.



NOTES

Figure 17: Zoomed View

4. In the MOTIONS DEFINITIONS dialog box, click Run.

5. Close the MOTION DEFINITIONS dialog box, and Click Done-Return > Yes to exit Mechanism.

Task 8. Assemble the LINK with two connections.

1. Assemble the LINK with a Pin connection to the support arm, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 18: Assembling Link with a Pin

2. Click to add another connection. Set the Type to Cylinderand select the surfaces, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES


Task 9. Run the Mechanism with interference checking.

1. Click Ok. Then Click Mechanism > Connect > Run >Yes.

2. Click Run Motion > Run. The mechanism should cycle throughone complete oscillation.

Figure 20: Running Motion

3. Click Close > Results > Playback. Click , andselect the LINK and the PEDESTAL.

4. Repaint the screen. In the RESULTS PLAYBACK dialog box, clickPlay. Set the options in the ANIMATE dialog box, as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 21: Animate Dialog Box

5. Click . Notice that the Link interferes with the Pedestalduring portions of the oscillation.

Figure 22: Link Interferes

Note:

You may zoom, rotate, pan, and change model and datumdisplay while animation is running.

6. Click and close the ANIMATE dialog box.

7. Close the RESULTS PLAYBACK window and click Done-Return> Yes to exit Mechanism.

8. Save the model and close all windows.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISESThe following exercises provide supplementary tools and techniques

related to this module’s goal. You may work on these as time allows.

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 1: Completing the FanMechanism

Task 1. Establish motion on the drive shaft with a connection anddriver.

1. Open MECHANISM.ASM.

2. Select F3_DRIVESHAFT part and redefine it.

3. Click to delete all constraints. Then click Connections toexpand the dialog box.

4. Create an axis alignment between the following two surfaces.

Figure 23: Aligning Axes

5. Satisfy the translation requirement by selecting the two surfaces, asshown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 24: Selecting Two Surfaces

6. Click OK to complete the redefinition.

Task 2. Add the second driver.

1. Click Mechanism > Model > Drivers > Add, and select the jointaxis, as shown in the following figure. Use Flip to make themagenta direction arrow point inwards.

Figure 25: Selecting Joint Axes

2. Type [MAIN] as the name and click Profile.

3. Set the Specification to Velocity and type [108] as the value for‘A’ using a Constant Magnitude.

4. Click Ok > Close.

Note:

We entered 108 deg/sec for the velocity and 10 seconds timeduration. Therefore we will have 108x10 = 3x360° of angularmotion.



NOTES

Task 3. Run the Mechanism.

1. Click Connect > Run >Yes.

2. Click Run Motion > Edit > Driver. Select the MAIN Driver andclick Add.

3. Click OK and Run. Notice the shaft now rotates during theoscillation.

Figure 26: Shaft Rotates

Task 4. Run the Mechanism on the full assembly.

1. Exit mechanism and Resume the HUB, BLADES, and CAGE.

2. Redefine the HUB. Notice that it is simply assembled with typicalconstraints to the SHAFT. Cancel the Redefine.

3. Type [Mechanism] and click Run Motion > Run. Observe themotion, then click Close.

4. Click Results > Playback. Set the same Two Parts interferenceas before, and click Play.



NOTES

Figure 27: Oscillating Fan

Task 5. Optional: Output a movie.

1. Click Capture, and type a filename. Click Ok. The MPEG outputwill take about 10 minutes to generate.

2. Use windows to find and play your movie file.


Note:

If you are having trouble with your mechanism, you can usethe saved one if you wish. Clear all memory, and open theFINISHED_MECHANISM.ASM. Then enter mechanismresults playback and restore the FINISHED_FAN.PBK file.



NOTES

OPTIONAL EXERCISE 2: Creating an Animation

Task 1. Prepare for creating the animation. View the finished MPEGmovie.

1. Use windows to navigate to thefund_design_320/20_mechnism_animation directory. Double-click FINISHED_ANIMATION mpeg file to use your computersdefault mpeg player. (Or, you may double-click theMPEG_PLAYER.EXE file and use it to play the mpeg).

2. Close the Mpeg player and return to Pro/ENGINEER.

3. Open ANIMATION.ASM.

Figure 28: Animation Assembly

4. Click Applications > Animation.

5. Click > > OK. To display local coordinatesystems.

6. Create a saved view called [cage_blades], as shown in thefollowing figure.



NOTES

Figure 29: Cage Blades View

7. Create a saved view called [ISO] as shown.

Figure 30: ISO View

8. Reorient approximately, as shown in the following figure and savethe view as [start].



NOTES

Figure 31: Reorienting View

Task 2. Initiate bodies and begin taking snapshots

1. Click . Click One Part Per Body.

2. Click the Ground body and click Edit.

3. Select the MAIN_BASE, SUPPORT_ARM, and MOTOR parts andclick Done Sel > Ok. Close the BODIES dialog box.

4. Click > to take the first snapshot.

5. Click and select the HOUSING_REAR part to set the currentCsys.

Task 3. Create a series of snapshots for the cage and blades.

1. Click , select the Cage part, and drag to a positionapproximately as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 32: Creating Snapshots

2. Click to take the second snapshot.

3. Click and drag the first fin to the position, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 33: Position for Third Snapshot

4. Click to take the third snapshot.

5. Take the fourth snapshot, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 34: Fourth Snapshot

6. Take the fifth snapshot, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 35: Fifth Snapshot

7. The sixth snapshot is shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 36: Sixth Snapshot

8. The seventh snapshot is shown in the following figure.

Figure 37: Seventh Snapshot

9. Create the next snapshot, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 38: Eighth Snapshot

Task 4. Create a saved view for the linkage and take linkage snapshots.

1. Zoom as shown below and create a saved view called[zoom_link].

2. Click Constraints > and select the connections shown in thefollowing figure to temporarily disable them.

Figure 39: Selecting Constraints to Disable

3. Click > and select the LINK to set the active Csys.

4. Click , drag the link, and create the ninth snapshot, as shownin the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 40: Ninth Snapshot

5. Click and drag to create the tenth snapshot, as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 41: Tenth Snapshot

6. Snapshot 11 is shown in the following figure. (Hint- you will haveto disable a constraint and re-select a Csys.)



NOTES

Figure 42: Eleventh Snapshot

7. Zoom and create the saved view [hub_covers], as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 43: Zooming in to Create a New Saved View

8. Click and select the REAR_COVER part to set the currentCsys.

9. Create Snapshot12 as shown.



NOTES

Figure 44: Twelfth Snapshot

10. Take Snapshot13 as shown in the following figure.

Figure 45: Thirteenth Snapshot

11. Take Snapshot14, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 46: Fourteenth Snapshot

12. Close the DRAG dialog box.

13. Click Utilities > Time Domain, and edit the End Time to [30]seconds. Click OK.

14. Click to being Key Frame Sequence (KFS) creation.



NOTES

15. Click to add Snapshot1 to the KFS.

16. Select Snapshot2, type [1.0] as the time, and click .

17. Add the remaining Snapshots, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 47: Adding Snapshot to Key Frame Sequence

18. Click OK and then click to test the animation. Click Stopwhen the moving timeline reaches 15 seconds.

19. Move the key frames for the cage and blades to be closer togetheron the timeline, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 48: Adjusting Timeline

20. Click to test the animation again. Click Stop when themoving timeline reaches 15 seconds.



NOTES

21. Select the KFS timeline as shown in the following figure.Click

> Edit KFS.

Figure 49: Selecting Timeline

22. Edit the times, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 50: Editing Times

Figure 51: Important Note

23. Add in Snapshots 13 – 1 in a mirror sequence from time 14 to time23, as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 52: Adding Snapshots in a “Mirror” Sequence

24. Click Ok > to test the animation.

Task 5. Add views to the timeline.

1. Click Utilities > Time Domain to temporarily edit the End Time to[12] seconds. Click OK.

2. Click , and select the named view START, set the time valueto [0.5] and click Apply.

3. Select the named view Cage_Blades, set the time value to [1.5]and click Apply.

Note:

All saved views on the timeline in this exercise should havetheir ‘After’ value set to ‘START’.

4. Click Close > to test the animation.

5. Click , select the Cage_Blades view, set the time value to[4.5] and click Apply.



NOTES

6. Apply the Zoom_Link view to a time of [6.0].

7. Apply the Zoom_Link view to a time of [10.0]. Refer to thefigure below.

Figure 53: Studying the Timeline


9. Click Utilities > Time Domain to temporarily edit the End Time to[20] seconds. Click OK.

10. Click , select the Hub_Covers view, set the time value to[10.5] and click Apply > Close.

11. Click on the and select Zoom In. Then select awindow, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 54: Picking a Window

12. Click , select the Hub_Covers view, set the time value to[13.5] and click Apply. Repeat for a value of [15.5].

13. Select the Zoom_Link view, set the time value to [16.5] and clickApply.

Figure 55: Setting Time Value



NOTES


15. Select the Start view, set the time value to [19] and click Apply.

16. Click Utilities > Time Domain and edit the End Time to [30]seconds. Click OK.

17. Add the Start view at a time value of [22.5].

18. Add the ISO view at a time value of [23.5].

19. Click on the and select Refit. Then Zoom In asshown.

Figure 56: Zooming In after Refit

20. Click to test the animation.

Task 6. Add a driver to the timeline.

1. Click Animation > Driver > Main > Include.

2. Drag the Driver to the following location on the timeline.

Figure 57: Dragging Driver

Task 7. Create a body-body lock for the duration of the driver.

1. Click and select the F3_DRIVESHAFT as the Lead body.



NOTES

2. Select the HUB and the BLADES as Follower bodies, and clickApply > Close.

3. Reposition the Body-Body lock on the timeline as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 58: Repositioning Body Lock

4. Add a final START view, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 59: Final Start View


6. Click to test the animation.

7. Click to play the animation. Setup the dialog box, as shown inthe following figure.



NOTES

Figure 60: Animate Dialog Box

8. Click to play the animation in a continuous loop.

9. After viewing the animation through a few cycles, click Captureto export an MPEG movie. Type [Animation] as the filename,accept all the defaults, and click Ok. The Mpeg will take about 10minutes to generate.




NOTES


• How to create a mechanism.

• How to animate a design.



Page 21-1

Module

Creating Photorealistic ImagesIn this module you learn to create photo-realistic images of solid

models using PhotoRender.

Objectives


• Define and set appropriate views.

• Define room and set its textures.

• Define and set appearances.

• Set lights.

• Render a scene using different options.

• Manipulate images.



NOTES

CREATING PHOTOREALISTIC IMAGESYou can create photo-realistic images of Pro/ENGINEER models, parts orassemblies, using PhotoRender. PhotoRender allows you to:

• Setup a scene.

• Render the scene.

• Manipulate the images.

PhotoRender InterfaceAll the functions needed to set a scene and to render it can be accessedfrom the PhotoRender menu bar. You can also save and edit images, startand shutdown the rendering process using this menu bar. To activate thePhotoRender menu bar, click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender.

Figure 1: The PhotoRender Menu Bar

SETTING UP A SCENEA scene involves an illuminated model assigned with appearances and anenvironment. To create a scene, you need to:

• Set an appropriate perspective view .

• Set a room around the model.

• Define and assign appearances.

• Set the lights to illuminate the model.


Creat ing Photoreal is t ic Im ages Page 21-3

NOTES

Mold assigned withappearances The view to render

Floor with marbletexture

Wall with texture

Light

Figure 2: The Scene for the Mold Model

Setting up Views and RoomIn real life, you always see an object with a background in perspectiveview. To create a realistic rendering, you need to define a view in whichyou would like to render the model and create an environment around it.

Setting and Saving Views

The PhotoRender menu bar helps you to set and save the views in whichyou would like to render the model, without exiting the PhotoRendermode. Pro/ENGINEER displays the model in trimetric view by default. Toadd realism, render the model in a perspective view instead of thetrimetric. You can set perspective views using the PhotoRender menu bar.

Figure 3: The Trimetric and Perspective Views



NOTES

Setting up Rooms

A room helps you to locate the model in an environment. It has six sides,which are termed as Walls, Floor and Ceiling. Each side of the room canbe independently moved and positioned with respect to the model. All thesides of a room can be mapped with different textures. These texturesdetermine the visual component of the scene around the model.

By default, a room is displayed in the wire frame mode and the Wall2 andFloor is displayed with a grid. You can choose to display the room in ashaded mode.

Figure 4: Room in Wireframe Display Mode



NOTES

Figure 5: Room in Shaded Display Mode

Defining and Setting AppearancesAppearances are a combination of a number of attributes that define thelook of a material like wood, steel, gold, rubber etc. These attributesinclude color, shininess, reflections, transparency and maps etc. You canmodify these attributes to create appearances using the APPEARANCEEDITOR dialog box.

Figure 6: Different Appearances.

To create complex appearances, PhotoRender allows you to assignTexture, Bump and a Decal maps.



NOTES

Figure 7: Spheres with Different Maps Assigning Appearances

You can set appearances using the APPEARANCES dialog box. In partmode you can assign appearances to selected surfaces or to the full part. Inassembly mode, you can assign an appearance to a component or to thefull assembly.

Setting up LightsA good lighting scheme enhances the realism and visual appeal of a scene.By default the PhotoRender illuminates the model with two lights,Ambient and Direction light. To create a good rendering, you may createappropriate lights, using the LIGHTS dialog box. The PhotoRender allowsyou to create four types of lights:

• Point – A point light is like an incandescent light bulb, which emitsthe light from its center in all the directions.

• Direction – A direction light emits parallel beam of light rays from aninfinite distance. It does not have a specific position.

• Spot – A spotlight is like a Point light whose rays are confined withina cone.

Using the LIGHTS dialog box, you can switch on /off a light, delete alight, or modify properties of a light.

You can define or modify the properties of a light, using the LIGHTEDITOR dialog box. The LIGHT EDITOR dialog box locates a light withrespect to the model, enables it to cast shadows and manipulate the color.



NOTES

RENDERING A SCENEYou can render a scene after setting it up. The system calculates thereflections, the highlights, transparency, shadows etc and creates an imageof the scene.

Figure 8: Rendered Scene

PhotoRender allows you to choose a number of options using RENDERCONFIGURATION dialog box, to create different visual effects. Followingare some of the major options that you can set using RENDERCONFIGURATION dialog box:

• Render Quality

• SelfShadows

• Reflections

• Render Room

• Reflect On Floor

• Shadows On Floor

• Geometric Texture Sharpen

• Manipulating Images



NOTES

PhotoRender allows you to manipulate images using the Image Editor.

Figure 9: Image Editor Window

Some of the major functions that you can perform using the Image Editorare:

• Converting the image formats

• Resizing the Images

• Mirroring the Images

• Rotating the images.

• Creating a Decal

• Sharpening the images

• Stylizing the images



NOTES


In this laboratory you create photorealistic images of your

Pro/ENGINEER models.

Method

In Exercise 1, you explore the PhotoRender tools. You create lights androom ambience for the finished fan assembly from the project.

Tools

Table 1: PhotoRender Icons

Icons DescriptionModify lights

Modify perspective view

Render model

Modify Appearance

Modify room configuration

Modify rendering configuration options

Delete light

Create spotlight



NOTES

EXERCISE 1: Using PhotoRender

Task 1. Open the model and activate PhotoRender.


2. Open FAN_PHOTORENDER.ASM..

Figure 10: Finished Fan Assembly

3. Click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender.

Figure 11: PhotoRender Icon Bar

Task 2. A rectangular room controls the environment around the model.The system provides a default room that you can modify to suit yourrequirements. Open the ROOM EDITOR dialog box and familiarizeyourself with the room.

1. Click [Modify room configuration]. Notice the defaulttextures applied on the walls, floor and ceiling.



NOTES

Note:

You can change the room size using the thumb-wheels or thetext box.

2. Click Close when finished examining the dialog box.

Task 3. Appearances display a part in a specific material. You candefine your own appearances and assign them to the parts or to anassembly. Familiarize yourself with the basics of creating and setting anappearance.

1. Click [Modify appearance]. Notice that the Palette contains adefault appearance. You can add more appearances. You can alsoassign the appearances using the APPEARANCES dialog box.

2. Click Add in the APPEARANCES dialog box. Notice that theBASIC, ADVANCED and DETAIL tabs contain number ofattributes, which you can modify to create different appearances.

3. Close both the APPEARANCE EDITOR and APPEARANCES dialogboxes.

Task 4. Pro/ENGINEER illuminates the model with default lights. Youcan create specific lights to control the illumination of your model. Openthe LIGHTS dialog box and familiarize yourself with creation andmanipulation of lights.

1. Click [Modify lights]. Notice the two default lights in theLights dialog box. You can add the Point, Spot or Direction lightsusing the pull-down menu or icons. You can also edit, delete, orswitch a light on or off.



NOTES

Switch On/Off theselected light usingthis button.

Create Point,Direction and Spotlights using thesebuttons.

Figure 12: The Lights Dialog Box

Task 5. Create a new light.

1. Click [Create spotlight] in the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box.Notice that you can manipulate the position, direction and spreadangle of the light in the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box.

2. Click OK to close the LIGHTS EDITOR dialog box. Notice thenewly added light in the Lights dialog box.

3. Delete the spotlight. Click [Delete light] in the LIGHTS dialogbox.

4. Close the LIGHTS dialog box.

Task 6. Render the Model. When you render a model, the systemcalculates the reflections and shadows in relation to the room,appearances, and lights that you have set. By default, the system creates alow quality preview rendering of your scene and displays it in the currentPro/ENGINEER window.

1. Click [Render model]. Wait until the system renders themodel and displays the image in Pro/ENGINEER window. Noticethat the transparency and textures are not visible, even though theattributes are enabled.



NOTES

Figure 13: The Initial Rendering

Task 7. There are many configuration options to control the renderingoutput of your model. Change a few settings and render the model again.

1. Exit PhotoRender temporaril. Click [Close dialog box].

2. Click View > Model Setup > Color and Appearance.

3. Click Modify from Model then select the color used on the frontcover.

4. Select the ADVANCED tab and drag the Transparency slider to50% as shown in the following figure.



NOTES

Figure 14: Changing Transparency

5. Similarly, modify the rear cover material and make it 50%transparent.

6. Click OK > Close.

7. Click View > Model Setup > PhotoRender.

8. Click [Modify rendering configuration options]. Set theoptions as shown in the following figure.

Figure 15: Setting Options

9. Click Close and [Render model].

10. Wait for the system to render the model and display the image inthe Pro/ENGINEER window. Notice the transparency and thereflections on the main body.



NOTES

Figure 16: Rendering with the Changed Options

Task 8. OPTIONAL: Change the Background display

1. The following two images are saved in current folder.

Figure 17: Fan Layout



NOTES

Figure 18: Scene to Experiment

2. Experiment with the Room Setup options to use these images asbackgrounds or wall textures.

Figure 19: Creating Backgrounds

3. Close all windows, and click File > Erase > Not Displayed.



NOTES


• The basic capabilities of PhotoRender.

• How to create a photo-realistic image of a model using PhotoRenderfunctionality.



Page A-1

Appendix

Using PTC HelpYou can use PTC Help to quickly search for Pro/ENGINEER

information. PTC Help includes quick references and detailed

information on selected topics.

Objectives


• Start PTC Help.

• Search for specific information about Pro/ENGINEER.

• Obtain context-sensitive help while performing a task.


Page A-2 Append ix A

NOTES

PTC HELP OVERVIEW

PTC Help is a fully functional help system that is integrated into

Pro/ENGINEER.

PTC Help Features

PTC Help offers:

• A new help system with a table of contents, an index, and searchingcapability

• Context-sensitive help, allowing access to PTC Help with a click ofthe mouse

• Online Tutorials focussed on teaching different aspects of the software

• Expanded help topics available as special dialog boxes

Please visit the PTC Technical Support Online Knowledge Database,

which features thousands of Suggested Techniques. For more

information, see the Technical Support Appendix.

USING Pro/ENGINEER HELP

Launching Help: Four Methods

There are four procedures for launching the help system.

1. Main Menu

This is the standard way of accessing the full-blown help system complete

with contents, index, and search capabilities. Depending on your system

speed, it may take a few seconds to launch the entire help system.

Click Help > Contents and Index from the main menu as shown in the

following figure.


Using PTC Help Page A-3

NOTES

Figure 1 Starting PTC Help

The Pro/ENGINEER Online Help homepage appears in your web browser

window.

Figure 2: Contents and Index in PTC Help

In the left frame of the window, you see a list of topics arranged in a tree

structure. By clicking on each higher level topic, you can access sub-

topics, and by clicking the sub-topics you can access detailed instructions,

explanations, and tips.



NOTES

2. Context-Sensitive Help

1. Click on the right end of the main toolbar.

2. Click on any icon or any part of the Pro/ENGINEER main window

about which you want an explanation.

3. A browser window opens that explains the topic.

4. In the following example, clicking on the model tree icon in the

toolbar launched a browser window that explained the icon

functionality.

Figure 3: Context-Sensitive Help

5. In addition, you will also notice at the lower left there is a “See

Also” link which on clicking provides a list of related topics that

may be of immediate interest.



NOTES

6. You may click on any topic you want to read additionally.

Figure 4: The ‘See Also’ List of Topics

3. Pro/ENGINEER Menu Manager

1. Click on the right end of the main Pro/ENGINEER toolbar.

2. Click any menu command from the menu manager.

3. A TOPIC ROUTER browser window opens with a list of topic links

that explain the menu command.

4. Click the topic you want to read.

5. In the following example, clicking on X-Section in the menu

manager launched the TOPIC ROUTER browser window with a list

of two useful topics.



NOTES

Figure 5: Launching Help through Menu Manager

4. Vertical Menu Commands

1. Right-click and hold on a menu command until the GETHELP

window appears.

Figure 6: Right-Clicking in Menu Manager



NOTES

PTC HELP MODULES

There are four main branches in the PTC Help table of contents:

Welcome, Pro/ENGINEER Foundation, Using Foundation Modules, and

Using Additional Modules.

Figure 7: Four Main Branches in Help System

Refer to the following list to find a particular module in the table of

contents:

Figure 8: Foundation and Additional Modules in Help



Page B-1

Appendix

PTC Global Services: Technical SupportPTC Global Services is committed to providing top quality assistance

to our customers. In addition to our Technical Support Hotline, we

also offer Web-based assistance to fit your individual needs by

providing 24 hour / 7 day availability.

PTC Global Services is committed to continually improving customer

service. Through our Quality Monitoring Program we have

demonstrated our commitment to service by achieving Global ISO

9000 Certification for our Technical Support offerings.

Objectives


• Open a Technical Support Call.

• Register for on-line Technical Support.

• Navigate the PTC Products Knowledge Base.

• Find telephone numbers for technical support and services.


Page B-2 Append ix B

NOTES

FINDING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT WEB PAGE

Choose Support from the PTC Home Page www.ptc.com or go directly to

www.ptc.com/support/support.htm.

OPENING TECHNICAL SUPPORT CALLS

Opening Technical Support Calls via E-mail

Send email to [email protected] with copen as the e-mail subject.

Please use the following format (or download the template from

www.ptc.com/cs/doc/copen.htm):

FNAME: First Name

LNAME: Last Name

CALLCENTER: U.S., Germany, France, U.K., Singapore, or

Tokyo

PHONE: NNN NNN-NNNN x-NNNN

CONFIG_ID: NNNNNN

PRODUCT: X

MODULE: XX

PRIORITY: X

DESC_BEGIN:

description starts

description continues

description ends

DESC_END


Custom er Support In fo rmat ion Page B-3

NOTES

Opening Technical Support Calls via Telephone

Call us directly by telephone (refer to the Contact Information page for

your Local Technical Support Center).

The Technical Support Engineer will ask you for the following

information when logging a call:

• Your PTC software Configuration ID

• Your name and telephone number

• The PTC product (module) name

• Priority of the issue

Opening Technical Support Calls via the Web

You can use the PTC Web site www.ptc.com/support to open Technical

Support calls 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by using the Pro/CALL

LOGGER

Sending Data Files to PTC Technical Support

To send data files to PTC Technical Support, please follow the

instructions at: www.ptc.com/support/cs_guide/additional.htm.

When the call is resolved your data will be deleted by the Technical

Support Engineer. Your data will not be divulged to any third party

vendors under any circumstances. You may also request a Non-Disclosure

Agreement from the Technical Support Engineer.



NOTES

Routing Your Technical Support Calls

Call

Customer question

Telephone Call Web Call

Tech SupportEngineer

creates a call in the database

Call is automatically created

in the database

Investigation Call Back and Investigation

Support Engineer

solves issue or

reports it

to Development (SPR)

SPRSoftware Performance Report

Software Performance Report (SPR)

SPR Verification through Tech. Support Engineer

Update CD to customer

SPR fixed from Development



NOTES

Technical Support Call Priorities

• Extremely Critical – Work stopped

• Critical – Work severely impacted

• Urgent – Work impacted

• Not Critical

• General Information

Software Performance Report Priorities

• Top Priority – Highly critical software issue that is causing a workstoppage.

• High – Critical software issue that affects immediate work and apractical alternative technique is not available.

• Medium – Software issue that does not affect immediate work or apractical alternative technique is available.

REGISTERING FOR ON-LINE SUPPORT

Go to www.ptc.com/support and click Sign-up Online, to open the

registration form and enter your Configuration ID.

To find your Pro/ENGINEER Configuration ID, click Help > About

Pro/ENGINEER.

Complete the information needed to identify yourself as a user with your

personal data. Please write down your username and password for future

reference.



NOTES

ONLINE SERVICES

After you have registered, you will have full access to all Online Tools.

You can search our Knowledge Base using a Search-Engine. Our Online

Support Applications controls the status of calls (Call Tracker) and SPRs

(SPR Tracker) and adds comments to these. If you add a comment, the

Technical Support Engineer assigned to your call will be notified

automatically.

Additionally, contact information such as the customer feedback line and

electronic order of software and manuals are available.

The Software Update Tool allows you to request the latest software

updates for any PTC product.

FINDING ANSWERS IN THE KNOWLEDGE BASE

The Technical Support Knowledge Base contains over 18,000 documents.

Technical Application Notes (TANs), Technical Point of Interest (TPIs),

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs), and Suggested Techniques offer up-

to-date information about all relevant software areas. All FAQs and

Suggested Techniques are available in English, French, and German.



NOTES

Terminology used by Technical Support

TAN – Technical Application Note provides information about SPRs that

may affect more than just the customer originally reporting an issue.

TANs also may provide alternative techniques to allow a user to continue

working.

TPI – Technical Point of Interest provides additional technical information

about a software product. TPIs are created by Technical Support to

document the resolution of common issues reported in actual customer

calls. TPIs are similar to TANs, but do not reference an SPR.

Suggested Techniques – Provides step-by-step instructions including

screen snapshots, on how to use PTC software to complete common tasks.

FAQ – Frequently Asked Questions provides answers to many of the most

commonly asked questions compiled from the PTC Technical Support

database.



NOTES

GETTING UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION

To subscribe to our Knowledge Base Monitor e-mail service, go to

www.ptc.com/support.

1. Click Technical Support > Online Support Applications >

Knowledge Base Monitor.

2. Select the PTC Product or Module for which you want to get

information.

3. You will receive daily e-mail with update information; this can

help you by upgrading to a new PTC product or to a new release.

Figure 1: Knowledge Base Monitor Sign Up



NOTES

CONTACT INFORMATION

PTC Technical Support Worldwide ElectronicServices.

These services are available seven days a week, 24 hours a day.

Web:

• www.ptc.com/support/index.htm (Support)

• www.ptc.com/company/contacts/edserv.htm (Education)

E-mail:

• [email protected] (for opening calls and sending data)

• [email protected] (for comments or suggestions aboutthe Customer Service Web site)

FTP (for transferring files to PTC Technical Support):

• ftp.ptc.com

Technical Support Customer Feedback Line

The Customer Feedback Line is intended for general customer service

concerns that are not technical product issues.

E-mail:

• [email protected]

Telephone:

• www.ptc.com/cs/doc/feedback_nums.htm



NOTES

Telephone

For assistance with technical issues, contact the Electronic Services noted

in the previous section, or the Technical Support line as listed in the Phone

and Fax Information sections below.

PTC has nine integrated Technical Support Call Centers in North

America, Europe, and Asia. Our worldwide coverage ensures telephone

access to Technical Support for customers in all time zones and in local

languages.

North America Phone Information

Customer Services (including Technical Support, License Management,

and Documentation Requests):

Within the United States and Canada:

• 800-477-6435

Outside the United States and Canada:

• 781-370-5332

• 781-370-5513

Maintenance:

• 888-782-3774

Education:

• 888-782-3773



NOTES

Europe Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:

Austria 0800 29 7542

Belgium 0800-15-241 (French)

0800-72567 (Dutch)

Denmark 8001-5593

Finland 0800-117092

France 0800-14-19-52

Germany 0180-2245132

49-89-32106-111 (for Pro/MECHANICA® outside of

Germany)

Ireland 1-800-409-1622

Israel 1-800-945-42-95 (All languages including Hebrew)

177-150-21-34 (English only)

Italy 800-79-05-33

Luxembourg 0800-23-50

Netherlands 0800022-4519

Norway 8001-1872

Portugal 05-05-33-73-69

South Africa 0800-991068

Spain 900-95-33-39

Sweden 020-791484

Switzerland 0800-55-38-33 (French)

0800-83-75-58 (Italian)

0800-552428 (German)

United Kingdom 0800-318677

License Management Phone Numbers:

Belgium 0800-75376

Denmark 8001-5593

Finland 0800-117-092

Eastern Europe 44 1252 817 078



NOTES

France 0800-14-19-52

Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-0

Ireland 1-800-409-1622

Italy 39 (0) 39-65651

Netherlands 0800-022-0543

Norway 8001-1872

Portugal 05-05-33-73-69

Russia 44 1252 817 078

Spain 900-95-33-39

Sweden 020-791484

Switzerland 41 (0) 1-8-24-34-44

United Kingdom 0800-31-8677

Education Services Phone Numbers:

Benelux 31-73-644-2705

France 33-1-69-33-65-50

Germany 49 (0) 89-32106-325

Italy 39-039-65-65-652

39-039-6565-1

Spain/Portugal 34-91-452-01-00

Sweden 46-8-590-956-00 (Malmo)

46-8-590-956-46 (Upplands Vasby)

Switzerland 41 (0) 1-820-00-80

United Kingdom 44-0800-212-565 (toll free within UK)

44-1252-817-140

Asia and Pacific Rim Phone Information

Technical Support Phone Numbers:

Australia 1800-553-565

China* 10800-650-8185 (international toll free)

108-657 (manual toll free)

Hong Kong 800-933309

India* 000-6517



NOTES

Indonesia 001-803-65-7250

7-2-48-55-00-35

Japan 120-20-9023

Malaysia 1-800-80-1026

New Zealand 0800-44-4376

Philippines 1800-1-651-0176

Singapore 65-830-9899

South Korea 00798-65-1-7078 (international toll free)

080-3469-001 (domestic toll free)

Taiwan 0080-65-1256 (international toll free)

080-013069 (domestic toll free)

Thailand 001-800-65-6213

*Note: Callers dialing from India or China must provide the operator with

the respective string:

China MTF8309729

India MTF8309752

The operator will then connect you to the Singapore Technical Support

Center.

License Management Phone Numbers

Japan 81 (0) 3-3346-8280

Hong Kong (852) 2802-8982

Education Services Phone Numbers

Australia 61 2 9955 2833 (Sydney)

61 3 9561 4111 (Melbourne)

China 86-20-87554426 (GuangZhou)

86-21-62785080 (Shanghai)

86-10-65908699 (Beijing)

Hong Kong 852-28028982

India 91-80-2267272 Ext.#306 (Bangalore)

91-11-6474701 (New Delhi)

91-226513152 (Mumbai)



NOTES

Japan 81-3-3346-8268

Malaysia 03-754 8198

Singapore 65-8309866

South Korea 82-2-3469-1080

Taiwan 886-2-758-8600 (Taipei)

886-4-3103311 (Taichung)

886-7-3323211 (Kaohsiung)

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

Up-to-Date

Information+ Worldwide

ISO 9000

Certification

Quality Control

System

= Maximum

Productivity

with

PTC

Products


��

��

��

��

��

��

• � �� !��"�� #

• � �� #

• � $�� #


�� ! �" ��

��#�$

#��%��&�'��(�$�)�&��*��'�+��#�

�%��%�� &��'�� (%)'�*��

�� &�� #�%)'�� +� ��

�� &��

• � %��"�� ,"��-�� .��/��,+��&� &��-�� 0

�� #

• � ��1��&/��,�&�� -��"�� "� �� 2� ��3#

• � ��1�� .�� 1��

��#

• � %�� "��

�� #�%��

� �� "� �� 4��.�� +��

�� #

� ��5��&� �� "��

�� .��"� �� "��

�� .�� #�� .��

�� #��%��%�� &

��'�� "��#

%��%��%)'�� .��

• � �� !��"��

• � �� '�� 6��&'��

• � �� '�� 6��&��

��,�&�#�*

)�� %�4�� '��

��

�� !��"��#

%�� !��"��

�� .��

�%��#�6��

�� #


�� ,�&�#�*� ��-

��#�$

%�� !��"��

��"�� #��

��7��"�� 1��7��

��(38�*#

�$$�$$.��#��*�#�*��

%�� !��"��

��4��.��#�8�� 1��

�� +��"�� #

%�� !��"��"��

��

• � %��/�� 1�� #

• � %�� 9�� +��"�� #

• � � ��+��"��&��"�� "�� "�� #

��&��"�� 1��

�� !��"��: ��/��

8�� "��

��#�;�� "��%)'��#�%��

%)'�� !�"��#

�� "��

www.ptc.com/services/edserv/proficiency.htm


��/ � ��! �" ��

��#�$

&�(�*�#�*��*��#��&

'��

��

��

.� ��!

� ��1��<��.�� "�� "��#

�0�*��$��1��2 �� 2��

�� '�� %)'�

�� =http://www-ed.ptc.com/Evaluator/>��#

�� %��%�� )��'�� (%)'�*��#

��<��%)'��2��


�� ,�&�#�*� ��3

��#�$

�� #

�� 1�� "�� .��

� � �� #

�� %�.�� !��"��1�#

�� !�� #�� !��"��

�� #

��?��%�.� �� 1�

�� ;�'��@�;��&�� .�� #

�� :��3��23��;� %�� .��#�%��/�� #


��4 � ��! �" ��

��#�$

�� %�� /�� 1�� .�� #

�� /��

�� A�� &��#

�� !!�� .#

�� 3�"�� #� �� /��250#

�� '�� $�':�%83�� #

�� !��$�':�%83��.�� ;��%�3B�C��%#�3%��.� ��#

�� .�� #

�� $�':�%83��#

�� .��"��#�� $�':�%83��1�#

�� $��#

�� 1�#��"��"�� &�� #��

�� /�� ;��

A�� #��&�� /�� &��

3�� #

�� %�� 1�� "��/�� 1�#�� .��.�� #��@��

� �� #

�� %��%)'��.�� #


�� ,�&�#�*� ��5

��#�$

.�)&��$..�*�

� ��

• � C��.�� !��"�� #

• � C��"��1�#



INDEX Page-1

INDEXFundamentals of DesignAppearances, 21-5

Image Manipulation, 21-7Scene Rendering, 21-7Setting up lights, 21-6

AssembliesComponentsRepeating placement, 8-7Replacing manually, 8-6Creating features in, 6-4Exploded Views, 8-7Modifying, 8-2Replacing components, 8-4Repositioning components, 8-3Subassemblies, 8-2using with Family Tables, 8-4

AssemblyConnections Types, 20-3Connections vs. Constraints, 20-3Dragging Components, 20-4Motion, 20-4

Automatic Assembly, 10-10Controlling Interdependencies

Copy Geom Features, 13-8Object-Specific Reference Control, 13-6Reference Control Settings, 13-7

Curvessee also Surfaces, 4-9

Design AnimationCapabilities, 20-10Introduction, 20-9Keyframe Sequences, 20-10Manager, 20-12Mechanism Re-use, 20-12Tools, 20-11

Design Intent, 10-12Drafts

Available types, 2-4Creating, 2-3Creating Neutral Curve, 2-5Creating Neutral Plane, 2-4Guidelines for using, 2-2

DriversGeometric, 20-6Joint Axis, 20-5Selecting, 20-5

Exploded Views, 8-7

Family Tables, 5-2Advantages of using, 5-3Assembly, 5-7Creating, 5-4General structure, 5-3Generics, 5-4Instance Accelerator Files, 5-12Instance Index Files, 5-12Instances, 5-5Modifying, 5-8Options, 5-12Testing Instances, 5-6

FilletsElliptical, 1-5

Geometric Entities, 1-2Conic entities, 1-2Conic sections, 1-3Creating axes normal to sketch plane, 1-2Elliptical fillets, 1-5Sketcher points, 1-4Splines, 1-6

GeometryDeveloping with Rounds, 2-12

Helical Sweeps, 3-9Inheritance Features, 5-12

Capabilities, 5-13Creating, 5-13Using, 5-13

Instance Acceleratorsee also Family Tables, 5-12

ISDXsee also Surfaces, 4-8

Layouts, 10-6Global information, 10-8

Local Groups, 7-2Breaking Dependencies, 7-4Manipulating, 7-2Patterning Features, 7-2Ungrouping, 7-4

Map PartsConstructing, 12-2Subassembly Level, 12-5Surfaces, 12-4Using Model Geometry, 12-3

MechanismImplementing, 20-6


Page-2 INDEX

In Assemblies, 20-3Motion Simulation, 20-4Overview, 20-2

Mechanism DesignWith Cam/Slot Connections, 20-8Without Cam/Slot Connections, 20-6

Model DesignCreating surfaces, 4-2

Parallel Modeling, 4-7Parent/Child Relationship

Defining, 13-2Hierarchy, 13-6Listing References, 13-5

PartsCreating intersections, 6-2Merging and Cutting, 6-2Mirrored, 6-3

Patterns, 6-6Assembly mode, 6-11Dimension, 6-7Tables, 6-7Types, 6-6

Photorender, 21-2Interface, 21-2Setting a scene, 21-2Setting up rooms, 21-4Setting views, 21-3

Pro/ProgramExample, 19-3Interchanging Components, 19-7Lower Level Program, 19-7Manipulating Features, 19-10

ProgramAssembly Design Process, 19-6Editing, 19-9Making Changes, 19-8Part Design Process, 19-2Running, 19-9Structure, 19-2

Reference ToolsGlobal Reference Viewer, 13-5Info Pull-Down Menu, 13-4Model Tree, 13-4

ReferencesCreating Dependencies, 13-2Existing, 13-4External, 13-2

Regeneration FailureExamples, 18-4

Replace, 1-7Dimensions, 1-8Sketched entities, 1-7

Resolve

Diagnosing Cause, 18-3Fixing Failure, 18-3

Resolve Mode, 18-2Rounds

Advanced, 2-9Cross-sections, 2-10Geometry, 2-12Selecting References, 2-7Sets, 2-10Setting extents, 2-8Setting radius, 2-8Simple, 2-6Transitions, 2-9

ShrinkwrapAssociative, 9-22Creating, 9-22, 9-23Merge Solid, 9-20Surface Subset, 9-19Types, 9-17

Simplified Representations, 9-2Creating, 9-5Customized Reps, 9-5

Skeletons, 10-5Controlling, 11-5Creating, 11-4Definition, 11-2Modeling with, 11-5Properties, 11-5Relating Assembly Components, 11-4Uses, 11-2With Mapped Geometry, 12-2

SplinesCreating, 1-6Creating Normal-to-Original, 3-3

STYLE, 4-6Concepts, 4-6

Surfaces, 4-2Blends, Transitions, 4-11Capped Ends, 4-4Changing displays, 4-2Creating 2-D, 3-D curves, 4-8Creating curves on surface, 4-9Creating freeform, 4-10Creating merged, 4-4Creating styling models, 4-10Designing, 4-5Open Ends, 4-4Part Mode, 4-2Reverse Styling, 4-12see also STYLE, 4-6Solid features, 4-5

Swept Blends, 3-2Additional trajectories, 3-4


INDEX Page-3

Creating splines, 3-2Orienting Cross-sections, 3-8Variable Section, 3-3, 3-7

TextDimensions, 1-8

Top-Down Design, 10-2Assembly Skeletons, 10-5Assembly Structure Definition, 10-2Automatic assembly, 10-10Copying reference geometry, 10-5Creating parts without geometry, 10-4Design intent, 10-2, 10-5, 10-12Layouts, 10-6

UDFsee also User-Defined Features, 7-5

User-Defined Features, 7-5Creating, 7-5Creating in assemblies, 7-8Placing in models, 7-7


Documents

Pro Engineer 3.20 tutorial